The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutHafner-Bergman Corporation; 2001-01-05; 338418672 DOC # 2001-0957499 - RECORDED REQUESTED BY I CITY OF CARLSBAD AND WHEN RECORDED PLEASE MAIL TO: DEC 27. 2001 10~41 AM rnICIk RECORDS City Clerk City of Carlsbad 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive ccb Carlsbad. California 92008 2001-09674@ Aq I Space above this line for Recorder's use. ,&l.' PARCEL NO: Georglna Cole Library NOTICE OF COMPLETION Notice is hereby given that: 1. The undersigned is owner of the interest or estate stated below in the property hereinafter 2. The full name of the undersigned is City of Carlsbad, a municipal corporation. 4. The nature of the title of the undersigned is: In fee. 3. The full address of the undersigned is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California 92008. 5. A work or improvement on the property hereinafter described was completed on November 6,2001. 6. The name of the contractor, if any, for such work or improvement is The Bergman Companies, dba, Hafner - Bergman Corporation. 7. The property on which said work or improvement was completed is in the City of Carfssad, County of San Diego, State of California, and is described as follows: Georgina Cole Library Remodel, Phase 2, Project No. 33841. described. 8. The street address of said property is within the limits of the City of Carlspad. VERIFICATION OF CITY CLERK I, the undersigned, say: 92008; the City Manager of said City on December '18 I am the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad, 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, , 2001, accepted the above described work as completed and ordered that a Notice of Completion be filed. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on December 21 ,2001, at Carlsbad, California. KiREN R. KUNDTZ, Assistant City Clerk . ~~~ ~ 4 CITY OF CARLSBAD San Diego County, California Community Development and Library Departments CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS For GEORGINA COLE LIBRARY REMODEL PHASE 2: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT NO. 33841 Contract No. 33841 Paae 1 of 76 Paoes TABLE OF CONTENTS m Page Notice Inviting Bids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Contractor’s Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Bid Security Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Bidder’s Bond To Accompany Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Guide For Completing the “Designation Of Subcontractor and Amount Of Subcontractor’s Bid Items” and “Designation of Owner Operator/Lessor and Amount Of Owner Operator/Lessor Work” Forms.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Designation Of Subcontractor and Amount Of Subcontractor’s Bid Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Designation Of Owner Operator/Lessor and Amount Of Owner Operator/Lessor Work . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Bidder’s Statement Of Financial Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Bidder’s Statement Of Technical Ability And Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Bidder’s Certificate Of Insurance For General Liability, Employers’ Liability, Automotive Liability And Workers’ Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Bidder’s Statement Of Re Debarment.. ..................................................................................... 26 Bidder’s Disclosure Of Discipline Record ........................................................................ 27 Non-Collusion Affidavit To Be Executed By Bidder And Submitted With Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Contract Public Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Labor And Materials Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Faithful Performance/Warranty Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Optional Escrow Agreement For Surety Deposits In Lieu Of Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 b q 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 2 of 76 Pages Part 1 Section 1 Terms, Definitions Abbreviations And Symbols l-l Terms ............................................................................................................... 43 1-2 Definitions. ........................................................................................................ 1-3 Abbreviations .................................................................................................... Section 2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-9 2-10 Section 3 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 Section 4 Control Of Materials 4-l Materials And Workmanship.. ........................................................................... 58 4-2 Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage.. .............................................. Section 5 5-l 5-4 5-6 Section 6 6-l 6-2 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 Section 7 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-7 7-8 7-10 7-13 Section 8 8-2 8-6 % 3 9/l 1 /oo SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS General Provisions Scope And Control Of The Work Subcontracts .................................................................................................... 45 Contract Bonds ................................................................................................. Plans And Specifications .................................................................................. Surveying ......................................................................................................... Authority Of Board And Engineer ...................................................................... Changes In Work Changes Initiated by the Agency.. .................................................................... 53 Extra Work.. ...................................................................................................... Changed Conditions ......................................................................................... Disputed Work .................................................................................................. Utilities Location ............................................................................................................ 59 Relocation ........................................................................................................ Cooperation.. .................................................................................................... Prosecution, Progress And Acceptance Of The Work Construction Schedule And Commencement Of Work ...................................... 60 Prosecution Of Work ........................................................................................ Delays And Extensions Of Time .................. ..................................................... Time of Completion .......................................................................................... Completion And Acceptance ............................................................................. Liquidated Damages ......................................................................................... Responsibilities Of The Contractor Liability Insurance ............................................................................................. 67 Workers’ Compensation Insurance.. ................................................................. Permits ............................................................................................................. Cooperation and Collateral Work.. ............... ..................................................... Project Site Maintenance.. ........................... ..................................................... Public Convenience And Safety.. ...................................................................... Laws To Be Observed ................................. ..................................................... Facilities For Agency Personnel Field Office Facilities .................................... ..................................................... 73 Basis Of Payment.. ........................................................................................... Contract No. 33841 Page 3 of 76 Pages Section 9 Measurement and Payment 9-l Measurement Of Quantities For Unit Price Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*................*........... 74 9-3 Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~......................... . . . . ..*.............................................. PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (Not included in this specification; incorporated by reference and a part of this document. Copies available at City for reference if needed. Section 200 Rock Materials 200-2 Untreated Base Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 201 201-I Concrete, Mortar And Related Materials Portland Cement Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 203 203-6 203-l 1 Bituminous Materials Asphalt Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asphalt Pavement Crack Sealants ,..,.......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 204 Lumber And Treatment With Preservatives 204-I Lumber And Plywood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 206 206-7 206-8 206-9 Miscellaneous Metal Items Traffic Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Gage Steel Tubing And Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable Changeable Message Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 207 207-2 207-25 Pipe Reinforced Concrete Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underground Utility Marking Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 209 208-I 208-2 208-3 208-4 208-5 208-6 208-7 209-8 Signals, Lighting And Electrical Systems General.. ........................................................................................................... Materials And Installation .................................................................................. Controller Assemblies.. ................................ ..................................................... Traffic Signal Faces And Fittings ...................................................................... Detectors.. ........................................................................................................ Lighting.. ........................................................................................................... Removing, Reinstalling Or Salvaging Electrical Equipment ............................... Payment ........................................................................................................... Section 210 21 O-l 210-3 Paint And Protective Coatings Paint.. ............................................................................................................... Galvanizing .................................................. ..................................................... Section 212 212-I 212-2 212-3 Landscape And Irrigation Materials Landscape Materials ......................................................................................... Irrigation System Materials .......................... ..................................................... Electrical Materials ...................................... ..................................................... Section 2 13 213-2 Engineering Fabrics Geotextiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn a 9/I l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 4 of 76 Pages 213-3 Erosion Control Specialties . . . . . . . ..*................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nn Section 214 Pavement Markers 214-5 Reflective Pavement Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nn PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS (Not included in this specification; incorporated by reference and part of this document. Copies available at City for reference if needed.) Section 300 300-I 300-2 300-3 300-4 300-5 300-9 300-I 1 Earthwork Clearing And Grubbing ..................................................................................... Unclassified Excavation ..................................................................................... Structure Excavation And Backfill ...................................................................... Unclassified Fill.. ................................................................................................ Borrow Excavation.. ........................................................................................... Geotextiles For Erosion Control And Water Pollution Control. ........................... Stonework For Erosion Control.. ........................................................................ Section 301 Treated Soil, Subgrade Preparation And Placement Of Base Materials 301-I Subgrade Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 302 302-I 302-2 302-3 302-4 302-5 302-9 Roadway Surfacing Oiled Roadways And Shoulders ........................................................................ Chip Seal ........................................................................................................... Asphalt-Rubber Chip Seal Or Interlayer ............................................................ Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry.. .............................................................................. Asphalt Concrete Pavement .............................................................................. Asphalt Pavement Repairs And Remediation .................................................... Section 303 303-I 303-2 303-5 303-6 Concrete And Masonry Construction. Concrete Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air-Placed Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concrete Curbs, Walks, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Alley Intersections, Access Ramps, And Driveways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stamped Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 304 Metal Fabrication And Construction 304-3 Chain Link Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 306 Underground Conduit Construction 306-l Open Trench Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306-5 Abandonment Of Conduits And Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 307 307-3 307-4 Street Lighting And Traffic Signals Street Lighting Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Signal Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 308 308-2 308-4 308-5 308-6 Landscape And Irrigation Installation Earthwork And Topsoil Placement.. ................................................................... Planting ............................................................................................................. Irrigation System Installation.. ............................................................................ Maintenance And Plant Establishment .............................................................. 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 5 of 76 Pages Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn 308-7 Guarantee ......................................................................................................... Nn 308-8 Measurement And Payment .............................................................................. Nn 308-9 Wetland Mitigation ............................................................................................. Nn Section 310 310-5 310-7 Painting Painting Various Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanent Signing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nn Nn Section 312 312-1 Section 3 13 313-I 313-2 313-3 313-4 Pavement Marker Placement And Removal Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temporary Traffic Control Devices Temporary Traffic Pavement Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temporary Traffic Signing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temporary Railing (Type K) And Crash Cushions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement And Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nn Nn Nn Nn Nn LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900~CL Landscape.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Pages 1 through 15 inclusive 02970~CL Landscape Maintenance.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Pages 1 through 6 inclusive 02130-CL Shrub and Tree Boxing and Transplanting. . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . Pages 1 through 3 inclusive 02721-I -CL Landscape Drainage System.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Pages 1 through 2 inclusive 0281 O-CL Irrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1 through 14 inclusive 02870-CL Site Furnishings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.................... Pages 1 through 6 inclusive 04200-CL Landscape Unit Masonry / Stone.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Pages 1 through 6 inclusive ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO SSPWC, PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ----I-- Section 203: Bituminous Materials.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 1 through 12 inclusive PART 3, SPECIAL PROVISIONS ---------- Table of Contents and Sections 300 through 310.. . . . . ..Pages 1 through 18 inclusive AIA 201 SPECIFICATIONS, DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 16 -------s-- Table of Contents and Division Sections 1 - 16 . . . . . . . . ..Pages 1 through end inclusive SUPPLEMENTAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS --------- CSI Sections 16011 through 16520.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Pages 1 through end inclusive b q 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 6 of 76 Pages CITY OF CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA NOTICE INVITING BIDS Until 4:00 p.m. on Tuesday, November 28,2000, the City shall accept sealed bids, clearly marked as such, at the Faraday Center, 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314, Attn: Purchasing Officer, by mail, delivery service or by deposit in the Bid Box located in the first floor lobby, at which time they will be opened and read, for performing the work as follows: Exterior improvements to the City’s Georgina Cole Library, Phase 2, of the remodel of the facility addressed at 1250 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, 92008. CONTRACT NO. 33841 GEORGINA COLE LIBRARY REMODEL, PHASE 2 This bid and the terms of the Contract Documents and Supplemental Provisions constitute an irrevocable offer that shall remain valid and in full force for a period of 90 days and such additional time as may be mutually agreed upon by the City of Carlsbad and the Bidder. The work shall be performed in strict conformity with the plans and specifications as approved by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad on file with the Community Development Department. The specifications for the work include the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 1997 Edition, and the 1998 and 1999 supplements , all hereinafter designated “SSPWC” as issued by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association and as amended by the supplemental provisions sections of this contract. Reference is hereby made to the plans and specifications for full particulars and description of the work. The City of Carlsbad encourages the participation of minority and women-owned businesses. The City of Carlsbad encourages all bidders, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and contractors to utilize recycled and recyclable materials when available, appropriate and approved by the Engineer. The City of Carlsbad may disqualify a contractor or subcontractor from participating in bidding when a contractor or subcontractor has been debarred by the City of Carlsbad or another jurisdiction in the State of California as an irresponsible bidder. No bid will be received unless it is made on a proposal form furnished by the Purchasing Department. Each bid must be accompanied by security in a form and amount required by law. The bidder’s security of the second and third next lowest responsive bidders may be withheld until the Contract has been fully executed. The security submitted by all other unsuccessful bidders shall be returned to them, or deemed void, within ten (10) days after the Contract is awarded. Pursuant to the provisions of law (Public Contract Code section 10263) appropriate securities may be substituted for any obligation required by this notice or for any monies withheld by the City to ensure performance under this Contract. Section 10263 of the Public Contract Code requires monies or securities to be deposited with the City or a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow agent. The escrow agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the agent in connection with the handling of retentions under this section in an amount not less than $100,000 per contract. The documents which comprise the Bidder’s proposal and that must be completed and properly executed including notarization where indicated are: a 9111100 Contract No. 33841 Page 7 of 76 Pages 1. Contractor’s Proposal 2. Bidder’s Bond 3. Non-Collusion Affidavit 4. Designation of Subcontractors and Amount of Subcontractor Bid 5. Designation of Owner Operator/Lessors & Amount of Owner Operator/Lessor Work 6. Bidder’s Statement of Financial Responsibility 7. Bidder’s Statement of Technical Ability and Experience 8. Acknowledgement of Addendum(a) 9. Certificate of insurance. The riders covering the City, its officials, employees and volunteers may be omitted at the time of bid submittal but shall be provided by the Bidder prior to award of this contract. lO.Bidder’ s Statement Re Debarment 11. Bidder’s Disclosure Of Discipline Record 12.Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits - (optional, must be completed if the Bidder wishes to use the Escrow Agreement for Security) All bids will be compared. on the basis of the Engineer’s Estimate. The estimated quantities are approximate and serve solely as a basis for the comparison of bids. The Engineer’s Estimate is $750,000 for both the “base bid” plus Schedule “A” as defined herein. Except as provided herein a bid submitted to the City by a Contractor who is not licensed as a contractor pursuant to the Business and Professions Code shall be considered nonresponsive and shall be rejected by the City. In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted shall be invalidated by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. Where federal funds are involved the contractor shall be properly licensed at the time the contract is awarded. In all other cases the contractor shall state their license number, expiration date and classification in the proposal, under penalty of perjury. This invitation to bid does not involve federal funds. The following classifications are acceptable for this contract: A and B. CLASSIFICAT Classification A ASB B c-2 C-4 C-5 C-6 c-7 C-8 c-9 Cl0 Cl1 Cl2 Cl3 Cl4 Cl5 Cl6 Cl7 c20 Q 9/l l/O0 INS FOR CONTRACTORS ARE: Descriotion 1 General Engineering Asbestos Removal-Certification General Building Insulation and Acoustical Boiler, Hot Water Heating and Steam Fitting Carpentry Cabinet and Mill Work Low Voltage Communications and Wiring Systems Concrete Drywall General Electrical Elevator Installation Earthwork and Paving Fencing Metal Roofing Systems Flooring and Floor Covering Fire Protection Contractor Glazing Warm-Air Heating, Ventilating c57 Water Well Drilling C60 Welding NC61 Limited Specialty IHAZ DO3 ,D04 DO6 1 DO9 DIO 012 D16 D21 D24 D28 Contract No. 33841 Description Reinforcing Steel Structural Steel Swimming Pool Ceramic and Mosaic Tile Water Conditioning Hazardous Substance Removal Certification Awnings Central Vacuum Systems Concrete Related Services Drilling, Blasting and Oil Field Work Elevated Floors Synthetic Products Hardware, Locks and Safes Machinery and Pumps Metal Products Doors, Gates and Activating Page 6 of 76 Pages r c21 C23 C26 Lathing C27 C28 c29 C32 c33 c34 c35 C36 C38 c39 C42 c43 c45 C46 c47 and Air-Conditioning Building Moving and Wrecking Ornamental Metals Landscaping Lock and Security Equipment Masonry Parking and Highway Improvement Painting and Decorating Pipeline Plastering Plumbing Refrigeration Roofing Sanitation Systems Sheet Metal Electrical Signs Solar Manufactured Housing D29 D30 D31 034 D35 D38 D39 D41 D42 D49 D50 D52 053 D56 D59 D62 D63 D64 D65 Devices Paperhanging Pile Driving and Pressure Foundation Jacking Pole Installation and Maintenance Prefabricated Equipment Pool and Spa Maintenance Sand and Water Blasting Scaffolding Siding and Decking Sign Installation Tree Service Suspended Ceilings Window Coverings Wood Tanks Trenching Only Hydroseed Spraying Air and Water Balancing Construction Clean-up Non-specialized Weatherization and Energy Conservation /-- If the Contractor intends to utilize the escrow agreement included in the contract documents in lieu of the usual 10% retention from each payment, these documents must be completed and submitted with the signed contract. The escrow agreement may not be substituted at a later date. Sets of plans, supplemental provisions, and contract documents may be obtained at the Cashier’s Counter of the Faraday Center located at 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, California 92008-7314, for a non-refundable fee of $50.00 per set. If plans and specifications are to be mailed, the cost for postage should be added. Any prospective bidder who is in doubt as to the intended meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications or other contract documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions from the drawings and specifications may submit to the Engineer a written request for clarification or correction. Any response will be made only by a written addendum duly issued by the Engineer a copy of which will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of the contract documents. No oral response will be made to such inquiry. Prior to the award of the contract, no addition to, modification of or interpretation of any provision in the contract documents will be given by any agent, employee or contractor of the City of Carlsbad except as hereinbefore specified. No bidder may rely on directions given by any agent, employee or contractor of the City of Carlsbad except as hereinbefore specified. The City of Carlsbad reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any minor irregularity or informality in such bids. P The general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract shall be those as determined by the Director of Industrial Relations pursuant to the sections 1770, 1773, and 1773.1 of the Labor Code. Pursuant to section 1773.2 of the Labor Code, a current copy of applicable wage rates is on file in the Office of the City Engineer. The Contractor to whom the Contract is awarded shall not pay less than the said specified prevailing rates of wages to all ?3 9111/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 9 of 76 Pages workers employed by him or her in the execution of the Contract. The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for insuring compliance with provisions of section 1777.5 of the Labor Code and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code, “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.“ The City Engineer is the City’s “duly authorized officer” for the purposes of section 4107 and 4107.5. The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, of the Labor Code commencing with section 1720 shall apply to the Contract for work. A pre-bid meeting and tour of the project site will be held at IO:00 a.m., Thursday, November 16, 2000 at the Cole Library, East Building Entrance, 1250 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, 92008. All bids are to be computed on the basis of the given estimated quantities of work, as indicated in this proposal, times the unit price as submitted by the bidder. In case of a discrepancy between words and figures, the words shall prevail. In case of an error in the extension of a unit price, the corrected extension shall be calculated and the bids will be computed as indicated above and compared on the basis of the corrected totals. All prices must be in ink or typewritten. Changes or corrections may be crossed out and typed or written in with ink and must be initialed in ink by a person authorized to sign for the Contractor. Bidders are advised to verify the issuance of all addenda and receipt thereof one day prior to bidding. Submission of bids without acknowledgment of addenda may be cause of rejection of bid. The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure faithful performance and warranty of the work in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price on this project. The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers, in an amount equal to: 1) One hundred percent (100%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total amount payable does not exceed five million dollars ($5,000,000). 2) Fifty percent (50%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total amount payable is not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) and does not exceed ten million dollars ($10,000,000). 3) Twenty-five percent (25%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract if the contract exceeds ten million dollars ($lO,OOO,OOO). These bonds shall be kept in full force and effect during the course of this project, and shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the City until they are released as stated in the Supplemental Provisions section of this contract. All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to be accompanied by the following documents: 1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. 2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner. If the bid is accepted, the City may require copies of the insurer’s most recent annual statement and quarterly statement filed with the Department of Insurance pursuant to Article 10 (commencing with section 900) of Chapter 1 of Part 2 of Division 1 of the Insurance Code, within 10 calendar days of the insurer’s receipt of a request to submit the statements. q b 9/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 10 of 76 Pages f-- Insurance is to be placed with insurers that: 1) Have a rating in the most recent Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V 2) Are admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in the State of California by the Insurance Commissioner. Auto policies offered to meet the specification of this contract must: 1) Meet the conditions stated above for all insurance companies. 2) Cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certificate must state the coverage is for “any auto” and cannot be limited in any manner. Workers’ compensation insurance required under this contract must be offered by a company meeting the above standards with the exception that the Best’s rating condition is waived. The City does accept policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meeting the requirement for workers’ compensation insurance. The Contractor shall be required to maintain insurance as specified in the Contract. Any additional cost of said insurance shall be included in the bid price. The award of the contract by the City Council is contingent upon the Contractor submitting the required bonds and insurance, as described in the contract, within twenty days of bid opening. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the City may award the contract to the second or third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited. The prime contractor and all subcontractors are required to have and maintain a valid City of Carlsbad Business License for the duration of the contract. Approved by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California, by Resolution No. 1000-31 II , adopted on the ,200O . 17th dayofmr /d--/B ‘00 Date Contract No. 33841 Page 11 of 76 Pages CITY OF CARLSBAD CONTRACT NO. 33841 GEORGINA COLE LIBRARY, PHASE 2 City Council City of Carlsbad 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive Carlsbad, California 92008 CoNTMCToR’s$~~p~#&ED E\NQ RECORDED: # p-s%=@0 DATE - The undersigned declares he/she has carefully examined the location of the work, read the Notice Inviting Bids, examined the Plans, Specifications, Supplemental Provisions and addenda thereto, and hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services required to do all the work to complete Contract No. 33841 in accordance with the Plans, Specifications, Supplemental Provisions and addenda thereto and that he/she will take in full payment therefor the following unit prices for each item complete, to wit: 7 Description Total 1. BASE BID .- - Lump sum bid in numbers for the entire scope of work as $ SB?: 937 .- defined in the contract documents. Total amount of bid in words for “base bid”: 2. SCHEDULE “A” Lump sum bid in numbers for the entire scope of work as defined in the contract documents. $ 36,9oa.‘ Total amount of bid in words for Schedule “A”: - - 3. TOTAL OF “BASE BID” PLUS SCHEDULE “A”: Total of “Base Bid” plus Schedule “A” in numbers: Total amount of “Base Bid” plus Schedule “A” in words: $ - Contract No. 33841 Page 12 of 76 Pages - The basis of award will be the sum of the “base bid” plus Schedule “A” unless bids for. Schedule “A’ are rejected, in which case the basis of award will be the “base bid” only. Price(s) given above are firm for 90 days after date of bid opening. Addendum(a) No(s). 2-Q/x0 . has/have been received and is/are included in this proposal. The Undersigned has carefully checked all of the above figures and understands that the City will not be responsible for any error or omission on the part of the Undersigned in preparing this bid. Contract No. 33841 Page 13 of 78 Pages The Undersigned agrees that in case of default in executing the required Contract with necessary - i bonds and insurance policies within twenty (20) days from the date of award of Contract by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, the City may administratively authorize award of the contract to the second or third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited. The Undersigned bidder declares, under penalty of perjury, that the undersigned is licensed to do business or act in the capacity of a contractor within the State of California, validly licensed under license number 436418 , classification B C-9 HIC which expires on 3-31-2001 , and that this statement is true and correct and has the legal effect of an affidavit. A bid submitted to the City by a Contractor who is not licensed as a contractor pursuant to the Business and Professions Code shall be considered nonresponsive and shall be rejected by the City 9 7028.15(e). In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted -shall be invalidated by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. However, at the time the contract is awarded, the contractor shall be properly licensed. Public Contract Code § 20104. The Undersigned bidder hereby represents as follows: 1. That no Council member, officer agent, or employee of the City of Carlsbad is personally interested, directly or indirectly, in this Contract, or the compensation to be paid hereunder; that no representation, oral or in writing, of the City Council, its officers, agents, or employees has inducted him/her to enter into this Contract, excepting only those contained in this form of Contract and the papers made a part hereof by its terms; and 2. That this bid is made without connection with any person, firm, or corporation making a bid for the same work, and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. Accompanying this proposal is or Cashier’s Check) for ten percent (10%) of the amount bid. (Cash, Certified Chec The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and agrees to comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this Contract and continue to comply until the contract is complete. The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of the Labor Code, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2, relative to the general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract and agrees to comply with its provisions. - IF A SOLE OWNER OR SOLE CONTRACTOR SIGN HERE: Name under which business is conducted - (1) (2) (3) (1) Name under which business is conducted (2) Signature (given and surname and character of partner) (Note: Signature must be made by a general partner) (3) Place of Business (Street and Number) 7 City and State (4) Zip Code Telephone No. IF A CORPORATION, SIGN HERE: - (1) Name under which business is conducted Hafner / Bergman Corporation Impress Corporate Seal here b 9/l l/O0 q Contract No. 33841 Page 14 of 76 Pages State of California On &L/. 2 ‘$2ooq before me, D&L A4Lw d-Lzw,;/ 4f+eL/Ad ye, Name and Title of Officef(e.g., “Jane hoe. N@ry &blic”) personally appeared ah M &/A Name(s) of Sigkv(s) Cl personally known to me proved to me on the basis of satisfactory to be the person@ whose nameH is/e++ subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/-xecuted the same in his/m authorized CapacityCiesj, and that by his/he&heir signatureHon the instrument the personla)l: or the entity upon behalf of which the personM acted, executed the instrument. Place Notary Seal Above Signature XNotary Public Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Ls,td A/e~ Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer Signer’s Name: 0 Individual 0 Corporate Officer - Title(s): 0 Partner - 0 Limited 0 General 0 Attorney in Fact 0 Trustee 0 Guardian or Conservator 0 Other: Signer Is Representing: 0 1997 National Notary Association * 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 - Chatsworth, CA 91313.2402 Prod. No. 5907 Reorder Call Toll-Free 1-600-676-6827 - (3)lncorporated under the laws of the State of $$b!Aa- California - - .- (4) Place of Business LL 13745 Seminole D ' e (Street and Number) City and State Chino I CA (5) Zip Code 91 71.0 Telephone No. (909 ) 627-3651 NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE AlTACHED List below names of president, vice president, secretary and assistant secretary, if a corporation; if a partnership, list names of all general partners, Mark Bergman President v3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 15 of 76 Pages BID SECURITY FORM (Check to Accompany Bid) CONTRACT NO. 33841 (NOTE: The following form shall be used if check accompanies bid.) - Accompanying this proposal is a *Certified *Cashiers check payable to the order of CITY OF C CARLSBAD, in the sum of dollars ($ )B this amount being ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. The proceeds of this check shall become the property of the City provided this proposal shall be accepted by the City through action of its legally constituted contracting authorities and the undersigned shall fail to execute a contract and furnish the required Performance, Warranty and Payment Bonds and proof of insurance coverage within the stipulated time; otherwise, the check shall be returned to the undersigned. The proceeds of this check shall also become the property of the City if the undersigned shall withdraw his or her bid within the period of fifteen (15) days after the date set for the opening thereof, unless otherwise required by law, and notwithstand.ing the award of the contract to another bidder. *Delete the inapplicable word. C Hafner / Bergman Corporation BIDDER (NOTE: If the Bidder desires to use a bond instead of check, the Bid Bond form on the following pages shall be executed--the sum of this bond shall be not less than ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid.) @% b 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 16 of 76 Pages ’ ‘..‘. -. ~ ‘Y .r- \ “. i i ,.a I%3 .,. * ‘I. I, I- i- 6,“. A . -* . ..I ,‘*vn ,a.# “i3 ,.r I ,T-- -YOY720-2000 MON 02:09 PM STRACHOTA INSURANCE FAX NO, 9088767391 P, 02 BIDDER’S BOND TO ACCOMPANY’ PROPOSAL CONTRACT NO. 33841 ,B.Il-r3 #l?s-42-434130 KNOW AU PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: w-=w -f=e-w as Principal, and m ,e,-, of Carlsbad, California, in an amount as follows: (must be at least ten percent (10%) of the bid ~amount) for which 1 nn ,e wlnt Payment, well and truly made, we bind ourselves, our h&s, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, THE CONDlTtON OF THE FOREGOfNO OBLlGATlON IS SUCH that If the proposal of the above- bounden Principal for: I* COLE LIBRARY REMODEL, PHASE 2 CONTRACT NO. 33841 in the City of Carlsbad, Is accepted by the City Council, and if the $rincipal shall duly enter Into and execute a Contract including required bonds and Insurance pall&8 within twenty (20) days from the dats of award of Contract by the City Council of the Clty of Carisbad, being duly notified of said award, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect, and the amount specified herein shall be forfeited to the said City. , . . . . I * * . L 3 , . < . . * * . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . L * . . . . v * I *a. * . I . . . . . , . . I 4 4 . . I ,N- w Qf11100 Contract No. Z&3= Page 17 of 76 Pages . J- - ‘-IV 1l.m *‘“’ w. ’ .4 , u* j ,,* r LA /c‘ .--I ,, *” ,l,‘” -2 ,,,,a a A\ ‘an #“I .!-- II-- -*NW-20-2000 KIN O2:27 PM STRACHOTA INSURANCE FAX NO, i3098767391 P, uz In the event Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is algreed that the death of Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond, Executed by PRlNCfPAL this 2Qth dayof, NOV@~~ ,20&i s&w4~~ - Trc4s4tc~ {title and orgq$kation of signat0fy) . Executed by SURETY this 20 day of v ,, 20*. SURETY: -mm I===-’ (name of Surety) 1845?kEEiYdzqp, #rn, -, a30339 (address of Surety) 800-388-3647 (telephone num5r of Surety} By: ~ -dy ~ i..-- (signature of Attorney-in+xt) ,_ (printed name of Attorney-in-F&Q {Attach corporate resolution showing current power of attorney.) (Pfoper notarial acknowledgment of execution by PRlNCIPAL and SURETY must be attached.) (President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certifwd by the secretav or assistant SecretRfy undef corporate seal empowering that oficer to bind Ilre corporation.) APPROVED AS TO FORM: I I 33 - @ 3/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 18 of 7!3 Pagcs NUMBER ASB- 42-030 0 13 0 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL l&N BY THESE PRESENTS, that American Safety Casualty Insurance Company has made. constituted and appointed. and by these’ presents does make, constitute and appoints TIM KiRK OF. CYPRESS, TEXAS its true and lawf$ attorney-in-fact, for it and its name, place, and stead to execute on behalf of the said Company, as surety, bonds. undertaking and contracts of suretyship to be given to ALL OBLJGEES provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of **h'O MZUZON***($2,OOO,OOOJ DOLLARS++* This Power of A ? omey is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted b$ the Board of Directors of the Compaq on the Twenty-N nth day of January. 1999. RESOLVED, th t the President in conjunction with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint attorneys-in-fact or agents with authority as defined or limited in the instrument evid 4 cing the appointment in each case, for and on behalf of the Company, to execute and deliver and affix the seal of the Company to bonds, undertakings recognizances, aid suretyship obligations of all kinds; and said officers may remove any such attorney-in-fact or agent and revoke any power of attorney previously granted t( such persons. ~ / RESOLVED F$RTIIER, that any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or suretyship obJigation shall be valid and binding upon the Company: (i) when signed by the President or any Vice-Presid,ent and attested and sealed (if a seal be required) by any Secretary or Assistant Secretary or (ii) when signed by the Presiden ident or Secretary or Assistant Secretary, and countersigned and sealed (if a seal be required) by a duly authotized attorney-in-fact or agent; or (iii) when dull led (if a seal be required) by one or more attorney-in-fact or agents putsuant to and within the limits ofthe authority evidenced by the power of attorney issuec to such person or persons, RESOLVED F$RTHER, that the sfgnature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to atry Power of attorney or certification thereo authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company; and such signature and seal when so used shal d- ‘he same force and affects as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS *REOF, American Safety Casualty Insurance Company has caused its official seal to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by its President am attested by its &cretary this tienty-Ninth day of January, 1999. Attest: qz&f* Tw?y Fred I. Pinckney. Secretary STATE OF GEDRGIA inth day of Jomy, 1999, before me personally came Lloyd A. Fox, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he is the President oi lnsutance Company, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the ser is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like or& I , j Dorothy J. Giglio, Notary Public 1, the undersi ed. Secretary of American Safety Casualty Insurance Company, a Delaware corpomtion, DO MEREBY CERTJFY’~~~~ tlte foregoing and attache1 Power Of AttorrieY remains in full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that the Resolution of the Board of Directors. set forth in the said Power of Attorney, is nor in force. Signed and Sealdd at the City of Atlanta, in the State of Georgia. Dated the 20 day of ,::: q&T j?3tJ~ ,Pred J. Pinckney, Secretary ORIGINALS OF THIS POWER OF A7TOR;v&&‘E PRI~El~:WITH RED NUMERRICAL NUMBERT. Dl’tiLICATES SHALL HAVE THE SAME FORCE AND EFFECT AS AN ORlr;iNflL DNLY WHEN ISSUED IN CONXJNCTI;N WlTh’ THE ORKINAI. - state of ‘IBas > ss. county of I-lzris On&&m-Xk~ .,beforeme, MI@Ww-mw I oaw’ Namrm~llfBdOiku(~9..'JnChm.NotwPdic') personally appeared Tim K~J& [EJ personally known to me 3 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory avldence ta be the person(s) whose’ name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that. by his/her/their signature(s) on the insbument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. S my hand and official seal. 7bugh the Inlbrmsliw, b&w is not mqti by Im if may pwu vallmbk to pew dying on fhe dcxwment and could pmvenf fraudulent mnoval and mattschmmt of this fwm to snother document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer Signer’s Name: 0 Individual 0 Corpcmta CXTtcer - Title(s): 0 Partner - 0 Limited 0 Geneml 0 AttomeyinFact Cl Trustee 0 Guard&n or ConsenMor 0 other Signer Is Representing: nw.uo.5907 fmador:wrc+ma1$QoJTbdM TOTFIL P.02 - personally appeared Tim KM 4 -1 d aorr(r) [apemonallyknowntom -- Clpfmfadtomaonthebasisofsatisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whoee’ name(s) idane &wribed to the within instrument and a-edged to me that he/slw’they exerted the same in his/her/their authorlzed capacity(ies). and that. by hidher/their signature(s) cm the lnsbument the person(s), or the entlty upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, f3xecutecithe Mrument. ES!3 my hand and ofiiial seal. Descriptbn ofAttach Documant lmeorTypeofDcxxl~ Dofammtm Number d Pages: Capadty(bs) Claimed by Signer sigfltwsNams: ,o lndividuel 0 corpaab Ofker -TM(s): Cl Pafiner--OMited q General 0 ABomeyinFad OTtUSb 0 Guardiarof- oothec Signer Is Rqxemtiq: Olm?NxodMuy Aamdhl-939)~sp(oAvp.P.0.~o*2Mn*clnsrah u 0(31w4ol AMERICAN SAFETY esualty Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY NUMIER ASB- 42-03- 0 13 0 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that American Safety Casualty Insurance Company has made. constituted and appointed, and by these presents does make, constitute and appoints TIMKIRK I OFCYPRESS,TEXAS its true and lawful attorney-in-fact, for it and its name, place, and stead to execute on behalf of the said Company, as surety, bonds, undertaking and contracts of suretyship to be given to ALLOBLIGEES provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of I ***TWOMZLL~ON***($2,000,OO0)DOLLARS*** This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company on the Twenty-Ninth day of January, 1999. RESOLVED, that the President in conjunction with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint attorneys-in-fact or agents with authority as defined or limited in the instrument evidencing the appointment in each case, for and on behalf of the Company, to execute and deliver and affix the seal of the Company to bonds, undertakings, recognizances, and suretyship obligations of all kinds; and said officers may remove any such attorney-in-fact or agent and revoke any power of attorney previously granted to I such persons. Company to such person or persons. RESOLVED FURTHER, that any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or suretyship obligation shall be valid and binding upon the Company: (i) when or any Vice-President or Secretary or Assistant Secretary, and countersigned and sealed (if a seal be required) by a duly authorized attorney-in-fact or agent; or (iii) when duly executed and sealed (if a seal be required) by one or more attorney-in-fact or agents pursuant to and within the limits of the authority evidenced by the power of attorney issued by the 1 signed by the President or any Vice-President and attested and sealed (if a seal be required) by any Secretary or Assistant Secretary or (ii) when signed by the President RESOLVED FURTHER, that the signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company; and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and affects as though manually affixed. NITNFSS WHEREOF, American Safety Casualty Insurance Company has caused its official seal to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by its President and attested by its Secretary this Twenty-Ninth day of January, 1999 Attest: Fred I. Pinckney, Secretary STATE OF GEORGIA ‘* COUNTY OF COBB I On this Twenty-Ninth day of January, 1999, before me personally came Lloyd A. Fox, to me known, who. being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he is the President of American Safety Casualty Insurance Company, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. - I I, the undersigned, Secretarv of American Safetv Casualtv Insurance 1 Dorothy J. Gigiio, Notary Public Company, a Delaware corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached 1 Power of Attorney remains in-full force and has not been revoked: and furthermore that the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the said Power of Attorney, is now Signed and Sealed at the t 3ty of Atlanta, in the State of Georgia. Dated the #> day of w, m I Fred J. Pinckney, Secretary I ORIGINALS OF THIS POWER OFATTURNEYARE PRINTED WITH RED NUMERICAL NUMBERS DUPLICATES SHALI. HAVE THE SAME FORCE AND EFFECTAS AN ORIGINAL ONLY WHEN ISSUED IN CONJUNCTION WiTH THE ORIGINAL State of California County of i%lYl~d ik’lb “. > personally appeared wpersonally known to me 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. Place Notary Seal Above OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer Signer’s Name- 0 Individual 0 Corporate Officer - Title(s): 0 Partner - 0 Limited 0 General q Attorney in Fact 0 Trustee 0 Guardian or Conservator 0 Other: Signer Is Representing: 0 1997 National Notary Associatm - 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 - Chatsworth, CA 91313.2402 Prod. No. 5907 Reorder: Call Toll-Free l-800-876-6827 GUIDE FOR COMPLETING THE “DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS” AND “DESIGNATION OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR AND AMOUNT OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK” FORMS - C C - REFERENCES Prior to preparation of the following Subcontractor and Owner Operator/Lessor disclosure forms Bidders are urged to review the definitions in section 1-2 of the SSPWC and of the Supplemental Provisions to this Contract especially, “Bid”, “Bidder”, “Contract”, “Contractor”, “Contract Price”, “Contract Unit Price”, “Engineer”, “Subcontractor” and “Work” and the definitions in section l-2 of the Supplemental Provisions especially “Own Organization” and “Owner Operator/Lessor.” Bidders are further urged to review sections 2-3 SUBCONTRACTS of the SSPWC and section 2-3.1 of these Supplemental Provisions. CAUTIONS These forms will be used by the Agency to determine the percentage of work that the Bidder proposes to perform. Bidders are cautioned that failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Any bid that proposes performance of more than 50 percent of the work by any single subcontractor(s) or owner operator/lessors or otherwise to be performed by forces other than the Bidder’s own organization will be rejected as non-responsive. Specialty items of work that may be so designated by the Engineer on the “Contractor’s Proposal” are not included in computing the percentage of work proposed to be performed by the Bidder. INSTRUCTIONS The Bidder shall set forth the name and location of business of each and every subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor who the Bidder proposes to perform work or labor or render service in or about the work or improvement, and every subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor licensed as a contractor by the State of California who the Bidder proposes to specially fabricate and install any portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings, contained in the plans and specifications in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater. Said name(s) and location(s) of business of subcontractor(s) shall be set forth and included as an integral part of the bid offer. Bidder shall use separate disclosure forms for each Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor of manpower and equipment that it proposes to use to complete the Work. Additional copies of the forms must be attached if required to accommodate the Contractor’s decision to use more than one Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor. All items of information must be completely filled out. These forms must be submitted as a part of the Bidder’s sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Neither the amount, in dollars, of work performed by the Bidder’s own forces (as Contractor) nor the Bidder’s overhead and profit for subcontracted items of the work is included to compute the percentage of the work performed by Subcontractors or Owner Operators/Lessors. When the Bidder proposes that any bid item will installed by a Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor the amount, in dollars, of the bid item installed by each Subcontractor or Owner Operator/ Lessor must be entered under the columns “Amount of Subcontracted Bid Item Including Subcontractor’s Overhead & Profit” or ” Amount of Owner Operator/Lessor Bid Item Including Owner Operator/Lessor’s Overhead & Profit ” unless the dollar amount of all work performed by any Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor is less than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater. If a Subcontractor or Owner b 911 l/O0 @% Contract No. 33841 Page 19 of 76 Pages - g Operator/Lessor installs or constructs any portion of a bid item the entire amount of the Contract I-_ Unit Price, less the Bidder’s overhead and profit, shall be multiplied by the Quantity of the bid item that the Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor installs to compute the amount of work so installed. Suppliers of materials from sources outside the limits of work are not subcontractors. The value of materials and transport of materials from sources outside the limits of work, as shown on the plans, shall be assigned to the Contractor, the Subcontractor, or the Owner Operator/Lessor, as the case may be, that the Bidder proposes as installer of said materials. The value of material incorporated in any Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor installed bid item that is supplied by the Bidder shall be included as a part of the work that the Bidder proposes to be performed by the Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor installing said item. The item number from the “CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL” (Bid Sheets) shall be entered in the “Bid Item No.” column. When a Subcontractor or Owner Operator/Lessor has a Carlsbad business license the number must be entered on the form. If the Subcontractor does not have a valid business license enter “NONE” in the appropriate space. Bidders shall make any additional copies of the disclosure forms as may be necessary to provide the required information. The page number and total number of additional form pages shall be entered in the location provided on each type of form so duplicated. When the Bidder proposes using a subcontractor or owner operator/Lessor to construct or install up to but no greater that 50 percent of the work under this contract, the Bidder shall attach an explanation sheet to the designation of subcontractor or designation of Owner Operator/Lessor forms as applicable. The explanation sheet shall be provided by the Contractor to clearly apprise the Agency of the specific facts that show why the Bidder proposes to allow performance of up to but no greater than fifty percent (50%) of the work by any single subcontractor. Determination of the subcontract and Owner Operator/Lessor amounts for purposes of award of the contract shall determined by the City Council in conformance with the provisions of the contract documents and the Supplemental Provisions. The decision of the City Council shall be final. ?3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 20 of 76 Pages DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 $ $ $ $ : $ $ $ $ $ $ The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: v[J.f&I& 0 l>f?%m\ te or? Subcontractor’s Location of Business Street Address p-g-w gf.(\ \ . G\if)JI --g/1 1 City State Zip *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: ( 81 1 VI4 *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: WE SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS* Item Bid item Including ltem Performed by Overhead & Profit In No. Subcontractqr’s Overhead Contractor Excluding Bid Item 4% Profit ‘Overhead &, Profit $ 30, z&r*- I$ $ $ I$ Explanation: Column 1 - Bid item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. - -. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page \ of LL pages of this Subcontractor Designation form * Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of thari one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: T&?/a pc\L< \ 1 Y) / c+ Subcontractor’s Location of Business \?.+5 \\ wn et-m+-- ,’ *Subcontractor’s Street Address l/d+7 4-l i -Cy- q ato2 City State Zip Telephone Number including Area Code: (,5& ) /& 3 - 72 83 *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: 45bf;4lj) C-l,& *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS’ Subcontractor’s Overhead Contractor Excluding Explanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractots own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal paws _ through _, inclusive. Page 2 of 4 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form * Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an aswisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after Ihe deadline for submitting bids contained in the ‘Notice Inviting Bids.” ?3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages .- : :1 * ,.& .:F “3 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than’ one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: mi d0ri kfl;lvfA-ffw Ca Undw Subcontractor’s Location of Business ,%A.% c. M &ir? Street Address 1 sm+i% fmGz City t-y State Zip *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: ( /I 1 17.51 - m92- *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: .30 8,57 3 GC?) *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS’ Bid Amount of Subcontracted Amount of Work In Bid Amount of Contractor’s Item Bid item Including Item Performed by Overhead & Profit In No. Subcontractor’s Overhead Contractor Excluding Bid Item & Profit ‘Overhead & Profit $ /3,@0*- $ $ $ $ Explanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal. pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. - Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page 3 of 9 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form I * Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in Ihe ‘Notice Inviting Bids.” Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages - . . ‘:: ,h,< :E ‘;r DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: Subcontractor’s Location of Business Street Address g i k/jy+ (-jG ! CA @z5Dl City State Zip ” *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: ( 5720 *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: V,?I 1 *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: N orte SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS* Bid Amount of Subcontracted Amount of Work In Bid Amount of Contractor’s Item Bid Item Including Item Performed by Overhead & Profit In No. Subcontractor’s Overhead Contractor Excluding Bid Item -& Profit ‘Overhead & Profit $ 5?5&7 - . $ $ a $ $ $ II I$ Irs I$ Explanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. - Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the COntraCtOr’S and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page ti of q pages of this Subcontractor Designation form l Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” e 9/l l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 - The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than’ one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: Subcontractor’s Location of Business ’ *Subcontractor’s *Subcontractor’s *Subcontractor’s F Street Address (?~Jrmm (A 47ls2 City State Zip Telephone Number including Area Code: (4 0 +Wt-%ZO California State Contractors License No. and Classification: 317 IL57 Carlsbad Business License No.: 7$me SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS* 1 Bid I Amount of Subcontracted Amount of Contractor’s II ‘mn I Bid item Including Item Performed by 1 Overhead & Profit In 1 No. Subcontractqr’s Overhead Contractor Excluding Bid Item 4% Profit Overhead & Profit $ 12,5w*- $ $ $ $ $ I $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ A $ $ $ ExDlanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Columri 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page 5 of 4 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form l Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in me “Notice Inviting Bids.” Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages : ‘.1 -1 .A*$ DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: Subcontractor’s Location of Business In P \ , Elcii&~ c/ ql4 $ . efic ,Eci v<~ /& Street Adtiress II iam& ikbk City StaW @7LQ5- Zip ,’ *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: ( q[Tq ) &/ - 6&25 *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors Licen e No. and Classification: q-l F;($l pi0 *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: tiooz SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS* Subcontractor’s Overhead Contractor-Excluding $ $ $ $ $ $ $ x $ $ $ 4 $ $ $ Exnlanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page 0 of 4 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form I * Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” 43 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. \ Full Company Name of Subcontractor: !yYan,f tmq Subcontractor’s Location of Business I25/ id kcz l& I Street Address f iY?YM~ 4?sm. bv State Zip *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: ( 4 *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: 714 mo c-27 *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: ovle SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS’ 1 Bid I Amount of Subcontracted Bid Item Including Subcontractor’s Overhead Item Performed by Contractor Excluding Overhead & Profit In Exolanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be oerformed bv the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be bet-formed bi Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page 9 of 4 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form l Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an aster&k required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” G 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages .-4 :. ‘1 :. DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidders total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Company Name of Subcontractor: Ez l3d7gmii Gi/G@rnC~ Subcontractor’s Location of Business %ha&N h-VC Street Address @ml (ypc qr-m City State Zip *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: (G ) (JZf - mo *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: y?~ 4est la- I 13 *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: r‘ SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS’ Amount Bid Amount of Subcontracted Amount of Contractor’s Item Bid Item Including item Performed by Overhead & Profit In No. Subcontractor’s Overhead Contractor,Excluding Bid Item &Profit Overhead 4% Profit $ ~,(J.&- $ $ $ $ $ Explanation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2. 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page % of c1 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form * Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.’ ?a 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS CONTRACT NO. 33841 Page 4 pages of this Subcontractor Designation form The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.” The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. _ Full Company Name of Subcontractor: Subcontractor’s Location of Business IlN% !?-wc-t-hH@ Ar/-e- !%reet Address [/-ta lo1224 41701 City State Zip *Subcontractor’s Telephone Number including Area Code: ( *Subcontractor’s California State Contractors License No. and Classification: 4Ei\\9 ! *Subcontractor’s Carlsbad Business License No.: I’ SUBCONTRACTOR’S BID ITEMS* Bid Amount of Subcontracted Amount of Work In Bid Amount of Contractor’s Item Bid Item Including Item Performed by Overhead & Profit In No. Subcontractq’s Overhead Contractor Excluding Bid Item 43’ Profit Overhead & Profit I $ q&,Q(J(J, - I$ $ Q\ I% ExDianation: Column 1 - Bid Item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Subcontractor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by both the Contractor’s and the Subcontractor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. l Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” Contract No. 33841 Page 21 of 76 Pages DESIGNATION OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR AND AMOUNT OF OWNER OPERATOR/LESSOR WORK CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed Owner Operator/Lessor in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed Owner Operator/Lessor will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in the list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.“ The Bidder further certifies that no additional Owner Operator/Lessor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of than one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000) whichever is greater and that no changes in the Owner Operator/Lessors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. Full Owner Operator/Lessor Name: Owner Operator/Lessor Location of Business Street Address City State *Owner Operator/Lessor Telephone Number including Area Code: ( 1 *Owner Operator/Lessor City of Carlsbad Business License No.: Zip e OWNER OPE Including Owner Operator/Lessor’s Overhead & Profit IATORlLESSOR WORK ITEMS Item Performed by Contractor Excluding Overhead & Profit Overhead & Profti In Bid Explanation: Column 1 - Bid item No. from the bid proposal, pages _ through _, inclusive. Column 2 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by the Owner Operator/Lessor. Column 3 - The dollar amount of the item to be performed by Contractor’s own forces. Column 4 - The dollar amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit for work done by troth the Contractor’s and the Owner Operator/Lessor’s forces on the item. Total dollar amount of Columns 2, 3, and 4 must be equal to the dollar amount in the bid price of the item on bid proposal pages _ through _, inclusive. Page - of pages of this Owner Operator/Lessor form * Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the portions of the information preceded by an asterisk required on this document may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” ?3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 22 of 76 Pages BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL (To Accompany Proposal) CONTRACT NO. 33841 RESPONSIBILITY Copies of the latest Annual Report, audited financial statements or Balance Sheets may be submitted under separate cover marked CONFIDENTIAL. Cover Page - Balance Sheet-Assets Balance Sheet-Liabilities and Stockholders Equity Statement of Income and Retained Earninqs Statement of Cash Flows Notes to Financial Statements Independent Auditors' Supplemental' Report Supporting Schedule of General and Administrative Expenses ?a 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 23 of 76 Pages BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE - - - - - - (To Accompany Proposal) CONTRACT NO. 33841 The Bidder is required to state what work of a similar character to that included in the proposed Contract he/she has successfully performed and give references, with telephone numbers, which will enable the City to judge his/her responsibility, experience and skill. An attachment can be used. Contract No. 33841 Page 24 of 76 Pages BIDDER’S CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE FOR GENERAL LIABILITY, EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY, AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY AND WORKERS’ COMPENSATION. (To Accompany Proposal) CONTRACT NO. 33841 - - I -- C F As a required part of the Bidder’s proposal the Bidder must attach either of the following to this page. 1) Certificates of insurance showing conformance with the requirements herein for each of: Comprehensive General Liability Automobile Liability Workers Compensation Employers Liability 2) Statement with an insurance carrier’s notarized signature stating that the carrier can, and upon payment of fees and/or premiums by the Bidder, will issue to the Bidder Policies of insurance for Comprehensive General Liability, Automobile Liability, Workers Compensation and Employer’s Liability in conformance with the requirements herein and Certificates of insurance to the Agency showing conformance with the requirements herein. All certificates of insurance and statements of willingness to issue insurance for auto policies offered to meet the specification of this contract must: 1) Meet the conditions stated in The Notice Inviting Bids, the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction and the Supplemental Provisions for this project for each insurance company that the Contractor proposes. 2) Cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certificate must state the coverage is for “any auto” and cannot be limited in any manner. h - p3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 25 of 76 Pages JAN-08-2001 MON 09:38 AM STRACHOTA INSURANCE FAX NO, 9096767391 P, 04 4com. t- CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANC~;~Gg~l PROPUCEH -m-p 1 DA;;r;Md;;l THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION strachota Xnaurance Agency Xnc ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE $glifornia Licenm #0249673 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR SO0 Ridge Park Dsiva Ste 203 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. I ,macula CA 92590 Phonet909-676-2229 Fax:909-676-7391 INSUIRERS AFFORDING COVERAGE ._---.--,-“l,. ._. . . 7-cI.l”,-- Fe< ““<\___ INSUHCU Westchtsster Fire Insurance Co _l,, ,,_,__ -“” ‘Y- c _,,. ___ l&B Contractors, Inc. dba )Infner/Bergman 3.3745 Seminole Dr. chino CA 91710 INSURER 0: RLI Xnzi Co -,I;-uT.mI- - . . . . /I...- INSUReR c: American States Insurance --> ., ..a PI"-._ -..-./. .._- .q,,.'.. . .-- INSURER D: State <!ompensation Fund ",.- --...*- --. ," ,___ --. INSURER E: Oreenwich COVERAGES TI lE POI.ICII3 OF INSUIV\NCE LlSTco IIELOr/ HAVE OEEN lswro TO ThE INSURED NAMCD ADOVE FOR THE POLICY PcRlon INDlCAl ED. NOT~K~~ISTAN~INQ ANY RECILJIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONI’KACT OR OTlICR DOCUMENT WlTH RESPECTTO WHICH THl8 CERTIIICATE M4Y BE ISSUED On MAY PCRTAlN, Tl lc INSURANCE AFFOKDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED IIEPEIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSl01\15 AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH PMIClT:$. ACCIIECATTC LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE l3EEN REDUCED BY PAlb CLAIMS. isu ,_------v.. I-- ,.,M --.. - ,. L/m-__- -....” ,_____ -. -_- & TYPE OF INSUHANCE POLICY NUMBER psmEm&Tlv” I GCNWAI. 1IARIUTV COMMEIPCIAL GcNCPAL 1 lAl3llJPl ‘3.S 6 7 5 13 6 00/3l./OQ G~N’LACGREGATE LlMKAF’PLltS PER! GARAGE LIMILITY ANY AUTO CXCCSG LIADILIIY 08/31/00 EMPlOVERS’ LlnnrLnY 1576194-00 05/01/00 E Blanket: Equipment 2396146 ) 04/02/00 hntad Ecgliuent IEStRlPllON OF OPEKATiONS/i;i)CA1’ION5NEHlCL~S/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMCtiT/SPEClAL PROVISII bexcept for nonpay then 10 daye ._ F ON .-.. ., ,_.“__ CARLSO - City of Carlsbad I.635 Faraday Ave. CarlEbnd CA 92008 rCORD 25-i (7197) Lr P --../, ,._- . . . .._- PROPER’IY DAMAGE (Par nccldenl) s 1 AUTO ONLY. EA ACc!ptNT 1 3 -.I _____ 5 GlH -- EH‘ . . . .1- 0 5 /01/O J. E.L EACH ACCIDENT G 2000000 .-..m ..- -.7,,/. k... __, El.. DISEASE - EA EMPLOVCF 5 10 0 00 0 0 -,e.,.__ ..w-* ,,,, _,__- E.L. DISEASE. POLICY LIMIT 3 10 0 0 0 i) 0 -- 04/02/01 Ded. $500 122735 Ded. $500 200000 S :ERTIFICATE HOLDER- 1 1 I N ADDITIONAL INSURED: INSURER LET’IYK: _ CANCELLATION --- SHSULD ANY OF TkIE ABOVE fIE5CRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED QEFORti THE EXPIKATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDE4VOR TO LAII. 3 0 * DAYS WRITTEN --I-_ NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE !+lOLDSR NAMEDTOTHE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABI REl’KESENT4TIVES. - RER, ITS AGENTS OR J. Tony Ruzz JAN-08-2001 MON 09:38 AM STRACHOTA INSURANCE FAX NO, 9096767391 P, 02 1 I - 3 0 - 0 0 ; 13 i~~oAM;cl ry r,f CQr ,r;tT~~ : 1 760 602 8.558 ff 1/ n J . cm’ OF GIRLSBAD SURPLUS LINE BROKER AFFlDAWI- Broker Name: Address: Ciry/Scate/Zip: Dare: Projecf Name: Type of Insurance: . Strachota Insuuv Tamecula CA 92590 . . L _ is the Broker of Record far B&B ContractorS, Inc &actaf) who is required to provide inkuance under the specifications of the above contract. I further c&fy rhat as praker of Record for Contactor, I have conracted the insurance companies listed below, all of whom meet the City’s requirements included in Resolution No. W-U& and all of whom have refused to write the required policy due to the ~ypc of risk involved. 3 lnsutonce Carrier: 3c>\ ( Qfl EM J Iv Xi,. (‘0 /iliLcA-y bjdtuc\r Name of Contacr: Address: Date: 7 11 lL)c> Reason for Kcfusal: Ufi,j@{&iAi+ibWL Wfl S,OLl 5 ’ I Best’s Rating A.-t- Listed by Stare lnsuranqe I I/+-, Commissioner (Yes/No) Insirrance Carrier: Name of Conracr; Address: VW3 nd4, l)\/,D k , ‘;Pd& wq qyIf5- I Date: , q I 00 Reason for Refusal: * \,I A,9 Qr’ I.0 ki -t.; fin Wa 50bl,3 5 BW’S Rating - ib Listed by State Insurance: VP.S Commissioner (Yes/No) JAN-08-2001 MON 09:38 AM STRACHOTA INSURANCE FAX NO, 9096767391 P, 03 1 t-3cl-nL); 1, :Ir!Ahl:cI ry 01 cnr,::tlg,, : 1 7isG ii"2 RSSk 1, 8, 3 fl e I , - Irr;urance Carrier: F’ \w\%y& Twt Name af Contact: -J-)ic- I! hlcp5e Address: 73-T -?Yxvi k-4 chf \n .>r I- ; ‘E\l,,&&! CA %v98 Dare: 7 cx3. I Reason for Refusal: 1, h rl[: Qfu&;f-;ti.c, b l-ecei :>cu? c J Best’s Rating Pt Listed by State Insurance y+ > . Commissioner (Yes/No) . Contractor is requesting that tie City accept ~4tr~~company who is a surplus l.k c;rticr having an A-:V or better raaring in the most recent issu; <if B&8’s Rating Guide and who has an office within the State of California at the following addiiss in order to effect se&x of process. Name of Surplus Line Cti.fs: Wes~escter Fire Ins CO Ad&f3 : PO Box 74027Fi - City/State/zip: At 1~ 7 A Address tq effect Scticc of Process witi the State of California. Name: Address: iVe,SUite 218 City/Stare/Zip: Brea CA 92821 I certify under penalty of pejury that the foregoing facts are WLIC and cone& Dated: Signed: BIDDER’S STATEMENT RE DEBARMENT (To Accompany Proposal) I) CONTRACT-NO. 33841 1) Have you or any of your subcontractors ever been debarred as an irresponsible bidder by another jurisdiction in the State of California? yes J no - 2) If yes, what was/were the name(s) of the agency(ies) and what was/were the period(s) of debarment(s) ? Attach additional copies of this page to accommodate more than two debar- ments. - party debarred party debarred agency agency -- period of debarment period of debarment ,- - h BY CONTRACTOR: Vice President - (print name/title) ?@ 9/11/00 Page \ of \ pages of this Re Debarment form Contract No. 33841 Page 26 of 76 Pages BIDDER’S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD (To Accompany Proposal) CONTRACT NO. 33841 Contractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board which has jurisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a patent act or omission is filed within four years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint regarding a latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within 10 years of the date of the alleged violation. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors’ State License board, P.O. Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826. F- 1) Have you ever had your contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’ State license Board two or more times within an eight year period? J yes no 2) Has the suspension or revocation of your contractors license ever been stayed? yes J no 3) Have any subcontractors that you propose to perform any portion of the Work ever had their contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’ State license Board two or more times within an eight year period? J yes no 4) Has the suspension or revocation of the license of any subcontractor’s that you propose to perform any portion of the Work ever been stayed? J yes no 5) If the answer to either of 1. or 3. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party disciplined, the date of and violation that the disciplinary action pertain to, describe the nature of the violation and the disciplinary action taken therefor. (If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.) -. Page \, pages of this Disclosure of Discipline form of \ pa 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 27 of 76 Pages - - BIDDER’S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD (COhiTINUED) (To Accompany Proposal) CONTRACT NO. 33841 6) If the answer to either of 2. or 4. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party who’s discipline. was stayed, the date of the violation that the disciplinary action pertains to, describe the nature of the violation and the condition (if any) upon which the disciplinary action was stayed. - - - - (If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.) BY CONTRACTOR: By: - - - - n Hafner- Vice President (print name/title) Page pages of this Disclosure of Discipline form \ of \ kc 9/l l/O0 q Contract No. 33841 Page 28 of 76 Pages - -A-- NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 7106 CONTRACT NO. 33841 State of California County of 1 ) ss. 1 John Hafner (Name of Bidder) , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is Vice President (Title) Of Hafner / Beraman CorDoration (Name of Firm) - - the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, -- communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed - contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. - I declare under penalty of perjury that the executed on the a?‘* day of d correct and that this affidavit was ,20&T Subscribed and sworn to before me on the /$!/f!wtl?Ru ~27~ day of ,200O. - c- - - Contract No. 33841 Page 29 of 76 Pages CONTRACT PUBLIC WORKS This agreement is made this 5 day of January 20 01 between the City of Carlsbad, California, a municipal corporation, (hereinafter called by and , “City”), and Hafner / Bergman Corporation whose principal place of business is 13745 Seminole Dr. Chino, CA 91710 (hereinafter called “Contractor”). City and Contractor agree as follows: 1. Description of Work. Contractor shall perform all work specified in the Contract documents for: Georgina Cole Library, Phase 2, Exterior Improvements, (hereinafter called “project”) 2. Provisions of Labor and Materials. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and personnel to perform the work specified by the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of this Contract, Notice Inviting Bids, Contractor’s Proposal, Bidder’s Bond, Designation of Subcontractors, Designation of Owner Operator/Lessors, Bidder’s Statements of Financial Responsibility, Technical Ability and Experience, Re Debarment, Non-collusion Affidavit, Escrow Agreement, Release Form, the Plans and Specifications, the Supplemental Provisions, addendum(s) to said Plans and Specifications and Supplemental Provisions, and all proper amendments and changes made thereto in accordance with this Contract or the Plans and Specifications, and all bonds for the project; all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. Contractor, her/his subcontractors, and materials suppliers shall provide and install the work as indicated, specified, and implied by the Contract Documents. Any items of work not indicated or specified, but which are essential to the completion of the work, shall be provided at the Contractor’s expense to fulfil1 the intent of said documents. In all instances through the life of the Contract, the City will be the interpreter of the intent of the Contract Documents, and the City’s decision relative to said intent will be final and binding. Failure of the Contractor to apprise subcontractors and materials suppliers of this condition of the Contract will not relieve responsibility of compliance. 4. Payment. For all compensation for Contractor’s performance of work under this Contract, City shall make payment to the Contractor per section 9-3 PAYMENT of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) 1997 Edition, and the 1998 and 1999 supplements thereto, hereinafter designated “SSPWC”, as issued by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association, and as amended by the Supplemental Provisions section of this contract. The Engineer will close the estimate of work completed for progress payments on the last working day of each month. 5. Independent Investigation. Contractor has made an independent investigation of the jobsite, the soil conditions at the jobsite, and all other conditions that might affect the progress of the work, and is aware of those conditions. The Contract price includes payment for all work that may be done by Contractor, whether anticipated or not, in order to overcome underground conditions. a 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 30 of 76 Pages ;--A , Any information that may have been furnished to Contractor by City about underground conditions or other job conditions is for Contractor’s convenience only, and City does not warrant that the conditions are as thus indicated. Contractor is satisfied with all job conditions, including underground conditions and has not relied on information furnished by City. 6. Hazardous Waste or Other Unusual Conditions. If the contract involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify City, in writing, of any: A. Hazardous Waste. Material that Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. B. Differing Conditions. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated. C. Unknown Physical Conditions. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the contract. City shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in contractor’s costs of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work shall issue a change order under the procedures described in this contract. ,P In the event that a dispute arises between City and Contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under the contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties. 7. Immigration Reform and Control Act. Contractor certifies it is aware of the requirements of the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (8 USC sections 1101-1525) and has complied and will comply with these requirements, including, but not limited to, verifying the eligibility for employment of all agents, employees, subcontractors, and consultants that are included in this Contract. 8. Prevailing Wage. Pursuant to the California Labor Code, the director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in accordance with California Labor Code, section 1773 and a copy of a schedule of said general prevailing wage rates is on file in the office of the City Engineer, and is incorporated by reference herein. Pursuant to California Labor Code, section 1775, Contractor shall pay prevailing wages. Contractor shall post copies of all applicable prevailing wages on the job site. 9. Indemnification. Contractor shall assume the defense of, pay all expenses of defense, and indemnify and hold harmless the City, and its officers and employees, from all claims, loss, damage, injury and liability of every kind, nature and description, directly or indirectly arising from or in connection with the performance of the Contract or work; or from any failure or alleged failure of Contractor to comply with any applicable law, rules or regulations including those relating to safety and health; and from any and all claims, loss, damages, injury and liability, howsoever the same Q 911 l/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 31 of 76 Pages /-- may be caused, resulting directly or indirectly from the nature of the work covered by the Contract, except for loss or damage caused by the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the City. The expenses of defense include all costs and expenses including attorneys’ fees for litigation, arbitration, or other dispute resolution method. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the City against any challenges to the award of the contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the City. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for City, if City requests separate counsel. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the City against any challenges to the award of the contract to Contractor, arising in whole or in part from alleged inaccuracies or misrepresentation by the Contractor, whether intentional or otherwise, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the City. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for City, if City requests separate counsel. 10. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. Said insurance shall meet the City’s policy for insurance as stated in Resolution No. 91-403. (A) Coverages And Limits Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages and minimum limits indicted herein: P a. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance: $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. If the policy has an aggregate limit, a separate aggregate in the amounts specified shall be established for the risks for which the City or its agents, officers or employees are additional insured. b. Business Automobile Liability Insurance: $1 ,OOO,OOO combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. The auto insurance certificate must state the coverage is for “any auto” and cannot be limited in any manner. Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance: Workers’ compensation limits is required by the Labor Code of the State of California and Employers’ Liability limits of $1,000,000 per incident. Workers’ compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is acceptable to the City. (B) Additional Provisions. Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under this agreement with the exception of Workers’ Compensation and Business Automobile Liability Insurance contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions. /A a. The City, its officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insured as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the contractor; premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the City, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be evidenced using separate documents attached to the certificate of insurance; one for each company affording general liability, and employers’ liability coverage. b. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the City, its 9/l l/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 32 of 76 Pages offtcials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City, its officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it. C. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the City, its officials, employees or volunteers. d. Coverage shall state that the contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer’s liability. (C) Notice Of Cancellation. Each insurance policy required by this agreement shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or limits except after thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the City by certified mail, return receipt requested. (D) Deductibles And Self-Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self-insured retention levels must be declared to and approved by the City. At the option of the City, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the City, its officials and employees; or the contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. r (E) Waiver Of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this agreement shall contain a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the City or any of its officials or employees. (F) Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. Coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. (G) Acceptability Of Insurers. Insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Bests Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of insurance by the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as evidenced by a listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or under the standards specified by the City Council in Resolution No. 91-403. (H) Verification Of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance and original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the City and are to be received and approved by the City before the Contract is executed by the City. (I) Cost Of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this agreement shall be included in the Contractor’s bid. 11. Claims and Lawsuits. All claims by contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with section 20104) which are incorporated by reference. A copy of Article 1.5 is included in the Supplemental Provisions I section. The contractor shall initially submit all claims over $375,000 to the City using the informal dispute resolution process described in Public Contract Code subsections 20104.2(a), (c), (d). Notwithstanding the provisions of this section of the contract, all claims shall comply with the Government Tort Claim Act (section 900 et seq., of the California q SI 9/11100 Contract No. 33841 Page 33 of 76 Pages .- Government Code) for any claim or cause of action for money or damages prior to filing any lawsuit for breach of this agreement. (A) Assertion of Claims. Contractor hereby agrees that any contract claim submitted to the City must be asserted as part of the contract process as set forth in this agreement and not in anticipation of litigation or in conjunction with litigation. (6) False Claims. Contractor acknowledges that if a false claim is submitted to the City, it may be considered fraud and the Contractor may be subject to criminal prosecution. (C) Government Code. 1 Contractor acknowledges that California Government Code sections 12650 et seq., the False Claims Act, provides for civil penalties where a person knowingly submits a false claim to a public entity. These provisions include false claims made with deliberate ignorance of the false information or in reckless disregard of the truth or falsity of the information. (D) Penalty Recovery. If the City of Carlsbad seeks to recover penalties pursuant to the False Claims Act, it is entitled to recover its litigation costs, including attorney’s fees. (E) Debarment for False Claims. Contractor hereby acknowledges that the filing of a false claim may subject the Contractor to an administrative debarment proceeding wherein the Contractor may be prevented from further bidding on public contracts for a period of up to five years. (F) Carlsbad Municipal Code. The provisions of Carlsbad Municipal Code sections 3.32.025, 3.32.026, 3.32.027 and 3.32.028 pertaining to false claims are incorporated herein by reference. (G) Debarment from Other Jurisdictions. Contractor hereby acknowledges that debarment by another jurisdiction is grounds for the City of Carlsbad to disqualify the Contractor or subcontrac- tor from participating in future contract bidding. (H) Jurisdiction. Contractor agrees and hereby stipulates that the proper venue and jurisdiction for resolution of any disputes between the parties arising out of this agreement is San Diego County, California. I have read and understand all provisions of Section 11 above. init 0,9 init 12. Maintenance of Records. Contractor shall maintain and m&e available at no cost to the City, upon request, records in accordance with sections 1776 and 1812 of Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2, of the Labor Code. If the Contractor does not maintain the records at Contractor’s principal place of business as specified above, Contractor shall so inform the City by certified letter accompanying the return of this Contract. Contractor shall notify the City by certified mail of any change of address of such records. 13. Labor Code Provisions. The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, commencing with section 1720 of the Labor Code are incorporated herein by reference. r 14. Security. Securities in the form of cash, cashier’s check, or certified check may be substituted for any monies withheld by the City to secure performance of this contract for any obligation established by this contract. Any other security that is mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the City may be substituted for monies withheld to ensure performance under this Contract. 15. Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted. Each and every provision of law and 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 34 of 76 Pages clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and included herein, and if, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon application of either party, the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. 16. Additional Provisions. Any additional provisions of this agreement are set forth in the “General Provisions” or “Supplemental Provisions” attached hereto and made a part hereof. NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED (CORPORATE SEAL) n A CONTRACTOR: CITY ilafner / Bergman Corpqration By: the By: r / (sign here) John Hafner-Vice Pres (print name and title) IOOD, City Clerk By: / Diane Bock-SecTebv (print name and title) President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only one officer signs’the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary secretary under the corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation. APPROVED AS TO FORM: or assistant RONALD R. BALL Contract No. 33841 Page 35 of 76 Pages BONDf ,MTBNHOUS-0002 LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, State of California, by Resolution NO. 2000-380 I adopted DECEMBER 12, 2000 , has awarded to B & B CONTRACTORS, INC. DBA HAl?NER/BERGMAN ENGINEERING .!I- (hereinafter designated as the “Principal”), a Contract for: Georgina Cole Library, Phase 2, Exterior Improvements. in the City of Carlsbad, in strict conformity with the drawings and specifications, and other Contract Documents now on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad and all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute said Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond, providing that if Principal or any of their subcontractors shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender or other supplies or teams used in, upon or about the performance of the work agreed to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the Surety on this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth. NOW, THEREFORE, WE,B & B =‘=CTORS, INC. DBA HAFNER/BERGMAN ENGINEEFING COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY as Principal, (hereinafter designated as the “Contractor”), and ~IZIV ~~NIPA~JY as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the City of Carlsbad in the sum of ---SIX HUNDRED TWENTY-SIX THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED THIRTY-NINE & NO/loo----- Dollars ($-626.039.00-----), said sum being an amount equal to: One hundred percent (100%) of the total estimated amount payable under said contract by the City of Carlsbad under the terms of the contract when the total amount payable does not exceed five million dollars ($5,000,000) or, Fifty percent (50%) of the total estimated amount payable under said contract by the City of Carlsbad under the terms of the contract when the total amount payable is not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) and does not exceed ten million dollars ($10,000,000) or, Twenty-five percent (25%) of the total estimated amount payable under said contract by the City of Carlsbad under the terms of the contract if the contract exceeds ten miltion dollars ($lO,OOO,OOO) and for which payment well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. - THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the person or his/her subcontractors fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender, supplies, or teams used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any other work or labor thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment insurance Code with respect to such work or labor, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the contractor and subcontractors pursuant to section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work and labor that the Surety will pay for the same, not to exceed the sum specified in the bond, and, also, in case suit is brought upon the bond, costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorney’s fees, to be fixed by the court, as required by the provisions of section 3248 of the California Civil Code. BOND% MTBNHOUS-0002 This bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies and corporations entitled to file claims under Title 15 of Part 4 of Division 3 of the Civil Code (commencing with section 3082). Surety stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alterations or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. In the event that Contractor is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Contractor shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond. Executed by CONTRACTOR this 8TH Executed by SURETY this 5TH day day of January ,20x. of JANUARY ,20=. CONTRACTOR: SURETY: B & B CONTRACTORS, INC. DBA COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY (name of Surety) 3910 KESWICK ROAD D MD (address of Surety) 2 12 11 Vice President (title and organiration of signatory) t By: L g&i&L (sign here) Diane Bock (print name here) Secretary (signature of Attorney-in-Fact) -SCOTT-.- (printed name of Attorney-in-Fart) (attach corporate resolution showing current power of attorney) (title and organization of signatory) (Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.) (President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only one officer. signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.) APPROVED AS TO FORM: b @% 9/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 37 of 76 Pages CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California aerr?& } ss. County of personally appeared &ersonally known to me 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence Place Notary Seal Above to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. OPTIONAL Though fhe information below is not required by law, if may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer Signer’s Name: q Individual 0 Corporate Officer -Title(s): 0 Partner - 0 Limited II General 0 Attorney in Fact 0 Trustee 0 Guardian or Conservator Cl Other: Signer Is Representing: Top of thumb here D 1997 National Notary Association * 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 * Chatsworth, CA 91313-2402 Prod. No. 5907 Reorder: Call Toll-Free t-800-876-6827 . BOND# MTBNHOUS-0002 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE/WARRANTY BON i WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, State of California, P y Resolution No. 2000-380 , adopted DECEMBER 12. 2000 , h s awarded to Iij i3 B ~ONTF~~CTORS, INC. DBA ~N~/BERG~ ENGINEERING Jhereinafter - . . designated as the “Principal”), a Contract for: Georgina Cole Library, Phase 2, Exterior Improvements. in the City of Carlsbad, in strict conformity with the contract, the drawings and specifications, and other Contract Documents now on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute said Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond for the faithful performance and warranty of said Con act; 1 asPrincipal, NOW,THEREFORE,WE, BAFNER/BERGMAN ENGINEERING B dr B CYTRACTORS, INC, DBA (hereinafter designated as the “Contractor”), and CO~&,TY AND SURETY COMPANY as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ---SIX HUNDRED TWiNTY-SIX THOUSAND EIQHT HUNDRED in the sum of THI]BTy-NINE & NO/l o()- Dollars ($--626.839.00 to one hundred percent (100%) of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be certain attorney, its successors and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the above bounden heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions, and agreements in the alteration thereof made as therein provided on their part, to be kept and performe in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent shall indemnify and save harmless the City of Carlsbad, its officers, employe therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it sh force and effect. As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount sp there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reas fees, incurred by the City in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to be tax included in any judgment rendered. Surety stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications ac same shall affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice extension of time, alterations or addition to the terms of the contract or to the specifications. v3 dill lml m--,---a .I- Clr)O.. BOND% MTBNHOUS-0002 In the event that Contractor is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Contractor shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond. f- Executed by CONTRACTOR this 8TH dayof January ,20 01. CONTRACTOR: B & B CONTRACTORS, INC. DBA HAFNER/BERGMAN ENGINEERING By: bohn Hafner ' (print name here) Vice President (Title and Organization of Signatory) By: %a& e?bnk (sign here) Diane Bock (Attach corporate resolution showing current (print name here) power of attorney.) Executed by SURETY this 5TH day of JANUARY ,200l . SURETY: COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY (name of Surety) 3910 KESWICK ROAD BALTIMORE, MD 21211 (address of Surety) 800-664-l 791 (telephone number of Surety) By: (s=ture of Attorney-in-Fact) GREGORY SCOTT PARRISH (printed name of Attorney-in-Fact) Secretary (Title and Organization of signatory) (Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.) (President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only one officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.) APPROVED AS TO FORM: ff- I33 - Deputy ay Attorney % q 9111100 Contract No. 33841 Page 39 of 76 Pages 0~/02/2881 11: 86 281-256-3832 . ,. AMERICAN SURETY PAGE 05 state of TEXAS 1 ss County of On Dl-05-01 ‘,befom3, j&fQ 6. Eleh cm@ Nwm ad m u OWM (av., ‘Jc- ooo. NW.7 Rtw personally appeared GREGORY S. PARRISH wmr(ll d WW III persttnally kn~ to me *. xproved to me on the bests of SatlsfactOrY evidence to be the person(s) whoee’ name(s) Ware subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged lo me tktt helshelthey executed the same !n hlslher/their authorized capscity~les), and that, by hislherltheir signature(s) on the Instrument the perrson(s), Or the entlq i acted, execute the instrument. &on behalf of ti@h the perWf(S) ‘Though fhe fnlbrmalion &bw ls mt requketf by lm, rt maym and could prevenl tkwdubni rmovsl and rsdftachmenf of thb f&m ru snotiw documnt Description of Attached Dacument lltle or ‘I\/ps of Dwrmorft: oocmt Dale: Signer(s) Otntw than Namrd Abave: Capacity(ieo) Claimed by Signer Number of Pages: Signer’s Nqne: 0 lndividlIal 0 Corpome Offkm - T)He(s): 0 Partner -0 lhbd 0 General @ Attorney In Fact II TNStee 0 Guard&n 0rConse~r 0 Other. . Signer Is Representing: 0 1101 N?llard rrurY hndmdm - 9339 R&m Abw.. P.0. e4I l.402 - chati. CA TOTAL P. 02 BONDI MTBNEous-0002 Power of Attorney COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY HOME OFFICE: 3910 KESWICK ROAD, BALTIMORE, MD 21211 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Maryland, by M. P. HAMMOND, Vice President, and L. L. COUCHER. Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article Vl. Section 2, of the By-Laws of said Company, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the reef, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint Gregory S. PARRISH, of Houston, Texas, its true and law -in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act ertakings EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Survi the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall b y and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and ac ected officers of the Company at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper pers The said Assistant Secretary does hereb is a true copy of Article VI, Section 2. of the By-Laws of said Cd IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the sai ssistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seal of the said AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, this 20th day of December, A.D. 2000. ATTEST: COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY State of Maryland County of Baltimore “I L. L. Coucher Assistant Secretary M. P. Hammond Vice President On this 20th day of December, A.D. 2000, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came M. P. HAMMOND, Vice President, and L. L. GOUCHER, Assistant Secretary of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and offtcers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. Carol J. .Fatkr Noiary Public My Commission Expires: August I, 2004 POA-F 166-P CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California County of 3m T$!mxdtio > ss. personally appeared & ersonally known to me 0 proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence Place Notary Seal Above to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on fhe document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer Signer’s Name: 0 Individual 0 Corporate Officer - Title(s): 0 Partner - 0 Limited 0 General q Attorney in Fact 0 Trustee 0 Guardian or Conservator 0 Other: Signer Is Representing: Top of thumb here 0 1997 National Notary Association * 9350 De Soto Ave., PO Box 2402 * Chatsworth. CA 91313.2402 Prod. No. 5907 Reorder: Call Toll-Free 1-800-676-6827 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the City of Cartsbad whose address is 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad, California, 92008, hereinafter called “City” and N/A whose address is hereinafter called “Contractor” and whose address is called “Escrow Agent.” hereinafter For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows: 1. Pursuant to sections 22300 and 10263 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by the City pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into between the City and Contractor for the “Project” in the amount of dated (hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”). Alternatively, on written request of the contractor, the City shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to the escrow agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the City within 10 days of the deposit. The Escrow Agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the escrow agent in connection with the handling of retentions under these sections in an amount not less than $100,000 per contract. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be a least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the contract between the City and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of the , and shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial owner. 2. The City shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which othenvise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above. 3. When the City makes payment of retentions earned directly to the escrow agent, the escrow agent shall hold them for the benefit of the contractor until such time as the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the City pays the escrow agent directly. 4. The contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by the Escrow Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the City. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent. 5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the City. w w 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 40 of 76 Pages 6. Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from City to the Escrow Agent that City consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor. 7. The City shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven days’ written notice to the Escrow Agent from the City of the default, the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the City. 8. Upon receipt of written notification from the City certifying that the Contract is final and complete and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges. 9. The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the City and the contractor pursuant to sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this agreement and the City and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from Escrow Agent’s release, conversion and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above. 10. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notices or to receive written notice on behalf of the City and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows: For Contractor: For Escrow Agent: Title N/A Title Name Signature Address Title Vice President Name N/A Signature N/A Address N/A At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the City and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement. Q 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 41 of 76 Pages IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the date first set forth above. For City: Title Name Signature Address For Contractor: Title Vice President For Escrow Agent: a 9/l 1 /oo Title N/A Name N/A Signature N/A Address N/A Contract No. 33841 Page 42 of 76 Pages SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS FOR CONTRACT NO. 33841 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS ’ SECTION 1 -- TERMS, DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 1-1 TERMS “Base Bid”: For the purposes of this contract, the term “base bid” as used on Page 12 of the “Contractor’s Proposal” shall be understood to include all work, labor, equipment, materials, utilities, supplies, associated fees and costs of any kind, etc., as described in the plans, specifications, and contract documents herein less “Schedule A” work as defined below. f- “Schedule A”: For the purposes of this contract, the term “Schedule A” as used on Page 12 of the “Contractor’s Proposal” includes all work, labor, equipment, materials, utilities, supplies, associated fees and costs of any kind, etc., associated with the removal and disposal of the modular trailer units on the site and the subsequent landscaping of this area as described in the contract documents. Contractor is directed to various notes and references in the plans, specifications, and contract documents affecting this area of the project. Included are notes and references to “additive alternate 1” and similar language noting landscaping, hardscape, irrigation, site furnishings, etc., for this scope of work. City makes no representations, warranties, or guarantees whatsoever regarding these modular trailer units. Upon execution of the contract documents by both City and Contractor and the subsequent issuance of the “Notice to Proceed” from City to Contractor, these modular trailer units shall become the property ownership and resulting responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor is to dismantle and dispose of off-site these modular trailer units in any manner Contractor sees fit. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all licensing, transportation, building, re-outfitting, etc., fees and costs of any kind associated with the removal and disposal of the modular trailer units. Add the following section: 1-l .1 Reference to Drawings. Where words “shown “, “indicated”, “detailed”, “noted”, “scheduled”, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference is made to the plans accompanying these provisions, unless stated otherwise. Add the following section: l-l .2 Directions. Where words “directed”, “designated”, ” selected”, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, designation or selection of the Engineer is intended, unless stated otherwise. The word “required” and words of similar import shall be understood to mean “as required to properly complete the work as required and as approved by the Engineer,” unless stated otherwise. . Add the following section: l-l.3 Equals and Approvals. Where the words “equal”, “approved equal”, “equivalent”, and such ,- words of similar import are used, it shall be understood such words are followed by the expression “in the opinion of the Engineer”, unless otherwise stated. Where the words “approved”, “approval”, “acceptance”, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval, acceptance, or similar import of the Engineer is intended and required. G 911 l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 43 of 76 Pages Add the following section: l-l .4 Perform. The word “perform” shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall perform all operations, labor, tools and equipment, and further, including the furnishing and installing of materials that are indicated, specified or required to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall furnish and install the work, complete in place and ready to use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation. l-2 DEFINITIONS. Modify as follows: The following words, or groups of words, shall be exclusively defined by the definitions assigned to them herein. Agency - the City of Carlsbad, California. City Council -the City Council of the City of Carlsbad. City Manager - the City Manager of the City of Carlsbad or his/her approved representative. Dispute Board - persons designated by the City Manager to hear and advise the City Manager on claims submitted by the Contractor. The City Manager is the last appeal level for informal dispute resolution. Engineer - the Municipal Projects Manager of the City of Carlsbad or his/her approved representative. The Engineer is the third level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. P Minor Bid Item - a single contract item constituting less than 10 percent (10%) of the original Contract Price bid. Own Organization - When used in Section 2-3.1 - Employees of the Contractor who are hired, directed, supervised and paid by the Contractor to accomplish the completion of the Work. Further, such employees have their employment taxes, State disability insurance payments, State and Federal income taxes paid and administered, as applicable, by the Contractor. When used in Section 2-3.1 “own organization” means construction equipment that the Contractor owns or leases and uses to accomplish the Work. Equipment that is owner operated or leased equipment with an operator is not part of the Contractor’s Own Organization and will not be included for the purpose of compliance with section 2-3.1 of the Standard Specifications and these Supplemental Provisions. Owner Operator/Lessor - Any person who provides equipment or tools with an operator provided who is employed by neither the Contractor nor a subcontractor and is neither an agent or employee of the Agency or a public utility. Principal Inspector - The Senior Inspector’s immediate supervisor and second level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. Project Inspector - the Engineer’s designated representative for inspection, contract administration and first level for informal dispute resolution. r-- Project Manager - the Municipal Projects Manager of the City of Carlsbad or his/her approved representative Senior Inspector - the Project Inspector’s immediate supervisor and first level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. G 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 44 of 76 Pages / l-3 ABBREVIATIONS l-3.2 Common Usage, add the following: Abbreviation Word or Words Apts ...................................... Apartment and Apartments Bldg ....................................... Building band Buildings CMWD.. ................................ Carlsbad Municipal Water District CSSD ................................... Carisbad Supplemental Standard Drawings cfs.. ....................................... Cubic Feet per Second Comm.. ................................. Commercial DR ........................................ Dimension Ratio E ........................................... Electric G .......................................... Gas gal ......................................... Gallon and Gallons Gar ....................................... Garage and Garages GNV.. .................................... Ground Not Visible gpm ...................................... gallons per minute IE.. ........................................ Invert Elevation LCWD ................................... Leucadia County Water District MSL ...................................... Mean Sea Level (see Regional Standard Drawing M-12) MTBM ................................... Microtunneling Boring Machine NCTD ................................... North County Transit Distrct OHE.. .................................... Overhead Electric OMWD.. ................................ Olivenhain Municipal Water District ROW.. ................................... Right-of-Way S ........................................... Sewer or Slope, as applicable SDNR ................................... San Diego Northern Railway SDRSD ................................. San Diego Regional Standard Drawing SFM ...................................... Sewer Force Main T ........................................... Telephone UE ........................................ Underground Electric W .......................................... Water, Wider or Width, as applicable VWD ..................................... Vallecitos Water District SECTION 2 - SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK 2-3 SUBCONTRACTS. ,- 2-3.1 General, add the following: Should the Contractor fail to adhere to the provisions requiring the Contractor to complete 50 percent of the contract price with its own organization, the Agency may at its sole discretion elect to cancel the contract or to deduct an amount equal to 10 percent of the value of the work performed in excess of 50 percent of the contract price by other than the Contractor’s own organization. The City Council shall be the sole body for determination of a violation of these provisions. In any proceedings under this section, the prime contractor shall be entitled to a public hearing before the City Council and shall be notified ten (10) days in advance of the time and location of said hearing. The determination of the City Council shall be final. 2-4 CONTRACT BONDS, modify the second sentence of paragraph one as follows: Delete, e w 911 l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 45 of 76 Pages “who is listed in the latest version of U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570,“. Modify paragraphs three and four to read: The Contractor shall provide a faithful petform- ante/warranty bond and payment bond (labor and materials bond) for this contract. The faithful performance/warranty bond shall be in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price. The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers, in an amount equal to: 1) One hundred percent (100%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total amount payable does not exceed five million dollars ($5,000,000). 2) Fifty percent (50%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total amount payable is not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) and does not exceed ten million dollars ($1 O,OOO,OOO). 3) Twenty-five percent (25%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract if the contract exceeds ten million dollars ($10,000,000). Both bonds shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the Agency during this project until they are released according to the provisions of this section. The faithful performance/warranty bond will be reduced to 25 percent of the original amount 30 days after rewrdation of the Notice of Completion and will remain in full force and effect for the one year warranty period and until all warranty repairs are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers shall be released six months plus 30 days after rewrdation of the Notice of Completion if all claims have been paid. Add the following: All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following documents: 1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. 2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner. If the bid is accepted, the Agency may require a financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the insurer at the end of the quarter calendar year prior to 30 days next preceding the date of the execution of the bond. The financial statement shall be made by an officer’s certificate as defined in Section 173 of the Corporations Code. In the case of a foreign insurer, the financial statement may be verified by the oath of the principal officer or manager residing within the United States. 2-S PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 24.1 General, add the following: The specifications for the work include the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (SSPWC), 1997 Edition, and the 1998 AND 1999 supplements thereto, hereinafter designated “SSPWC”, as written and promulgated by Joint Cooperative Committee of the Southern California Chapter American Public Works Association and Southern California Districts Associated General Contractors of California, and as amended by the Supplemental Provisions section of this contract. The construction plans consist of one set of plans and specifications. The first set is designated as City of Carlsbad Drawing No. 33841, Phase 2. The standard drawings used for this project are the latest edition of the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings, hereinafter designated SDRS, as issued by the San Diego County Department of Public Works, together with the most recant editions a 9/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 46 of 76 Pages /-- of the City of Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings, hereinafter designated as CSSD, as issued by the City of Carlsbad and the Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Plans hereinafter designated as CMWDSD, as issued by the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. Copies of some of the pertinent standard drawings are enclosed as an appendix to these Supplemental Provisions. 2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents, modify as follows: If there is a conflict between Contract Documents, the document highest in precedence shall control. The precedence shall be the most recent edition of the following documents listed in order of highest to lowest precedence: 1) Permits from other agencies as may be required by law. 2) Supplemental Provisions. 3) Plans. 4) Standard Plans. a) City of Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings. b) Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Drawings. c) City of Carlsbad modifications to the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. d) San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. e) State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans. 5) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 6) Reference Specifications. 7) Manufacturer’s Installation Recommendations. Change Orders, Supplemental Agreements and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will take precedence over items 2) through 7) above. Detailed plans and plan views shall have precedence over general plans. 2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents, add the following: Where CALTRANS specifications are used to modify the SSPWC or added to the SSPWC by any of the contract documents the CALTRANS specifications shall have precedence only in reference to the materials and construction materials referred to in the CALTRANS specifications. The Invitation to Bid, Contract for Public Works, Part 1 of these Supplemental Provisions and Part 1 of the SSPWC, in the order of precedence in section 2-5.2 of the SSPWC, shall prevail over the CALTRANS specifications in all other matters. 2-5.3.3 Submittals, add the following: Each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Resubmittals shall be labeled with the number of the original submittal followed by an ascending alphabetical designation (e.g. The label ‘4-C’ would indicate the third instance that the fourth submittal had been given to the Engineer). Each sheet of each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Each set of shop drawings and submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal on the Contractor’s letterhead. The Letter of transmittal shall contain the following: 1) Project title and Agency contract number. 2) Number of complete sets. 3) Contractor’s certification statement. 4) Specification section number(s) pertaining to material submitted for review. 5) Submittal number (Submittal numbers shall be consecutive including subsequent submittals for the same materials.) 6) Description of the contents of the submittal. 7) Identification of deviations from the contract documents. When submitted for the Engineer’s review, Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor’s certification that the Contractor has reviewed, checked, and approved the Shop Drawings and that they are in EC @B 9/l l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 47 of 76 Pages conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall subscribe to and shall place the following certification on all submittals: “I hereby certify that the (equipment, material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into t liance with the Contract Documents, can be installed in the allocated spaces, Title: Vice President Company Name: Hafner / Bergman Corporation Add the following: 2-5.4 Record Drawings, The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete “as-built” record set of blue-line prints, which shall be corrected in red daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact “as-built” locations, sizes and kinds of equipment, underground piping, valves, and all other work not visible at surface grade. This set of drawings shall be kept on the job and shall be used only as a record set and shall be submitted to the Engineer, or the his authorized representative, for review within five (5) days of completion of the work. This submittal of the Contractor’s “as-built” drawings shall be reviewed by the Engineer who shall thereafter, within a reasonable period of time, communicate in writing any comments, corrections, deficiencies, etc., to Contractor for correction. Contractor shall make the appropriate changes and corrections to the “as-built” drawings within five (5) days of receipt of the Engineer’s written communication. If all changes and corrections are made by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer, Engineer shall communicate in writing to the Contractor of the City’s acceptance of the “as-built” drawings. Thereafter and prior to “acceptance” of the project by City as defined herein, Contractor shall provide to City 1 set of the complete, final, and approved “as-built” drawings on reproducible mylar with no “sticky-backs.” Contractor shall also provide 3 blue-line print copies and 1 auto-cad disc of the “as-built” drawings as well to City. Payment for performing the work required by section 2-5.4 shall be included in the lump sum price and no additional payment will be made therefor. 2-9 SURVEYING. 2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers, Delete sections 2-9.1 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall not wver or disturb permanent survey monuments or benchmarks without the consent of the Engineer. Where the Engineer concurs, in writing, with the Contractor that protecting an existing monument in place is impractical, the Contractor shall employ a licensed land surveyor or a registered civil engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California, hereinafter Surveyor, to establish the location of the monument before it is disturbed. The Contractor shall have the monument replaced by the Surveyor no later than thirty (30) days after construction at the site of the replacement is completed. The Surveyor shall file corner record(s) as required by §§ 8772 and 8773, et seq. of the California Business and Professions Code. When a change is made in the finished elevation of the pavement of any roadway in which a permanent survey monument is located, the Contractor shall adjust the monument frame and wver to the new grade within 7 days of paving unless the Engineer shall approve otherwise. Monument frames and covers shall be protected during street sealing or painting projects or be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. e 9/l l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 48 of 76 Pages 2-9.2 Survey Service, Delete sections 2-9.2 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall hire and pay for the services of a Surveyor, hereinafter Surveyor to perform all work necessary for establishing control, construction staking, records research and all other surveying work necessary to construct the work, provide surveying services as required herein and provide surveying, drafting and other professional services required to satisfy the requirements of the Land Surveyors Act. Surveyor shall be resident on the site during all surveying operations and shall personally supervise and certify the surveying work. Add the following section: 2-9.2.1 Submittal of Surveying Data, All surveying data submittals shall conform to the requirements of section 2-5.3.3, “Submittals”, herein. The Contractor shall submit grade sheets to the Engineer before commencing work in the area affected by the grade sheets. The Contractor shall submit field notes for all surveying required herein to the Engineer within ten days of performing the survey. All surveying field notes, grade sheets and survey calculations shall be submitted in bound form on 215mm by 280 mm (8’&” by 11”) paper. The field notes, calculations and supporting data shall be clear and complete. Supporting data shall include all maps, affidavits, plats, field notes from earlier surveys and all other evidence used by the Surveyor to determine the location of the monuments set. The field notes and calculations will be labled with name of the Surveyor, the party chief, field crew members and preparer of the field notes or calculations. They shall be annotated with the date of observation or calculation, be numbered with consecutive page numbers and shall be readable without resort to any electronic aid, computer program or documentation for any computer program. The field notes shall be prepared in conformance with the CALTRANS “Surveys Manual”. The Contractor shall have a Record of Survey prepared by the Surveyor and file it in conformance with §§ 8700 - 8805 of the State of California Business and Professions Code when the Surveyor performs any surveying that such map is required under 8s 8762 of the State of California Business and Professions Code and whenever the Surveyor shall establish, set or construct any permanent survey monument. SDRS drawing M-10 type monuments, bolts, spikes, leaded tacks and nails (when set in concrete), iron pipes, reinforcing steel and all monuments and marks that are at, or accessory to, property corners and street centerlines are permanent survey monuments. The Record of Survey shall show all monuments set, control monuments used, the basis of bearings and all other data needed to determine the procedure of survey and the degree of accuracy attained by the field surveying including the unadjusted ratio of closure. The unadjusted ratio of closure shall not exceed 1 part in 40,000. The record of survey shall show the location and justification of location of all permanent monuments set and their relation to the street right-of-way. Record(s) of Survey(s) shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval before submittal to the County Surveyor and before submittal to the County Recorder. Add the following section: 2-9.2.2 Survey Requirements, Stakes shall be set at offsets approved by the Engineer at no greater intervals than specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(A) as measured along the project stationing. Stakes shall be set to show the location and grade of future curbs adjacent to traffic signal locations where the curb is not being built as a part of this contract. Staking and marking shall be completed by the Surveyor and inspected and approved by the Engineer before the start of construction in the area marked. Centerline monument shall have the disk stamped with the date the monument was set and the registration number of the Surveyor. Habitat mitigation sites and other areas to be preserved that are shown on the plans shall be staked and flagged prior to the start of any other activities within the limits of the work. When curb and gutter does not exist and is not being installed as a part of the project the location of adjacent facilities being constructed as a part of the contract the Contractor shall place stakes defining the horizontal and vertical location of such adjacent utility b 9/l l/O0 q Contract No. 33841 Page 49 of 76 Pages vaults, poles or other facilities that are being installed as parts of, or adjunct to, the project either by the Contractor and/or those noted on the plans as to be installed by others. Feature Staked Street Centerline Clearing Slope Fence Rough Grade Cut! or Fills 2 10 m (33’) Final Grade (includes top of: f- Basement soil, subbase and base) Asphalt Pavemen Finish Course Drainage Structures, Pipes 8 similar Facilitiesa, (ZI curb Traffic Signal 0 Signal Poles 8 Controller 0 Junction Box 0 Conduit 0 .- Minor Structure 0 TABLE 28.2.2(A) Survey Requirements for Construction Staking Stake Description a SDRS M-10 Monument Centerline or Parallel to Centerline Spacing@, Q 1300m (1000’) Street Intersections, Begin and end of curves, only when shown on the plans Lath in soil, painted line )n PCC & AC surfaces RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake lath - Intervisible, I 15m (50’) on tangents & I 7.5m (25’) on curves, Painted line - continuous Intervisible and I 15m (50’) RP + Marker Stake I 60 m (200’) on tangents, 5 15m (50’) on curves when R;r 300m (1000’) & 7.5m (25’) OI cuwes when F& 300m (1000’) 5 15m (50’) RP + Marker Stake, Blue- :op in grading area I 15 m (50’) on tangents & curves when W 300m (1000’) & 5 7.5m (25’) on curves when RI 300m (1000’) RP, paint on 5 7.5m (25’) or as per the intersection grid previous points shown on the plan whichever provides course the denser information RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Stake intervisible & 5 7.5m (25’) beginning and end BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities, Risers 8 similar facilities (except plumbing), Skewed cut-off lines s 7.5m (25’), BC 8 EC, at ?&, Yd & "A on curb returns 8 at beginning 8 end Vertical locations shall be based on the ultimate elevation of curb and sidewalk at each pole 8 controller location at each junction box location 5 15 m (50’) on tangents 8 curves when R? 300m (1000’) & s 7.5m (25’) on curves when R I 300m (1000’) or where grade < 0.30% for catch basins: at centerline of box, ends 01 box & wings & at each end of the local depression a Q 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Lateral Spacing (3, @ on street centerline at clearing line Grade Breaks 8 ~7.6 m (25’) N/A ( constant offset) N/A ~6.7 m (22’) edge of pavement, paving pass width, crown line & grade breaks as appropriate ( constant offset) as appropriate as appropriate as appropriate as appropriate Setting Tolerance (Within) 7 mm (0.02’) Horizontal, also see section 2-9.2.1 herein 0.3 m (1’) Horizontal 30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal 30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal 30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal 10 mm &“) Horizontal 8 7 mm (l/t) Vertical 10 mm (Yaw) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘/,“) Vertical 10 mm (Y,“) Horizontal 8 7 mm (I/,“) Vertical 10 mm (3/Bn) Horizontal 8 7 mm (‘1.“) Vertical 10 mm ?/,“) Horizontal 8 7 mm (?,*) Vertical 10 mm (3/;) Horizontal & 7 mm (1/4”) Vertical 10 mm (“/,I) Horizontal & when depth cannot be measured from existing pavement 7 mm (I/,“) Vertical 10 mm (“/,“) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘/,“) Vertical (when vertical data needed) Page 50 of 76 Pages Abutment Fill m Wall 0 m Major Structure &I , Footings, Bents Abutments & Wingwalls Superstructures i . . Miscellaneous @ Contour Grading I 0 Utilities 0, 0 Channels, Dikes 1 & Ditches 0 Signs 0 Subsurface Drains 0 Overside Drains CD Markers 0 RP + Marker Stake + Line Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Point +Guarc Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Point +Guarc Stake RP RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Point +Guarc Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake Railings & Barriers 0 AC Dikes (D Box Culverts RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake Pavement Markers@ RP 0 Staking for feature may be on and the accuracy requirements of the RP meet the requirements for the feature 0 Reference points shall be sufficiently durable and set securely enough to survive with accuracy intact throughout the installation 8 inspection of the features or adjacent facilities for which they provide control. RP means reference point for the purposes of this table Q Perpendicular to centerline. @I ‘Some features are not necessarily parallel to centerline but are referenced thereto @ Multi-plane surfaced features shall be staked so as to provide line B grade information for each plane of the feature ;t ? b II I s 15 m (50’) & along end slopes & conic transitions 5 15 m (50’) and at beginning & end of: each wall, BC 8 EC, layout line angle points, :hanges in footing dimensions &/or elevation 8 wall height 3 m to 10 m (10’ to 33’) as required by the Engineer, BC 8 EC, transition points & at beginning 8 end. Elevation points on footings at bottom of columns I m to 10 m (10’ to 33’) sufficient to use string lines, BC 8 EC, transition points 8 at teginning & end. Elevation points on footings at bottom of columns s15m(50’) 5 15 m (50’) on tangents 8 curves when Rz 300m (1000’) & < 7.5m (25’) on curves when R zz 300m (1000’) or where grade I 0.30% intervisible & s 30 m (loo’), BC & EC of faciliies, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities At sign location intervisible 8 I 15m (50’) BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets 8 similar facilities, Risers & similar facilities longitudinal location for asphalt street surfacing zz 15 m (50’) on angents & curves when R;? 300m (1000’) & 5 r.5m (25’) on curves when R 5 300m (1000’). At beginning & end and 5 15 m (50’) on angents & curves when R r 300m (1000’) & 5 7.5m (25’) on curves when R 5 300m (1000’) At beginning 8 end 3 m to 10 m (10’ to 33’) as required by the Engineer, BC & EC, transition points & at @ginning & end. Elevation points on footings 8 at invert 30 m (200’) on tangents, 15m (50’) on curves when R r 300m (1000’) & 7.5m (25’) on curves when R I 300m (1000’) For PCC surfaced streets lane cold ioints will suffice ?d when adjacent marker stakes reference the as appropriate as appropriate 30 mm (0.1’) Vertical 8 Horizontal 7 mm (‘/.‘“) Horizontal & 7 mm (1/4”) Vertical I. as appropriate as appropriate IO mm (“/,“) Horizontal & 7 mm (1/4”) Vertical 10 mm (3/8n) Horizontal & 7 mm (I/,“) Vertical . along contour line as appropriate as appropriate Line point as appropriate . At beginning & , . end At marker location(s) at railing & barrier location(s) as appropriate . as appropriate at pavement marker location(s) / . . 30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal 10 mm (31a”) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘/,“) Vertical 30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘Id”) Vertical 30 mm (0.1’) Vertical & Horizontal 30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal 8 7 mm (‘Id”) Vertical 30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘1,“) Vertical 7 mm (I/,“) Horizontal IO mm (3/a”) Horizontal & Vertical 30 mm (0.1’) Horizontal 8 Vertical 10 mm (3/Bn) Horizontal & 7 mm (‘/,“) Vertical 7 mm (‘/,“) Horizontal F I offset and eievatron Of tnose reatures Q 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 51 of 76 Pages @ 2 means greater than, or equal to, the number following the symbol. < means less than, or equal to, the number fol- lowing the symbol. 0 The cut datum for storm drainage 8 sanitary sewer pipes & similar structures shall be their invert. The cut datum for all other utilities shall be the top of their pipe or conduit. All guard stakes, line stakes and lath shall be flagged. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer flagging, paint and marking cards shall be the color specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(B) TABLE 2-9.2.2(B) Survey Stake Color Code for Construction Staking Type of Stake Description Color* Horizontal Control Coordinated control points, control lines, control reference points, centerline, White/Red alignments, etc. Vertical Control Bench marks White/Orange Clearing Limits of clearing Yellow/Black Grading Slope, intermediate slope, abutment fill, rough grade, contour grading, final Yellow grade, etc. Structure Bridges, sound and retaining walls, box culverts, etc. White Drainage, Sewer, Curb Pipe culverts, junction boxes, drop inlets, headwalls, sewer lines, storm Blue drains, slope protection, curbs, gutters, etc. Right-of-Way Fences, W W lines, easements, property monuments, etc. Miscellaneous Signs, railings, barriers, lighting, etc. * Flagging and marking cards, if used. White/Yellow Orange r- Add the following section: 2-9.2.3 Payment for Survey, Payment for work performed to satisfy the requirements of Sections 2-9.1 through 2-9.3.2 shall be included in the actual bid items requiring the survey work and no additional payment will be made. Extension of unit prices for extra work shall include full compensation for attendant survey work and no additional payment will be made therefor. Payment for the replacement of disturbed monuments and the filing of records of survey and/or comer records, including filing fees therefor, shall be incidental to the work necessitating the disturbance of said monuments and no additional payment will be made therefor. 2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER. Add the following section: 240.1 Availability of Records, The Contractor shall, at no charge to the Agency, provide copies of all records in the Contractor’s or subcontractor’s possession pertaining to the work that the Engineer may request. F- / Add the following section: 240.2 Audit And Inspection, Contractor agrees to maintain and/or make available, to the Engineer, within San Diego County, accurate books and accounting records relative to all its activities and to contractually require all subcontractors to this Contract to do the same. The Engineer shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor’s and its subcontractors performance pursuant to this Agreement, said monitoring, assessments, and evaluations to include, but not be limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of Contractor’s staff and the staff of all subcontractors to this contract. At any time during normal business hours and as often as the Engineer may deem necessary, upon reasonable advance notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its, and all Q 9111100 Contract No. 33841 Page 52 of 76 Pages .b subcontractors to this contract, records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract and will permit the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, and other data relating to all matters covered by this Contract. However, any such activities shall be carried out in a manner so as to not unreasonably interfere with Contractor’s ongoing business operations. Contractor and all subcontractors to this contract shall maintain such data and records for as long as may be required by applicable laws and regulations. SECTION 3 -- CHANGES IN WORK 3-2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY. 3-2.2.1 Contract Unit prices, add the following: In the case of an increase or decrease in quantity of a minor bid item in excess of 25 percent of the original quantity bid the adjustment of contract unit price for such items will be limited to that portion of the change in excess of 25 percent of the original quantity listed in the Contractor’s bid proposal for this contract. Adjustments in excess of 25 percent may, at the option of the Engineer, be paid pursuant to section 3-3, Extra Work. 3-3 EXTRA WORK. 3-3.2.2 ( c ) Tool and Equipment Rental, second paragraph, modify as follows: Regardless of ownership, the rates and right-of-way delay factors to be used in determining rental and delay costs shall be the edition of the, “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates” published by CALTRANS, current at the time of the actual use of the tool or equipment. The right-of-way delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the Contractor and subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein are not a part of this contract. 3-3.2.3 Markup, Delete sections 3-3.2.3 (a) and (b) and replace with the following: (a) Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor’s costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits: 1) Labor .I................................. 10 2) Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3) Equipment Rental . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 4) Other Items and Expenditures . . 10 To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding and adjustments to insurance. (b) Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in section 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor’s actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor. 3-3.3 Daily Reports by Contractor, add the following after the second sentence: Payment for extra work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer. .f3 911 l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 53 of 76 Pages ,f-- 34 CHANGED CONDITIONS. Delete the second sentence of paragraph three, delete paragraph five (5) and add the following: The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure to act, by the Engineer, including failure or refusal to issue a change order, or for the happening of any event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, unless the Contractor shall have first given the Engineer due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified. Compliance with this section shall not be required as a prerequisite to notice provisions in Section 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, nor to any claim that is based on differences in measurement or errors of computation as to contract quantities. The written notice of potential claim for changed conditions shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer upon their discovery and prior to the time that the Contractor performs the work giving rise to the potential claim. The Contractor’s failure to give written notice of potential claim for changed conditions to the agency upon their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. The Contractor shall provide the City with a written document containing a description of the particular circumstances giving rise to the potential claim, the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation may be due and nature of any and all costs involved within 20 working days of the date of service of the written notice of potential claim for changed conditions. Verbal notifications are disallowed. Q 9/l 1 IO0 Contract No. 33841 Page 64 of 76 Pages /I The potential claim shall include the following certification relative to the California False Claims Act, Government Code Sections 12650-l 2655. “The undersigned certifies that the above statements are made in full cognizance of the California False Claims Act, Government Code sections 12650-12655. The undersigned further understands and agrees that this po solved, must be restated as a claim in response to the City’s proposed final e be further considered.” Title: Vice President Company Name: Hafner / Bergman Corporation The Contractor’s estimate of costs may be updated when actual costs are known. The Contractor shall submit substantiation of its actual costs to the Engineer within 20 working days after the affected work is completed. Failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for denial of any claim subsequently filed on the basis of said notice of potential claim. It is the intention of this section that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that such matters be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken. 3-5 DISPUTED WORK. P Add the following: The Contractor shall give the agency written notice of potential claim prior to commencing any disputed work. Failure to give said notice shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. Delete second sentence of paragraph one and add the following: Prior to proceeding with dispute resolution pursuant to Public Contract Code provisions specified hereinafter, the contractor shall attempt to resolve all disputes informally through the following dispute resolution chain of command: 1. Project Inspector 2. Municipal Projects Manager 3. City Manager The Contractor shall submit a complete report within 20 working days after completion of the disputed work stating its position on the claim, the contractual basis for the claim, along with all documentation supporting the costs and all other evidentiary materials. At each level of claim or appeal of claim the City will, within 10 working days of receipt of said claim or appeal of claim, review the Contractor’s report and respond with a position, request additional information or request that the Contractor meet and present its report. When additional information or a meeting is requested the City will provide its position within 10 working days of receipt of said additional information or Contractor’s presentation of its report. The Contractor may appeal each level’s position up to the City Manager after which the Contractor may proceed under the provisions of the Public Contract Code. The authority within the dispute resolution chain of command is limited to recommending a resolution to a claim to the City Manager. Actual approval of the claim is subject to the change order provisions in the contract. 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 55 of 76 Pages All claims by the contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) which is set forth below: ARTICLE 1.5 RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CLAIMS f- 20104. (a)(l) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and a local agency. (2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2. (b)(l) “Public work” has the same meaning as in Sections 3100 and 3106 of the Civil Code, except that “public work” does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the Regents of the University of California. (2) “Claim” means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency. (c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any work which may give rise to a claim under this article. (d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991. 20104.2. For any claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply: (a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims. ‘r- (b)(l) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($SO,OOO), the local agency shall respond in writing to any written claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater. (c)(l) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater. (d) If the claimant disputes the local agency’s written response, or the local agency fails to respond 9111 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 56 of 76 Pages ,- within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the local agency’s response or within 15 days of the local agency’s failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process. (f) This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. 20104.4. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject to this article: (a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator. (b)(l) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141 .l 1 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under the subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds. (3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the attorney’s fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo. (c) The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or arbitration process. .r 20104.6. (a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract. (b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court of law. a 9111100 Contract No. 33841 Page 57 of 76 Pages SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS 4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP. 4-1.3.1 General, add the following: The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe access to any and all parts of work at any time. Such free and safe access shall include means of safe access and egress, ventilation, lighting, shoring, dewatering and all elements pertaining to the safety of persons as contained in the State of California, California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders and such other safety regulations as may apply. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such information as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and manner of work and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the work or materials incorporated in the work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfil1 this Contract. 4-1.4 Test of Materials, delete the phrase, “and a reasonable amount of retesting”, from the third sentence of the first paragraph. add the following: Except as specified in these Supplemental Provisions, the Agency will bear the cost of testing of locally produced materials and/or on-site workmanship where the results of such tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications and the Supplemental Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor. At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by the Engineer before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is found that sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the product from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage, handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the work and shall be removed from the project site all at the Contractors expense. Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the requirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. Said tests may be made at any place along the work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs of any retests made necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 4-1.6 Trade names or Equals, add the following: The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency. P Add the following section: 4-2 MATERIALS TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE. Q 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 58 of 76 Pages The Contractor shall order, purchase, transport, coordinate delivery, accept delivery, confirm the quantity and quality received, prepare storage area(s), store, handle, protect, move, relocate, remove and dispose excess of all materials used to accomplish the Work. Materials shall be delivered to the site of the work only during working hours, as defined in section 6-7.2, and shall be accompanied by bills of lading that shall clearly state for each delivery: the name of the Contractor as consignee, the project name and number, address of delivery and name of consignor and a description of the material(s) shipped. Prior to storage of any materials which have been shipped to or by the Contractor to any location within the Agency’s boundaries the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a copy of lease agreements for each property where such materials are stored. The lease agreement shall clearly state the term of the lease, the description of materials allowed to be stored and shall provide for the removal of the materials and restoration of the storage site within the time allowed for the Work. All such storage shall conform to all laws and ordinances that may pertain to the materials stored and to preparation of the storage site and the location of the site on which the materials are stored. Loss, damage or deterioration of all stored materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. Conformance to the requirements of this section, both within and outside the limits of work are a part of the Work. The Engineer shall have the right to verify the suitability of materials and their proper storage at any time during the Work. SECTION 5 - UTILITIES 5-l LOCATION. Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following: The Agency and affected utility companies have, by a search of known records, endeavored to locate and indicate on the Plans, all utilities which exist within the limits of the work. However, the accuracy and/or completeness of the nature, size and/or location of utilities indicated on the Plans is not guaranteed. 5-4 RELOCATION. Add the following: In conformance with section 5-6 the Contractor shall coordinate the work with utility agencies and companies. Prior to the installation of any and all utility structures within the limits of work by any utility agency or company, or its contractor, the Contractor shall place all curb or curb and gutter that is a part of the work and adjacent to the location where such utility structures are shown on the plans and are noted as being located, relocated or are otherwise shown as installed by others. In order to minimize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon the Engineer’s approval, may be permitted to temporarily omit the portion of work affected by the utility. If such temporary omission is approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall place survey or other physical control markers sufficient to locate the curb or curb and gutter to the satisfaction of the utility agency or company. Such temporary omission shall be for the Contractor’s convenience and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor or for additional work, materials or delay associated with the temporary omission. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately following the relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 5-6 COOPERATION. P Add the following: Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate all work under this contract with all other agencies, special districts, utility companies, delivery services, post office(s) and post office(s) b QTi 9/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 59 of 76 Pages /---- services, and all other parties public and private. No additional compensation shall be paid by City to Contractor for this cooperation. SECTION 6 -- PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK 6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. Delete section 6-l and substitute the following: Except as otherwise provided herein and unless otherwise prohibited by permits from other agencies as may be required by law the Contractor shall begin work within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of the “Notice to Proceed”. Add the following section: 6-1 .I Pre-Construction Meeting. After, or upon, notification of contract award, the Engineer will set the time and location for the Preconstruction Meeting. Attendance of the Contractor’s management personnel responsible for the management, administration, and execution of the project is mandatory for the meeting to be convened. Failure of the Contractor to have the Contractor’s responsible project personnel attend the Preconstruction Meeting will be grounds for default by Contractor per section 6-4. No separate payment will be made for the Contractor’s attendance at the meeting. The notice to proceed will only be issued on or after the completion of the preconstruction meeting. Add the following section: 6-1 .I .I Baseline Construction Schedule Submittal. The Contractor shall submit the Baseline Construction Schedule per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3. The submittal of the Baseline Construction Schedule shall include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6- 1.2.9 and shall be on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-l .3.3 Electronic Media. Add the following section: 6-1.2 Preparation and Review of the Baseline Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule as a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule in the precedence diagram method (activity-on-node) format. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall depict a workable plan showing the sequence, duration, and interdependence of all activities required to represent the complete performance of all project work as well as periods where work is precluded. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall begin with the projected date of issuance of the notice to proceed and conclude with the date of final completion per the contract duration. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include detail of all project phasing, staging, and sequencing, including all milestones necessary to define beginning and ending of each phase or stage. Add the following section: 6-1.2.1 Time-Scaled Network Diagram. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a complete time-scaled network diagram showing all of the activities, logic relationships, and milestones comprising the schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.2.2 Tabular Listlng. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a tabular listing of all of the activities, showing for each activity a 9/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 60 of 76 Pages F- the identification number, the description, the duration, the early start, the early finish, the late start, the late finish, the total float, and all predecessor and successor activities for the activity described. Add the following section: 6-1.2.3 Bar Chart. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path. f- Add the following section: 6-l .2.4 Schedule Software. The Contractor shall use commercially available software equal to the Windows 95 compatible “Suretrak” program by Primavera or “Project” program by Microsoft Corporation to prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule and all updates thereto. The Contractor shall submit to the Agency a 89 mm (3.5”) data disk with all network information contained thereon, in a format readable by a Microsoft Windows 95 system. The Agency will use a ‘Suretrak”, “Project” or equal software program for review of the Contractor’s schedule. Should the Contractor elect to use a scheduling program other than the “Suretrak” program by Primavera or “Project” program by Microsoft Corporation the Contractor shall provide the Engineer three copies of the substituted program that are fully licensed to the Agency and 32 class hours of on-site training by the program publisher for up to eight Agency staff members. The classes shall be presented on Mondays through Thursdays, inclusive, between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. The on-site training shall be held at 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, California. The dates and times of the on-site training shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval five working days before the start of the on- site training. The on-site training shall be completed prior to the submittal of the first Baseline Construction Schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.2.5 Schedule Activities. Except for submittal activities, activity durations shall not be shorter than 1 working day nor longer than 15 working days, unless specifically and individually allowed by the Engineer. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include between 100 and 500 activities, including submittals, interfaces between utility companies and other agencies, project milestones and equipment and material deliveries. The number of activities will be sufficient, in the judgment of the Engineer, to communicate the Contractors plan for project execution, to accurately describe the project work, and to allow monitoring and evaluation of progress and of time impacts. Each activity’s description shall accurately define the work planned for the activity and each activity shall have rewgnizable beginning and end points. Add the following section: 6-1.2.6 Float. Float or slack time within the schedule is available without charge or compensation to whatever party or contingency first exhausts it. Add the following section: 6-1.2.7 Restraints to Activities. Any submittals, utility interfaces, or any furnishing of Agency supplied materials, equipment, or services, which may impact any activity’s construction shall be shown as a restraint to those activities. Time periods to accommodate the review and correction of submittals shall be included in the schedule. f- Add the following section: 6-1.2.8 Late Completion. A Baseline Construction Schedule showing a project duration longer than the specified contract duration will not be acceptable and will be grounds for determination of default by Contractor, per section 6-4. ?3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 61 of 76 Pages Add the following section: 6-1.2.9 Early Completion. The Baseline Construction Schedule will show the Contractor’s plan to support and maintain the project for the entire contractual time span of the project. Should the Contractor propose a project duration shorter than contract duration, a complete Baseline Construction Schedule must be submitted, reflecting the shorter duration, in complete accordance with all schedule requirements of section 6-1. The Engineer may choose to accept the Contractor’s proposal of a project duration shorter than the duration specified; provided the Agency is satisfied the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule is reasonable and the Agency and all other entities, public and private, which interface with the project are able to support the provisions of the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule. The Agency’s acceptance of a shortened duration project will be confirmed through the execution of a contract change order revising the project duration and implementing all contractual requirements including liquidated damages in accordance with the revised duration. Add the following section: 6-l .2.10 Engineer’s Review. The Construction Schedule is subject to the review of the Engineer. The Engineers determination that the Baseline Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions shall be a condition precedent to issuance of the Notice to Proceed by the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that the Construction Schedule does not meet the requirements of these specifications the Contractor shall correct the Construction Schedule to meet these specifications and resubmit it to the Engineer. Failure of the Contractor to obtain the Engineer’s determination that the initial Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions within thirty (30) working days after the date of the preconstruction meeting shall be grounds for termination of the contract per section 6-4. Days used by the Engineer to review the initial Construction Schedule will not be included in the 30 working days. The Engineer will review and return to the Contractor, with any comments, the Baseline Construction Schedule within 15 working days of submittal. The Baseline Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections 6-1.2.10.1 through 6-1.2.10.3. Add the following section: 6-l .2.10.1 “Accepted.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with section 6-1.8.1. Add the following section: 6-1.2.10.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-l .8.1. Add the following section: 6-l .2.10.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the corrections and changes of the comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-l .8.1. The Notice to Proceed will not be issued by the Engineer if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked ‘Accepted” or “Accepted with Comments” by the Engineer. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 64 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked “Accepted” by the Engineer. e 9/l 1 IO0 Contract No. 33841 Page 62 of 76 Pages Add the following section: 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The Contractor shall meet with the Engineer during the last week of each month to agree upon each activity’s schedule status and shall submit monthly updates of the Baseline Construction Schedule confirming the agreements no later than the fifth working day of the following month. The monthly update will be submitted on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and will include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6- 1.2.9 and 6-l .3.1 through 6-1.3.7. Add the following section: 6-1.3.1 Actual Activity Dates. The actual dates each activity was started and/or completed during the month. After first reporting an actual date, the Contractor shall not change that actual date in later updates without specific notification to the Engineer with the update. Add the following section: 6-1.3.2 Activity Percent Complete. For each activity underway at the end of the month, the Contractor shall report the percentage determined by the Engineer as complete for the activity. !f- Add the following section: 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media. The schedule data disk shall be a 89 mm (31/2”) high density diskette, labelled with the project name and number, the Contractor’s name and the date of preparation of the schedule data disk. The schedule data disk shall be readable by the software specified in section 6- 1.2.4 “Schedule Software” and shall be free of file locking, encryption or any other protocol that would impede full access of all data stored on it. Add the following section: 6-1.3.4 List of Changes. A list of all changes made to the activities or to the interconnecting logic, with an explanation for each change. Add the following section: 6-l .3.5 Change Orders, Each monthly update will include the addition of the network revisions reflecting the change orders approved in the previous month. The network revisions will be as agreed upon during the review and acceptance of the Contractor’s change orders. Add the following section: 6-1.3.6 Bar Chart. Each monthly update will include a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path. r- Add the following section: 6-1. 4 Engineer’s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. The Engineer will review and return the Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days of submittal. The Updated Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections 6- 1.4.1 through 6-1.4.3. Any Updated Construction Schedule marked “Accepted with Comments” or “Not Accepted” by the Engineer will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Upon resubmittat the Engineer will review and return the resubmitted Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days. Failure of the Contractor to submit a monthly updated construction schedule will invoke the same consequences as the Engineer returning a monthly updated construction schedule marked ‘Not Accepted”. Add the following section: G 911 l/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 63 of 76 Pages r- 6-l .4.1 “Accepted.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with section 6-l .8.2. Add the following section: 6-1.4.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work. The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer’s comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-l -8.2. Add the following section: 6-l .4.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer’s comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.2. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted and marked “Accepted” by the Engineer before the last day of the month in which the Updated Construction Schedule is due. If the Contractor fails to submit the corrected Updated Construction Schedule as required herein the Contractor may elect to proceed with the project at its own risk. Should the Contractor elect not to proceed with the project, any resulting delay, impact, or disruption to the project will be the Contractor’s responsibility. Add the following section: 6-1.5 Late Completion or Milestone Dates. Should the Schedule Update indicate a completion or contractually required milestone date later than the properly adjusted contract or milestone duration, the Agency may withhold Liquidated Damages for the number of days late. Should a subsequent “Accepted” Schedule Update remove all or a portion of the delay, all or the allocated portion of the previously held Liquidated Damages shall be released in the monthly payment to the Contractor immediately following the “Accepted” schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.6 Interim Revisions. Should the actual or projected progress of the work become substantially different from that depicted in the Project Schedule, independently of and prior to the next monthly update, the Contractor will submit a revised Baseline Construction Schedule, with a list and explanation of each change made to the schedule. The Revised Construction Schedule will be submitted per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and per the schedule review and acceptance requirements of section 6-1, including but not limited to the acceptance and payment provisions. As used in this subsection “substantially different” means a time variance greater than 5 percent of the number of days of duration for the project. Add the following section: 6-1. 7 Final Schedule Update. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a final schedule update when one hundred percent of the construction work is completed. The Contractor’s Final Schedule Update must accurately represent the actual dates for all activities. The final schedule update shall be prepared and reviewed per sections 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions and 6-l. 4 Engineer’s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. Acceptance of the final schedule update is required for completion of the project and release of any and all funds retained per section 9-3.2. Add the following section: 6-l .8 Measurement and Payment. Construction Schedule will be paid for as a portion of the lump sum bid for the contract as described above. No additional compensation shall be paid by City 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 64 of 76 Pages .- to Contractor. The stipulated lump sum price paid shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials including, but not limited to, the computer hardware and software, tools, equipment, and incidentals; and for doing all the work involved in attending meetings, preparing, furnishing, updating, revising the tabular, bar and flow chart Construction Schedules and narrative reports required by these supplemental provisions and as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer’s determination that each and any construction schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions shall be precedent to each and any payment for the Construction Schedule. Payments for Construction Schedule will be made as per sections 6- 1.8.1 through 6-1.8.3. Add the following section: 6-l .8.1 Initial Payment. No payment shall be made to Contractor without preparation, submittal, and approval by the Engineer of the Contractors schedule as described herein. Add the following section: 6-l .8.2 Monthly Updated Construction Schedule Payments. Monthly Updated Construction Schedule Payments of will be included with the monthly progress payment for the Construction Schedule for each monthly Construction Schedule, updated as required herein, that the Engineer has accepted as sufficient within the month that the monthly progress payment pertains. No payment shall be made, nor shall any payment accrue, for any monthly updated construction schedule that is not marked “Accepted” by the Engineer on or before the twentieth working day of the month such monthly updated construction schedule is due per section 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The sum of the amounts paid for Construction Schedule during the initial and subsequent payment periods, or extensions to the contract, shall not exceed the stipulated lump sum price for Construction Schedule. Add the following section: 6-l .8.3 Concluding Payment. A Final payment for the Construction Schedule will be included in the final progress payment and made when both one hundred percent of the contract work is completed and the Engineer has accepted a final construction schedule update prepared and submitted by the Contractor as required herein that shows the actual beginning and ending dates and all other data that is required for baseline and update schedules for each activity shown on the baseline construction schedule and updates thereto that the Engineer accepted for this project. Add the following section: 64.1 Measurement And Payment Of Construction Schedule. The Contractor’s preparation, revision and maintenance of the Construction Schedule are incidental to the work and no separate payment will be made therefor. 6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK. Add the following section: 6-2.1 Order of Work. The work to be done shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials, and performing all operations necessary to complete the Project Work as shown on the Project Plans and as specified in the Specifications. The “means and methods” of the work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. f- Add the following section: 6-2.2.5 Weekend Work Shall not be allowed under this contract. Contract No. 33841 Page 65 of 76 Pages Add the following section: 6-2.3 Project Meetings. The Engineer will establish the time and location of weekly Project Meetings. Each Project Meeting shall be attended by the Contractor’s Representative. The Project Representative shall be the individual determined under section 7-6, “The Contractor’s Representative”, SSPWC. No separate payment for attendance of the Contractor, the Contractor’s Representative or any other employee or subcontractor or subcontractor’s employee at these meetings will be made. 6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME. 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. Modify as follows: The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer within two hours of the beginning of any period that the Contractor has placed any workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each working day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each workman and supervisor and the make and model of each piece of equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor’s opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice(s) required by this section the Contractor agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefor. f- 6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION. Add the following: The Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work to completion within 55 working days after the starting date specified in the Notice to Proceed. 6-7.2 Working Day. Add the following: Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contractor desires to work outside said hours. Weekend work shall not be allowed under this contract. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work The Engineer may approve work outside the hours and/or days stated herein when, in his/her sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay to the City the inspection costs of such work and is mutually agreed hereto to be at the rate of $200 per hour with a four-hour minimum. In the event of an approved extension of the work day by City, no work involving shall be performed by the contractor between the hours of 8:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. on any work day. The Contractor shall incorporate the dates, areas and types of work prohibited in this section in the Construction Schedule required by section 6.1. No additional payment, adjustment of bid prices or adjustment of contract time of completion will be allowed as a consequence of the prohibition of work being performed within the dates, areas and/or types of work prohibited in this section. ,- 6-8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE. Delete the second paragraph and add the following: The Engineer will not accept the Work or any portion of the Work before all of the Work is completed and all outstanding deficiencies that may exist are corrected by the Contractor and the Engineer is satisfied that all the materials and workmanship, and all other features of the Work, meet the requirements of all of the specifications for the Work. Use, temporary, interim or permanent, of all, or portions of, the Work does not constitute acceptance of the Work. If, in the Engineer’s judgment, the Work has been completed and is ready for acceptance the Engineer will so certify to the Board. Upon such certification by the Engineer the Board may accept the completed Work. Upon the Board’s acceptance of the Work the Engineer will cause a “Notice of Q 9/l l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 66 of 76 Pages Completion” to be filed in the office of the San Diego County Recorder. The date of recordation shall be the date of completion of the Work. Delete the first sentence of the third paragraph and substitute the following two sentences: All work shall be warranted for one (1) year after recordation of the “Notice of Completion” and any faulty work or materials discovered during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at its expense. Twenty-five percent of the faithful performance bond shall be retained as a warranty bond for the one year warranty period. 6-Q LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Modify the last sentence of the first paragraph and the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following: For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified for completion of Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6-6, the Contractor shall pay the Agency, or have withheld monies due it, the sum of $1500.00 per calendar day. Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $1500.00 per calendar day is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time. Any progress payments made after the specified completion date shall not constitute a waiver of this paragraph or of any damages. SECTION 7 -- RESPONSIBILITIES of the CONTRACTOR f- 7-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE. Modify as follows: All insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V and are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California. 7-4 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE. Add the following: All insurance is to be placed with insurers that are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California. Policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meet the requirement for workers’ compensation insurance. 7-S PERMITS. Delete the first sentence and add the following four sentences: Except as specified herein the agency will obtain, at no cost to the Contractor, all encroachment, right-of-way, grading, resource agency and building permits necessary to perform ‘work for this contract on Agency property, in streets, highways (except State highway right-of-way), railways or other rights-of-way. Contractor shall not begin work until all permits incidental to the work are obtained. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all materials removed from the project. The cost of said permit(s) shall be included in the price bid for the appropriate bid item and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Add the following section: 74.1 Resource Agency Permits. Not applicable to this contract. Q 9/l l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 67 of 76 Pages 7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK. Add the following section: 7-7.1 Coordination. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with all the utility companies during the relocation or construction of their lines. The Contractor may be granted a time extension if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay is caused by the utility company. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for any such delay. 7-6 PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE. 7-8.1 Cleanup and Dust Control. Add the following: Cleanup and dust control required herein shall also be executed on weekends and other non-working days when needed to preserve the health safety or welfare of the public. The Contractor shall conduct effective cleanup and dust control throughout the duration of the Contract. The Engineer may require increased levels of cleanup and dust control that, in his/her sole discretion, are necessary to preserve the health, safety and welfare of the public. Cleanup and dust control shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made therefor. Contractor is advised that Engineer may require, at his sole election, that all work areas, all entrances and walkways to the building, parking lots, driveways, adjacent streets, etc., be cleaned by Contractor both during and at the conclusion of each work day. 7-8.5 Temporary Light, Power and Water. Add the following: The Contractor shall obtain a construction meter for water used for the construction, plant establishment, maintenance, cleanup, testing and all other work requiring water related to this contract. The Contractor shall contact the appropriate water agency for requirements. The Contractor shall pay all costs of temporary light, power and water including hookup, service, meter and any, and all, other charges, deposits and/or fees therefor. Said costs shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made therefor. 7-8.6 Water Pollution Control. ..Add the following The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the storm water pollution and monitoring plan prepared for this project in accordance with the California State Water Resources Control Board order number 92-08-DWQ, NPDES General Permit number CASOOOO02 and the “Water Discharge Requirement for Discharges of Storm Water Runoff Associated with Construction Activity” Add the following section: 7-8.8 Noise Control. All internal combustion engines used in the construction shall be equipped with mufflers in good repair when in use on the project with special attention to the City Noise Control Ordinance, Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 8.48. 7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY. 740.1 Traffic and Access. add the following: The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to mail delivery. The Contractor shall not schedule work so as to conflict with trash pickup. The trash hauling schedule can be obtained by calling the City’s contracted waste disposal company, Coast Waste Management at 9299417. During overlay operations, the Contractors schedule for overlay application shall be designated to provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be overlaid sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses. Q 9/l l/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 68 of 76 Pages r Seventy two hours prior to the start of any construction in the public right-of-way that affects vehicular traffic and/or parking or pedestrian routes, the Contractor shall give written notification of the impending disruption. For a full street closure, all residences and/or businesses on the affected street or alley shall be notified. For partial street closures, or curb, sidewalk and driveway repairs, the residences and/or businesses directly affected by the work shall be notified. The notification shall be hand delivered and shall state the date and time the work will begin and its anticipated duration. The notification shall list two telephone numbers that may be called to obtain additional information. One number shall be the Contractors permanent office or field office and the other number shall be a 24 hour number answered by someone who is knowledgeable about the project. At least one of the phone numbers shall be in the (760) area code. An answering machine shall not be connected to either number. The notification shall also give a brief description of the work and simple instructions to the home or business owner on what they need to do to facilitate the construction. The Contractor shall submit the contents of the notification to the Engineer for approval. Notices shall not be distributed until approved by the Engineer. For residences, the notification shall be precut in a manner that enables it to be affixed to a doorknob without adhesives. It shall be a minimum size of 3-l/2 inches by 8-l/2 inches and shall be brightly colored with contrasting printing. The material shall be equivalent in strength and durability to 65 lb. card stock. The printing on the notice shall be no smaller than 12 point. An example of such notice is provided in Appendix “A”. .r‘ In addition to the notifications, the contractor shall post no parking signs 48 hours in advance of the work being performed. The no parking signs shall state the date and time of parking restriction for a duration not to exceed the time necessary to complete the work at that location. Failure of the contractor to meet the posted date requires re-posting the no parking signs 48 hours in advance of the rescheduled work. If the work is delayed or rescheduled the no parking signs shall be removed and re-posted 48 hours in advance of the rescheduled work. The preparation, materials, printing and distribution of the notifications shall be included in the contract price bid for traffic control and the Contractor will not be entitled to any additional compensation for printing and distributing these notices. 740.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. Modify the second paragraph as follows: After obtaining the Engineers approval and at least 5 working days before closing, detouring, partially closing or reopening any street, alley or other public thoroughfare the Contractor shall notify the following : 1) The Engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.......................... (760) 602-2726 2) Carlsbad Fire Department Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (760) 931-2197 3) Carlsbad Police Department Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (760) 931-2197 4) Carlsbad Traffic Signals Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (760) 438-2980 X-2937 5) Carlsbad Traffic Signals Operations .,.,..............,.,..........,..,............ (760) 438-l 161 X4500 6) North County Transit District . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (760) 743-9346 7) Coast Waste Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (760) 9294400 The Contractor shall comply with their requirements. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s written approval prior to deviating from the requirements of 2) through, and including, 7) above. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval no less than five working days prior to placing any traffic control that affects bus stops. 7-l 0.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. Add the following: Traffic controls shall be in v3 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 69 of 76 Pages accordance with the plans, Chapter 5 of the California Department of Transportation “Manual of Traffic Controls,” 1996 edition and these Supplemental Provisions. If any component in the traffic control system is damaged, displaced, or ceases to operate or function as specified, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately repair said component to its original condition or replace said component and shall restore the component to its original location. In the event that the Contractor fails to install and/or maintain barricades or such other traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices as may be required herein, the Engineer may, at his/her sole option, install the traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices and charge the Contractor twenty dollars ($25.00) per day per traffic sign or device, or the actual cost of providing such traffic control facility, whichever is the greater. Add the following section: 7-10.3.1 Construction Area Signs and Control Devices. All construction traffic signs and control devices shall be maintained throughout the duration of work in good order and according to the approved traffic control plan. All construction area signs shall conform to the provisions of section 206-7.2 et seq. All temporary reflective pavement markers shall conform to the provisions of section 214~5.l.et seq. All temporary reflective channelizers shall conform to the provisions of section 214-5.2 et seq. All paint for temporary traffic striping, pavement marking, and curb marking shall conform to the provisions of section 21 O-l .6 et seq. except that all temporary paint shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to section 210-l .6for materials and section 310-5 et seq. For workmanship. Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices installed or placed to provide traffic control, direction and/or warning shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor. Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices shall be promptly removed by the Contractor when no longer required. Warning and advisory signs that remain in place overnight shall be stationary mounted signs. Stationary signs that warn of non-existent conditions shall be removed from the traveled way and from the view of motorists in the traveled way or shielded from the view of the travelling public during such periods that their message does not pertain to existing conditions. Care shall be used in performing excavation for signs in order to protect underground facilities. All excavation required to install stationary construction area signs shall be performed by hand methods without the use of power equipment. Warning and advisory signs that are used only during working hours may be portable signs. Portable signs shall be removed from the traveled way and shielded from the view of the travelling public during non-working hours. During the hours of darkness, as defined in Division 1, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code, portable signs shall be illuminated or, at the option of the Contractor, shall be in conformance with the provisions in section 206-7.2 et seq. If illuminated traffic cones rather than post-type delineators are used during the hours of darkness, they shall be affixed or covered with reflective cone sleeves as specifed in CALTRANS “Standard Specifications”, except the sleeves shall be 180 mm (7”) long. Personal vehicles of the Contractor’s employees shall not be parked within the traveled way, including any section closed to public traffic. Whenever the Contractors vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within 1.8 m (6’) of a traffic lane, the shoulder area shall be closed with fluorescent traffic cones or portable delineators placed on a taper in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the pavement at not less than 7.6 m (25’) intervals to a point not less than 7.6 m (25’) past the last vehicle or piece of equipment. A minimum of nine (9) cones or poeable delineators shall be used for the taper. A C23 (Road Work Ahead) or C24 (Shoulder Work Ahead) sign shall be mounted, as required herein, on a sign post or telescoping flag tree with flags. The sign post or flag tree shall be placed where directed by the Engineer. Add the following section: 7-10.3.2 Maintaining Traffic. The Contractor’s personnel shall not work closer than (insert a 9/l 1100 Contract No. 33841 Page 70 of 76 Pages .r minimum acceptable lateral safety buffer distance, eg. 1.8 m (6’)) nor operate equipment within 0.6 m (2’) from any traffic lane occupied by traffic. For equipment the than (insert minimum acceptable shy distance, eg. 0.6 m (2’)) shall be measured from the closest approach of any part of the equipment as it is operated and/or maneuvered in performing the work. This requirement may be waived when the Engineer has given written authorization to the reduction in clearance that is specific to the time, duration and location of such waiver, when such reduction is shown on the traffic control plans included in these contract documents, when such reductton is shown on the traffic control plans prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or for the work of installing, maintaining and removing traffic control devices. As a condition of such waiver the Engineer may require the Contractor to detour traffic, adjust the width of, or realign the adjacent traffic lane, close the adjacent traffic lane or provide barriers. During the entire construction, a minimum of one paved traffic lanes, not less than 12’ wide, shall be open for use by public traffic in each direction of travel. Add the following section: 7-10.3.3 Traffic Control System for Lane Closure. A traffic control system consists of closing traffic lanes or pedestrian walkways in accordance with the details shown on the plans, CALTRANS “Manual of Traffic Control”, 1996 edition and provisions under “Maintaining Traffic” elsewhere in these Supplemental Provisions. The provisions in this section will not relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to provide such additional devices or take such measures as may be necessary to maintain public safety. When lanes are closed for only the duration of work periods, all components of the traffic control system, except portable delineators placed along open trenches or excavation adjacent to the traveled way, shall be removed from the traveled way and shoulder at the end work period. If the Contractor so elects, said components may be stored at selected central locations, approved by the Engineer, within the limits of the right-of-way. Add the following section: 7-10.3.4 Traffic Control for Permanent and Temporary Traffic Striping. During traffic stripe operations, traffic shall be controlled with lane closures, as provided for under “Traffic Control System for Lane Closure” of these Supplemental Provisions or by use of an alternative traffic control plan proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not start traffic striping operations using an alternative plan until the Contractor has submitted its plan to the Engineer and has received the Engineer’s written approval of said plan. r Add the following section: 7-10.3.5 Temporary Pavement Dellneation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be furnished, placed, maintained and removed in accordance with the minimum standards specified in Chapter 5 of the “Traffic Manual”, 1996 edition published by CALTRANS. Whenever the work causes obliteration of pavement delineation, temporary or permanent pavement delineation shall be in place prior to opening the traveled way to public traffic. Lane line or centerline pavement delineation shall be provided at all times for traveled ways open to public traffic. All work necessary, including any required lines or marks, to establish the alignment of temporary pavement delineation shall be performed by the Contractor. When temporary pavement delineation is removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed by grinding. Surfaces to receive temporary pavement delineation shall be dry and free of dirt and loose material. Temporary pavement delineation shall not be applied over existing pavement delineation or other a 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 71 of 76 Pages rc temporary pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be maintained until superseded or replaced with permanent pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be removed when, as determined by the Engineer, the temporary pavement delineation conflicts with the permanent pavement delineation or with a new traffic pattern for the area and is no longer required for the direction of public traffic. When temporary pavement delineation is required to be removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed. . Add the following section: 7-10.3.6 Preparation of New, or Modifications and Additions to Existing, Traffic Control Plan Sheets. If no traffic control plans (TCP) or Traffic Control Staging plans (TCP) are included in the project plans, or if the Contractor elects to modify TCP included in the project plans, the Contractor shall have such new or modified TCP prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any and all construction activities that are located within the travelled way. The Contractor shall have TCP prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any construction activities that are a part of this project that are not included in the project plans. The Contractor must submit the TCP for the Engineer’s review in conformance with the requirements of section 2-5.3, et seq. and obtain the Engineer’s approval of the TCP prior to implementing them. The minimum 20 day review period specified in section 2-5.3.1 for shop drawings and submittals shall pertain to each submittal of TCP, new, modified or added to, for the Engineer’s review. New or revised TCP submittals shall include all TCP needed for the entire duration of the Work. Each phase of the TCP shall be shown in sufficient scale and detail to show the lane widths, transition lengths, curve radii, stationing of features affecting the traffic control plan and the methodology proposed to transition to the subsequent TCP phase. When the vertical alignment of the travelled surface differs from the finished pavement elevation vertical curves must also be shown. The Contractor may choose to modify, add to or supplement the TCP shown on applicable sheets of Drawing(s) of the contract documents or substitute TCP to further its own interests. Such substitution shall be prepared in type and kind as sheet(s) of said Drawing(s). The level of detail, format, and graphics shall be of quality and size no less than shown on sheets of Drawing. The level of detail, format, and graphics shall be of quality and size no less than those on “Standard Specifications Reference Traffic Control Plan” Drawing number 368-5. Such modifications, supplements and/or new design of TCP shall meet the requirements of the Engineer and of the “MANUAL OF TRAFFIC CONTROLS”, 1996 Edition as published by the State of California Department of Transportation. Such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new design of TCP shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer appropriately registered in the State of California. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the suitability and quality of any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to TCP. The Engineer may approve any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to the TCP when, in the Engineer’s sole opinion, such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to the TCP prepared by the registered professional engineer retained by the Contractor will be beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. Such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new design shall not be implemented and no work shall be commenced that is contingent on such approval until the changed TCP are approved by the Engineer. The preparation of such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new designs of TCP shall not presuppose their approval or obligate the Agency in any fashion. Submittal and review requirements for such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to TCP shall conform to the requirements of section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and Submittals. P Add the following section: 7-10.3.7 Payment The Contractor shall provide traffic control at the contract lump sum price bid. The contract lump sum price paid for “traffic control” shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor (including flagging costs), materials (including signs), tools, equipment and incidentals, and for 9/l l/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 72 of 76 Pages doing all the work involved in preparation, reproduction and changing of traffic control plans, placing, applying traffic stripes and pavement markers with bituminous adhesive, removing, storing, maintaining, moving to new locations, replacing, and disposing of the components of the traffic control system as shown on the plans and approved additions and modiftcations, as specified in these supplemental provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. All expenses and time to prepare and review modifications, additions, supplements and/or new TCP designs shall be included in the lump sum bid for traffic control and no additional payment will be made therefor. Flagging costs will be paid for as a part of the Lump Sum Amount for “Traffic Control.” The cost of labor and material for portable concrete barriers will be paid for at the unit price bid. When there is no bid item the cost of labor and material for portable concrete barriers they will be paid as an incidental to the work being performed and no additional payment will be made therefor. Progress payments for “Traffic Control” will be based on the percentage of the improvement work completed. The Contractor shall prepare and implement traffic control plans and shall furnish all labor and materials to perform, install, maintain, replace and remove all traffic control as incidentals to the work with which they are associated and no other compensation will be allowed therefor. ‘Add the following section: 7-10.4.4 Safety and Protection of Workers and Public. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials. 7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. Add the following: Municipal ordinances that affect this work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction project which would be subject to Section 1601 or Section 1603 of the Fish and Game Code, the conditions established pursuant to Section 1601 et seq. of the Fish and Game Code shall become conditions of the contract. SECTION 8 - FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL 8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES. Add the following: Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a “Class A” Field Office. The field office shall be for the exclusive use of the Engineer and such other individuals that the Engineer may designate. The field office shall be a separate structure from any other office facility. The Contractor shall maintain the field office throughout the entire duration of the contract unless the Engineer shall otherwise direct. Said field office shall be setup by Contractor and ready for occupation and use by the Engineer within seven (7) working days of the issuance of the “Notice to Proceed” from City to Contractor as defined herein. In accordance with Section 6-6 herein, failure by Contractor to meet this field office setup schedule shall result in Contractor compensating City, or having withheld monies due it, the sum of $500.00 per calendar day. Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $500.00 per calendar day is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by Contractor’s failure to complete the field office setup as described herein. Any progress payments made after the specified date shall not constitute a waiver of this paragraph or of any damages. pa 9/11/00 Contract No. 33841 Page 73 of 76 Pages 8-2.1 Class “A” Field Office. Add the following: Additionally the “Class A” Field Office shall be provided with: one (1) additional standard, good condition 1.5 m (5’) double pedestal desk with two chairs, one (1) electrostatic copier and supplies, copier shall be Xerox Model 5018, or equal, one (1) FAX machine Panasonic Model Panafax UF-560 or Sharp model FO-5400T, or equal and one (1) additional plan rack shall be provided. Contractor shall provide working 1 telephone, 1 additional telephone line for FAX machine operation, and appropriate electrical connections as required. Water cooler to have hot and chilled water. The integral sanitary facilities may be separate enclosed toilets per Section 7-8.4. Furnishings are subject to agency approval. The field office shall be located at a site satisfactory to the Engineer and within or immediately adjacent to the limits of work. Access and three parking spaces for the exclusive use of the Engineer and his/her designees that are convenient and satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor. The field office shall have a 600 mm by 900 mm (24” by 36”) sign with white background and black letters affixed near the entry door. The sign text shall be proportioned as shown below. The Contractor shall affix a City seal to the sign in a centered location. The City seal will be supplied by the Engineer. CITY OF CARLSBAD CONSTRUCTION OFFICE GEORGINA COLE LIBRARY REMODEL, PHASE 2 8-6 BASIS OF PAYMENT. Add the following: Payment for field office will be made at the monthly price bid and will include full compensation for installing and removing the field office, relocating it as may be necessary to facilitate the project, obtaining all permits, property rental, providing utilities including, but not limited to, electrical, telephone, potable water and sanitary facilities, and maintenance. The monthly rate will be paid for each full calendar month throughout the duration of the wntract that the field office, complete with all facilities and utilities, is available to the Engineer and on the project excepting when the Engineer has ordered that the field office be removed from the project. SECTION 9 - MEASUREMENT and PAYMENT 9-l MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK 9-1.4 Units of Measurement, modify as follows: The system of measure for this contract shall be the U.S. Standard Measures. 94 PAYMENT. r 9-3.1 General. Delete the eighth paragraph and substitute the following: Guarantee periods shall not be affected by any payment but shall wmmence on the date of rewrdation of the “Notice of Completion” Contract No. 33841 Page 74 of 76 Pages 9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Delete the second paragraph and substitute the following: Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the work performed to the closure date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on contract unit prices, completed change order work and as provided for in Section 9-2 of the Standard Specifications (SSPWC). Progress payments shall be made no later than thirty (30) calendar days after the closure date. Five (5) working days following the closure date, theEngineer shall complete the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor’s information. Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within ten (10) days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether the supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than seven (7) days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. In conformance with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the City shall make payments within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed supplemental payment request is not made within thirty (30) days after receipt by the Engineer, then the City shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure. Add paragraph 6 et seq. as follows: After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the contract bid item and change order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate. The Contractor shall have 30 calendar days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make written statement disputing any bid item or change order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all contract bid items and change order items. If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 calendar days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in subsection 3-5, Disputed Work. The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items. e 9/l 1 /oo Contract No. 33841 Page 75 of 76 Pages 9-3.2.1 Payment for Claims. Add the following: Except for those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in subsection 9-3.2 all claims of any dollar amount shall be submitted in a written statement by the Contractor no later than the date of receipt of the final payment estimate. Those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in subsection 9-3.2 shall be submitted no later than 30 days after receipt of the Final Payment estimate. No claim will be considered that was not included in this written statement, nor will any claim be allowed for which written notice or protest is required under any provision of this contract including sections 3-4 Changed Conditions, 3-5 Disputed Work, 6-8.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor, 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report, or 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, unless the Contractor has complied with notice or protest requirements. The claims filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said claims. The Engineer will consider and determine the Contractor’s claims and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying the claims. Payment for claims shall be processed within 30 calendar days of their resolution for those claims approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall proceed with informal dispute resolution under subsection 3-5, Disputed Work, for those claims remaining in dispute. Add the following section: 9-3.3.1 Delivered Materials. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the will not be included in the progress estimate. Add the following section: 9-3.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Add the following section: g-3.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Payment for mobilization and preparatory Work will be included in the various items of work and no other payment will be made. m w 9/l l/O0 Contract No. 33841 Page 76 of 76 Pages LANDSCAPE Delete sections 212 and 308 of the SSPWC and replace with the following Landscape Specifications. PART 1 - GENERAL A. The requirements of the General and Special Conditions shall apply to all work in this section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Soil Preparation 6. Planting C. Staking D. Sodding E. Landscape Edging/Wood Headerboards F. Decomposed Granite Surfacing G. Cobblestone I. Boulders 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Landscape Irrigation System 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality 1. Submit documentation at least 30 days prior to planting that all plant materials are available. Materials are subject to inspection after confirmation of ordering. 2. Materials are subject to inspection at place of growth and upon delivery, for conformity to specifications. Inspection, approval and rejection can also take place at other times during progress of work. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 1 3. Request, in writing, inspection of plant materials at place of growth. Identify place of growth, and quantity of plants to be inspected. Inspection may be waived at Agency’s option. 4. As described in the planting notes for tree tagging, the Agency Representative may opt to either visit the tree nursery or review photographs submitted by the Contractor. In either case visit the nursery and select trees conforming to specifications prior to review by the Agency Representative. Should trees not meet specifications at the time of review in person by the Agency Representative, the Contractor may be required to reimburse the Agency at the Consultant’s current billing rate. 1.04 SUBMlTTA,LS A. Prior to installation submit for review and approval specifications and product information on items being used on project. Submit bound with list of items as cover sheet. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and conformance to State Law. Provide copies of receipts for all amendments in these specifications or in the Soils Report. Deliver plants with legible identification labels. Label trees, evergreens, bundles of containers of like shrubs and groundcover plants. State correct plant name and size indicated on plant list. Use durable waterproof labels with water resistant ink, which will remain legible for at least 60 days. Protect plant material during delivery to prevent damage to root-ball or desiccation of leaves. Notify Owner 7 days in advance of delivery of plant materials and submit itemization of plants in each delivery. Store plants in shade and protect from weather. Maintain and protect plant material in a healthy, vigorous condition. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing of plant materials. Replace damaged materials. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 2 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. B. Coordinate the work of this section with installation of underground irrigation system, utilities, piping and watering heads. 1.07 SAMPLES AND TESTS A. Agency resewes the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications. Provide samples for testing upon request. Remove rejected materials from site immediately upon rejection at no additional cost. Testing costs will be paid for by Agency if materials prove to be in compliance with specifications. B. Prior to amending soils, Contractor should have soil tested at locations and frequency approved by the Engineer for agricultural suitability as described in planting notes. C. Provide 1 cubic foot sample of medium grind topping mulch to Owner for review and approval. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee trees and shrubs against poor, inadequate, diseased and inferior materials and workmanship for one year from project acceptance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The following organic, soil amendments and fertilizer are to be used for bid purposes only. Specific amendments and fertilizer will be selected and specified after rough grading operations are completes and Contractor has had soil samples tested. Pay quantities to be adjusted according to actual amounts approved. B. Provide standard, approved and first grade quality materials, in prime condition when installed and accepted. Deliver commercially processed and packaged material in manufacturer’s unopened containers bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis. Supply a sample of all supplied materials accompanied by analytical data from an approved laboratory source illustrating compliance, or bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 3 C. Organic Amendment: 1. Nitrogen Stabilized: 0.56 to 0.84 percent N based on dry weight for wood residual or rice hulls. 2. Particle Size: 95 to 100 percent passing 6.35mm standard sieve; 80 to 100 percent passing 2.33mm standard sieve. 3. Salinity: Ensure that saturation extract conductivity does not exceed 3.5 millimohs per centimeter at 25 degrees C. as determined by saturation extract method. 4. Iron Content: Minimum 0.08 percent dilute acid soluble Fe on dry weight basis. D. 5. Ash: 0 to 6 percent (dry weight). Soil Amendment: 1. Soil Sulfur: Agricultural grade sulfur containing minimum of 99 percent sulfur (expressed as elemental). 2. Iron Sulfate: 20 percent iron (expressed as metallic iron), derived from ferric and ferrous sulphate, 10 percent sulfur (expressed as elemental). 3. Calcium Carbonate: 95 percent lime as derived from oyster shells. 4. Gypsum: Agricultural grade product containing 98 percent minimum calcium sulphate. E. Fertilizer: 1. Planting Fertilizer: pelleted or granular form consisting of the following percents by weight and mixed by commercial fertilizer supplier: 6 - nitrogen, 20 - phosphoric acid, 20 - potash. 2. Planting Tablets: Provide slow release type with potential acidity of not more than 5 percent by weight containing the following percents by weight of nutrients listed: 20 - nitrogen, 10 - phosphoric acid, 5 - potash, 2.6 - combined calcium, 1.6 - combined sulphur, 0.35 - iron (elemental) from ferrous sulfate. Provide in 21-gram tablets manufactured by Agriform, or other approved. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 4 3. Hydro seeding Fertilizer: Provide ammonium phosphate which consists of the following percent by weight and mixed by a commercial fertilizer supplier: 20 - phosphoric acid, 0 - potash. 4. Pre-Sod Fertilizer: Provide type consisting of the following percents by weight and mixed by a commercial fertilizer supplier: 16 - nitrogen, 20 -phosphoric acid, 8 - potash. 5. Sulphate of potash: O-0-50 6. Single super-phosphate: Commercial product containing 18 to 20 percent available Phosphoric Pentoxide, or other approved. 7. Urea Formaldehyde: 30-0-O. Import or Amended Top Soil: Ensure silt plus clay content of top soils does not exceed 20 percent by weight, with a minimum 95 percent passing the 2.0mm sieve. Do not allow the sodium absorption ratio (SAR) to exceed 6. The electrical conductivity (ECE) of the saturation extract cannot exceed 3.0 millimohs per centimeter at 25 degrees C. Ensure baron content is less than 1 part per million as measured on the saturation extract. To ensure compliance with these requirements, submit samples of soil for analysis prior to, and following backfilling. Plant Materials: 1. Provide plant materials in accordance with State Department of Agriculture’s regulation for nursery inspections, rules and ratings. Provide plants with a normal habit of growth, sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, and other disfigurements. Ensure tree trunks are sturdy and have well hardened systems and vigorous and fibrous root systems, which are not root or pot bound. In the event of disagreement as to condition of root system, the root conditions of the furnished plants in containers will be determined by removal of earth from roots of not less than two plants, or more than 2 percent of the total number of plants of each species or variety. Where container-grown plants are from several sources, roots of not less than two plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected. In the event that the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples may be rejected. Plants rendered unsuitable for planting due to this inspection will be considered samples and will be provided at no cost to the Agency. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 5 2. Size of plants will correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock or as specified on drawings. The minimum acceptable size of plants measured before pruning with the branches in normal position, must conform with the measurements specified in plant list. If approved by the Agency, larger sized plants may be used, but without additional cost. If larger plants are approved for use, the ball of earth or spread roots for each plant will be increased proportionately. 3. Plants not meeting requirements of those specifications are considered to be defective whether in place or not. They must be immediately removed and replaced with new acceptable and approved plants of the required size, species and variety at no additional cost to the agency. 4. Pruning: Do not prune, trim top or alter the shape of trees or plants except as approved. 5. Provide plant material true to botanical and common name and variety as specified in Annotated Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington, published by University of California School of Agriculture (latest edition). 6. Nursery Grown and Collected Stock: Grow under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project; container grown stock in vigorous, healthy condition, not root bound or with root system hardened off. Use only liner stock plant material which is well established in removable containers or formed homogeneous soil sections. 7. Seed: Label seed and provide in sealed containers with signed copies from vendor certifying that each container is fully labeled in compliance with minimum requirements of these specifications. Wet, moldy or damaged seed will not be permitted. 8 Stolons: Hybrid Bermuda ‘Santa Ana’ variety, fresh living sections of runners and stems 2 to 4 inches, high quality and certified to be free from diseases, insects, and weeds. Maximum inert material acceptable will be 8 percent by weight. All materials are to be from the same growing ground and delivered fresh to the jobsite, maximum 24 hours prior to planting. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 6 9. Select trees that are aesthetically desirable and are good examples of the species. Trees with gashes, misshapen trunks or branches, topped leaders, structural defects, badly crossed branches, or other visual 10. Transplanted Materials - See Spec. Section 02130 for shrub & tree boxing requirements for transplanting existing on site plant materials as shown on plans H. Guying and Staking Materials: 1. Wood Tree Stakes: Lodge pole pine, full treated . with Coppernaphthanate Wood Preservative in strict accordance with FS l-r-W-572 Type I, Compostition B,2 inch (minimal normal size) diameter by 10 feet long, no split stakes. 2. Ties: Provide 36 inch corded rubber tie as manufactured by Gro- Strait Products, wire and hose tie by Nunes Turfgrass, or other approved. 3. Steel Guy Anchor: Provide % inch diameter by 36 inch steel vane as manufactured by Maxwell Steel Company, or other approved. 4. Guying Hardware: Wire-pliable 9 gauge galvanized; hose ‘/ inch new rubber; turnbuckles - galvanized or drip painted, size as required; safety sleeve - X inch white PVC full length of wire. I. Tree Paint: Provide Morrison Tree Seal, Cabot Tree Paint, or other approved. J. Water: Provide clean, potable water. K. Mulch: Provide medium grind back such as supplied by Blue Ribbon (714) 633-3666, consisting of fibrous, woody bark mixture of varied particle size such that 90 to 100 percent passes 1 inch sieve, 80 to 100 percent passes % inch sieve and 20 to 60 percent passes X inch sieve, or approved equal. L. Wood Headerboards: 1. On sharp turns and curves, two ‘/z inch by 4 inch laminated boards, or two 1 inch by 4 inch laminated boards may be permitted. 2. Nail stakes and splices with galvanized nails. Nail as required for solid installation. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 7 M. N. 0. P. Q. R. 3. Provide headerboards as shown on drawings, laid true to line and grade. Protect in-place adjacent improvements, shrubbery and other properties. Place stakes on ground cover sod of headerboards. Sand: Provide Washed Silica Sand: Weed Barrier - By DeWii Co. Root Barrier: UB24-2 by Deep Root Corp., (714) 898-0563. Install with gravel backfill option per manufacturer’s specifications. Decomposed Granite: “Empire Gold w/STABILIZER”; pre-blended. Available at KRC Roth, San Marcos, (760) 744-1036. Cobblestone: Provide Tan cobblestone such as supplied by KRC Rock, 315 E. Carmel Street, San Marcos CA 92028 - Phone l-800/572-7625. Cobble size shall be 2 - 4” range. Provide Owners/Agent with sample for approval prior to delivery. Boulders: Provide “Desert Select’ boulders such as supplied by KRC Rock, 315 E. Carmel Street, San Marcos CA 92028 - Phone l-800/572- 7625. Boulder sizes shall be as shown on plans and drawings. Verify with Owners/Agents. Give 48 hours notice to Owners/Agent prior to on site delivery. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Obtain certification that final grades to l/l0 foot have been established prior to commencing landscaping operations. Provide for inclusion of all amendments, settling, etc. Be responsible for shaping all planting areas as indicated on drawings as required. B. Inspect trees, shrubs and liner stock plant material for injury, insect infestation and trees and shrubs for improper pruning. C. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or plants replaced. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 8 3.02 PREPARATION A Soil Preparation: 1. After proper finished grades have been verified or established, condition and fertilize the soil in accordance with recommendations of soil testing laboratory and as approved by Owner. The following is for Bid purposes only. Uniformly spread with a drop or mechanical spreader and cultivate amendments thoroughly by means of mechanical tiller into top 6 inches of soil. Shovels shall not be used to distribute amendments. Application rates per 1,000 square feet: Nitrogen stabilized organic amendment. - 6 cubic yards Planting fertilizer - 15 pounds Agricultural gypsum - 200 pounds Soil sulphur - 20 pounds 2. At time of planting, ensure that top 2 inches pf all areas to be planted or seeded are free of stones, stumps, and other deleterious matter 1 inch in diameter or larger, and free from wire, plaster, concrete, wood, and similar materials which would cause hindrance to planting or maintenance. B. Final Grades: Make minor modifications to grade as may be necessary to establish required final grade. Ensure that finish grade provides proper drainage of the site and surface drainage is away from buildings. Final grades are to be 1 inch below the adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, headers, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., or as shown on drawings or required by Owner. Eliminate erosion scars prior to commencing maintenance period. 3.03 PLANTING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Perform actual planting only during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable. 2. Distribute in planting area only as many plants as can be planted and watered that same day. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 9 3. Ensure that containers are which are opened and plants removed are handled with care such that ball of earth surrounding roots is not broken and that plants are planted and watered immediately. Do not open containers prior to placing plants in planting areas. 4. The irrigation system shall be operational and approved by the Engineer prior to planting. B. Pre-Plant Weed Control: 1. Use a non-selective systemic contact herbicide as recommended and applied by an approved licensed landscape pest control advisor and applicator. Leave sprayed plants intact for at least 15 days. 2. Clear and remove the existing weeds by mowing or grubbing off all plant parts at least % inch below surface of soil over entire areas to be planted. 3. After irrigation system is operational, apply water for 5 to 10 days as needed to achieve weed germination. Apply contact herbicides and wait as needed before planting. Repeat as required. 4. Maintain weed free site until accepted by Agency. C. Lay-out: Mark locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted before any plant pits are dug. Gain Agency approval. If underground construction or utility lines are encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other locations for planting may be selected by Agency. Accomplish layout with flagged grade stakes indicating plant names and specified container size on each stake. Confirm location and depth of underground utilities and obstructions. D. Planting of Trees and Shrubs: 1. 2. Strip and stack approved excavation for planting which is encountered within areas for trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds. Remove from site, excess soil generated from planting holes and not used for backfilling. 3. Protect areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other materials to planting areas. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 10 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Provide excavated holes with vertical sides with roughened surfaces and of a size twice the diameter and l-l 12 times the depth of the root ball for all trees and shrubs. Cut cans on two sides with acceptable can cutters only. Do not injure root ball. Superficially loosen edge roots on three sides after removing from can. Remove bottom of plant boxes before planting. Remove sides without damage to root ball after positioning plant and partially backfilling. Center plant in pit or trench. Face plants with fullest growth to prevailing wind. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil had been firmed around ball or roots. Raise all plants that settle deeper than surrounding grade. After plant has been placed, add sufficient backfill to hole to cover approximately % root ball. Add water to the top and thoroughly saturate the root ball and adjacent soil. Set planting tables with each plant on top of root ball while plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets can be verified. Backfill remainder of hole and tamp firm. Construct an earthen basin around each plant after backfilling. Provide basin of depth sufficient to hold at least two inches of water. Construct basins with amended backfill. Remove basin in all turf areas after initial watering. Limit pruning to minimum necessary. Remove injured twigs and branches. Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Paint cuts over % inch in diameter with tree paint. Stake trees immediately after planting. Install stakes plumb. Do not bring iron sulfate into contact with concrete surfaces due to potential staining. Contractor is responsible for cleaning or replacing stained surfaces. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 11 E. Planting Groundcover: 1. Ensure that groundcover remains in the flats until transplanting. Flats soil must contain sufficient moisture so it will not fall apart when lifting plants. 2. Plant groundcovers in straight rows, evenly spaced unless shown otherwise, and at intervals required by drawings. Use triangular spacing unless otherwise noted on drawings. 3. Plant each rooted plant with it’s proportionate amount of flat soil. Immediately sprinkle after planting until entire area is soaked to full depth of each hole. Protect plants from damage and trampling. F. Hydro-Seeding: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install large trees and shrubs and groundcover prior to hydro- seeding area. Provide mixes specified on drawings. Apply hydro-seed by approved hydro-mulch company. Apply in the form of a slurry consisting of cellulose fiber, seed, chemical additives, commercial fertilizer and water. When hydraulically sprayed on soil, ensure that hydro-mulch forms a blotter-like groundcover impregnated uniformly with seed and fertilizer and allows absorption of moisture and rainfall to percolate to the underlying soil. 5. 6. 7. Remove slurry not used within two hours from the site. Prepare the slurry at the project site by first adding water to the tank when the engine is at half throttle. When water level has reached height of agitator shaft, provide full circulation, then add seed, followed by fertilizer, then mulch. Only add the mulch to the mixture after the seed and the tank is at least l/3 filled with water. By the time the tank is 213 to J/1 full, all mulch should be in. Commence spraying immediately when tank is full. Spray with a uniform visible coat by using the green color of the mulch as a guide. Apply the slurry in a sweeping motion, in an arched stream so as to fall like rain allowing the wood ftbers to build on each other until a good coat is achieved and the material is spread at required rates. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 12 a. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Fill out daily work sheets by the nozzelman, with the following information: Seed type and amount, fertilizer analysis and amount, mulch type and amount, seeding additive type and amount, number of loads and amount of water, area covered, and equipment used, capacity and license number. Do not allow any slurry to be sprayed into any reservoir basin or drainage and channels which may impede free flow of rain or irrigation water. Clean up spilled slurry. After application of hydro-mulch, wash excess material from previously planted materials and architectural features. Avoid washing or eroding mulch materials. Ensure that application equipment had built-in agitation system and operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend and mix a slurry that contains not less than 40 pounds of fiber mulch plus a combined total of 7 pounds fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. Slurry distribution lines shall be large enough to prevent stoppage and shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic spray nozzles which will provide a continuous non-fluctuating discharge. Capacity requirement is 1,500 gallons, mounted on a traveling unit, either self propelled or drawn by a separate unite which will place slurry tank and spray nozzles within sufficient proximity to areas to be seeded Hydraulic equipment used for pesticide applications shall consist of a clean 150-gallon capacity fiberglass tank with complete mechanical agitation. Pump volume shall be 10 gallons per minute while operating at pressure of 100 pounds per square inch. Distribution Lines shall be large enough to carry the volume of water necessary for even chemical distribution. Spray nozzle must cover a 15-foot swath, with a minimum output of 5 gallons per minute at 80 pounds per square inch. G. Sod Planting: 1. Remove rocks, weeds and debris from areas to be sodded. Work up soil to a depth of 6 inches, and break up all clods. 2. Carefully smooth all surfaces to be sodded. Roll area to expose soil depressions or surface irregularities. Regrade as required. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 13 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. Spread turf fertilizer (16-20-o) onto soil evenly at a rate of one pound per 100 square feet of lawn area. Rake in lightly. Be sure soil is level and smooth before laying sod. Avoid laying sod on bone-dry soil. Lay first strip of sod slabs along a straight line (use a string in irregular areas). Butt joints tightly, do not overlap edges. On second strip, stagger joints a much as in laying masonry. Use a sharp knife to cut sod to fit curves, edges and sprinkler heads. Do not lay whole lawn before watering. When a conveniently large area has been sodded, water lightly preventing drying. Continue to lay sod and to water until installation is complete. After laying sod, roll lightly to eliminate irregularities and to form good contact between sod and soil. Avoid heavy roller or excessive initial watering which may cause roller marks. Thoroughly water the completed lawn surface. Soil should be moistened at least 8 inches deep. Repeat sprinkling at regular intervals to keep sod moist at all times until rooted. After sod is established, decrease frequency and increase amount of water per application as necessary. Replace all dead or dying sod with equal material. H. Mulch Cover: Dress all groundcover, perennial and annual beds with X “ layer of mulch, except 2:l sloped and. turf areas. I. Stabilized Decomposed Granite: 1. Deposit, grade and level d.g. (do not compact.) 2. Apply water until moisture penetrates to full depth of d.g. 3. After d.g. begins to dry and set up, compact with steel drum roller to 90% compaction. 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. After all planting operations are complete, remove all trash, excess soil, empty plant containers, and rubbish from the property. Repair scars, ruts and other marks in the ground and leave ground in a neat and orderly condition. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 14 B. Leave the site in a broom clean condition, and wash down all paved areas within the project site. Leave walks in a clean and safe condition. 3.05 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. Notify Engineer in advance for the following inspections, according to the time specified: :: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Pre-job conference - 7 days Final grade review - 48 hours Plant material review - 48 hours Plant layout review - 48 hours Soil preparation and planting operations; one tree with each type of specified staking - 48 hours Pre-maintenance - 7 days Final inspection - 7 days B. If Engineer authorizes a party other than the Agency Representative to make scheduled inspections, present Agency Representative with evidence of such inspections. C. No site visits shall commence without all items noted in previous observation reports either completed or remedied unless the Engineer has waived such compliance. Failure to accomplish punch list tasks or prepare adequately for desired inspections shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the City at Consultants current billing rate per hour (plus transportation costs). No further inspections shall be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received by the City. LANDSCAPING 02900 - CL 15 PART 1 - GENERAL A. The requirements of the General and Special Conditions shall apply to all work in this section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1 .Ol SECTION INCLUDES A. 60 Day maintenance B. Weeding C. Fertilization I-02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 02810 - Landscape irrigation B Section 02900 - Landscape Planting 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services by an experienced landscaping maintenance company 1.04 MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. Continuously maintain all site areas involved in this contract during the progress of work and during the maintenance period until final acceptance of the work by Agency. Improper maintenance of possible poor condition of the project at the termination of the scheduled maintenance period may cause postponement of the final completion date of the Contract at no additional cost to Agency. Continue maintenance until acceptable to Agency. A. Provide sufficient number of workers and adequate equipment to perform work during maintenance period. C. Maintenance period does not start until all elements of construction, planting, and irrigation for the complete project are in accordance with the contract documents for this project. D. Request an inspection to begin maintenance period after all planting and related work has been completed in accordance with contract documents. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 02970-CL 1 E. F. G. Maintenance period commences as described in written notification by the Agency. Prior to commencement of maintenance period, ensure that all ground covers and lawn areas have been planted and that all lawn areas show an even, healthy stand of grass seedlings or sod, grass having been mown twice. Any day or days that there is failure to properly maintain plantings, replace suitable plants, perform weed control or maintain hardscape areas will not be credited as part of the 180 days maintenance. The project will not be segmented into maintenance phases. Keep paved areas free of silt, dirt, leaves and other planting area debris. Maintain these areas at least broom clean through the duration of the maintenance period, cleaning no less often than once per week. 1.05 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee: Guarantee trees and shrubs against any and all poor, inadequate or inferior materials and workmanship for on year. Replace trees and shrubs found to be dead or in poor condition due to faulty materials or workmanship, at no extra cost to the Agency. B. Replacement: Replace materials found to be dead, missing or in poor condition during the maintenance period immediately. The Agency is the sole judge of the acceptability of condition. Make replacements of materials within 15 days after condition develop or written notification from Agency has been sent. Agency has the right to make emergency repairs without releasing Contractor’s guarantee and warranty to Agency. I .06 INSPECTIONS A. Request normal progress inspection at least 72 hours in advance of an anticipated inspection. Inspections are as follows: 1. Immediately prior to commencement of this maintenance work. 2. After the first 90 days of the maintenance period. 3. Completion of 180 day maintenance period. 4. Final acceptance. 1.07 PROJECT FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to date of final inspection, acquire approved reproducible prints and finally record from the approved job record set, all changes made during construction and delivery them to Agency. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 0297OCL 2 B. Deliver guarantees to Agency. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ensure that all materials conform to other sections of these specifications for planting and irrigation, and is acceptable to Agency. B. Provide monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides and disease control chemicals used on site. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE A. Weed and cultivate all areas at intervals of not more than ten (10) days. B. Perform watering, mowing, roiling, edging, trimming, fertilization, spraying, pest control, and cleaning as may be required. C. Street gutters and curbs are to be included. D. E. Maintain adequate protection for people and property, and be financially responsible for damages and injuries. Notify Agency immediately should damage occur as a result of maintenance operations and provide repair or remuneration as required by Agency.. Between the 15’h and 20* calendar day of the maintenance period, reseed, restolon or resod with seed mix as specified on plans all spots or areas within the lawn where normal turf growth is not evident. 3.02 TREE AND SHRUB CARE A. Watering: Maintain a large enough water basin around the plants so that enough water can be applied to establish moisture through the major root zone. When hand watering, use a water wand to break the force of water. B. Pruning: 1. Prior to any pruning obtain written approval from the Agency to proceed. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 02970-CL 3 2. Trees: a. Propose tree pruning to the Agency should there be a health or structural reasons for doing so, including the need to eliminate diseased or.damaged growth, eliminate structurally unsound growth, reduce potential for wind toppling or wind damage, or maintain growth within limited space. b. C. If requested by the Agency, provide pruning for aesthetic enhancement according to “pruning” by Sunset Books. Major pruning of deciduous trees shall be during their dormant season. 3. Shrubs: a. The objectives of shrub pruning are the same as for trees. Do not clip shrubs into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design. b. Make pruning cuts to lateral branches or buds or flush with trunk. Stubbing will not be permitted. C. Staking and guying: Ensure that stakes and guys remain in place through acceptance and monitor to prevent girdling of trunks or branches to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds. All nursery stakes shall be removed. D. Weed control: Keep all areas free from weeds. Use recommended legally approved herbicides. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots. Use mulches per specifications to help prevent weeds seed germination. E. Insect and diseas.e control: Maintain a reasonable control with approved Materials. F. Fertilize as specified by the agronomic soils testing recommendations and as follows for bid purposes: 1. Commencement of maintenance period - six (6) pounds per 1,000 square feet with top-dress fertilizer. 2. At end of first thirty (30) days of maintenance period - six (6) pounds per 1,000 square feet with top-dress fertilizer. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 02970~CL 4 3. At end of maintenance period and at (30) day intervals, should maintenance period be extended for any reason - six (6) pounds per 1,000 square feet with (fertilizer) mix. 4. Avoid applying fertilizer to the root ball and base of main stem; rather, spread evenly under plant to drip line. Rates will vary from about a cup of nitrate fertilizer (depending upon nitrogen percentage) around a newly installed small plant to about ‘/z pound of actual nitrogen per inch of truck diameter measured four feet from the ground for mature trees. 1. At 60 days after start of maintenance, fertilize all trees with tree food stakes 15-7-6- by Domestic Fertilizer, Inc. Apply a recommendedrate. Notify City 48 hours before scheduled application. G. Replacement of plants: Replace dead, dying and. missing plants with plants of a size, condition and variety acceptable to Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 GROUND COVER CARE A. Weed control: Control weeds, preferably with pre-emergent herbicides, but also by hand or with selective systemic herbicides. Hoe weeds as little as possible since this may result in plant damage. B. Watering: Water enough that moisture penetrates throughout root zone and only as frequently as is necessary to maintain healthy growth. C. Trash: Remove it as it accumulates, but no less often than weekly. D. Edging and trimming: Edge ground cover to keep it in bounds. E. Replace dead and missing plants at no additional cost to Agency. F. At 60 days after start of maintenance, apply IO-IO-IO- fertilizers at the rate of 8 pounds per 1,000 square foot. Notify City 48 hours in advance of scheduled application. 3.04 LAWN AND TURF CARE A. Turf must be well established prior to final acceptance. B. Watering: Water lawns at such frequency, as weather conditions require replenishing soil moisture below root zone. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 02970-CL 5 C Weed control: If needed, control broad leaf weeds with selective herbicides. D. Mowing: 1. Perform mowing at such times of the day or week as may be requested by the Owner so as not to impede the Owners operations. Mowing times may be at times other than normal working hours or days. Perform work at Owners convenience at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Clean up grass clippings during and after mowing, and remove legally from site. Use of blowing-type equipment in lieu of sweeping or vacuuming is not acceptable. E. Renovating: 1. If required, remove thatch by verticutting, preferably in the Fall of the year, but othewise in the Spring. At this time, fertilize with nitrate and over-seed if needed. Over-seeding must precede pre-emergent herbicides by at least 4 to 6 weeks. Normally, this means that lawns, which have been invaded by crabgrass, would be renovated and over-seeded in the Fall and treated with crabgrass control the following late Winter. 2. Clean up grass clippings during and after mowing, and remove legally from site. Use of blowing type equipment in lieu of sweeping or vacuuming is not acceptable. F. At 30, 60 and 90 days after start on maintenance periods, fertilize all turf areas with 16-6-8 fertilizers. Apply at a rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square foot. 3.05 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Inspection: Check all proper operation. Lateral lines must be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each end of the lateral. Adjust the heads as necessary for unimpeded coverage and no overspray. B. Controllers: Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements. Give Owner a key to controllers and instruction on how to turn off system in case of emergency as specified in other sections of these specifications. C. Repair all damages to irrigation system at no additional charge to Owner. Make all repairs within one watering period. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 02970-CL 6 SHRUB AND TREE BOXING AND TRANSPLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor shall box and move the trees and shrubs that have been indicated on the plans and located in the field. The trees shall be moved to, planted and maintained at the project site. Submit client references with people to contact including telephone numbers. 1.2 The requirements of the General and Special Conditions shall apply to all work in this section with the same force and effort as though repeated herein. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 Boxing materials shall be: A. 2” X 12” Douglas Fir for sides and bottom. 2” x 6” Douglas Fir for braces. 2” x 6” Douglas Fir for skidding to brace top of box. 1” x (as needed for box size) Hemlock or Cedar for top pad. B. 4” x 4” Douglas Fir bottom stringers for moving. C. Hardware: 16 penny and 10 penny nails, other sizes as needed. Steel strapping l-1/4 “ x 1.031. No Redwood or other similar soft wooded lumber will be allowed in the construction of these tree boxes. Pruning sterilant shall be Physan 20 or approved equal. PART 3 - PROCEDURE A. The Owner’s Representative and the Contractor shall inspect trees that require pruning prior to boxing before starting the work B. If pruning is required the Contractor shall retain as much of the tree head (approximately two-thirds) as possible without endangering the life of the tree. All trees whose pruning does not conform to the sample tree shall be disposed of and replaced with a new specimen tree, in accordance with Part 7. C. All trees and shrubs to be boxed shall be dug and boxed in compliance with the best horticultural practices. The Contractor shall determine box sizes. TREE/SHRUB BOXING 8, PLANTING 02130 - CL 1 D. The Contractor shall prepare the moisture content of the soil around the trees and shrubs so that no soil breaks away from the ball during root trimming. The existing landscape irrigation system may not be available for use by the Contractor during work. In this case the Contractor shall be responsible for bringing water to the site so that normal irrigation occurs in each area in which boxing shall occur. E. Dig and box. trees and shrubs to the full box size. Box size width shall equal the width of the head of the tree/shrub. Box size depth shall be 2 X box size width. Exposed end of all roots shall be cut clean and square with pruning loppers or a pruning saw, then painted within eight (8) hours with tree seal before boxing. F. The box sides shall be secured firmly around the root-ball with strapping before placing the bottom boards. The soil shall be placed against the sides of the box to contain water and to produce a well basin on the top of the root-ball. Bottom boxing shall be performed in consideration of different soil types. The technique of “Breaking Over” shall be used In high-density soils such as hardpan, clay type, or decomposed rock soils. In sandy loam soils the root-ball bottoms shall be tunneled by hand. G. The crane cable shall be secured around the tree box in order to lift the tree out of the ground. Under no circumstances shall the crane cable or sling be directly secured or tightened around the tree or shrub trunk or branches. H. Banding and strapping shall run vertically on all four sides of the box. It shall be applied twice wrapped under and over the box on each end of the four sides. Band strapping will 1ikewis.e be placed horizontally at each end of the four side panels. This procedure will be duplicated on all boxes 84” and larger. Apply 2” x 4” skids of Douglas Fir on the top and bottom of the box. Bottom strapping skids shall be applied to 60” boxes and larger varying from 2” x 4” to 2” x 12” as needed. I. Place temporary guy wires, slings or other such devices as needed to permit the safe moving of the trees and shrubs. These devices shall remain until the tree or shrub is securely rooted within the box. J. Required pruning of trees or shrubs will be designated by the Agency Representative at the site visit to start the plant maintenance period. The guying of unstable trees and shrubs and other incidental work to finish the preparation of the site shall, be outlined during the site visit. A “Punch List” that itemizes these tasks shall be compiled by the Agency Representative and issued to the Contractor. The Contractor shall perform the pruning and incidentals as part of the maintenance work. TREE/SHRUB BOXING & PLANTING 02130 - CL 2 K. L. M. N. 0. The maintenance of trees shall comply with good horticultural practice for the proper watering, fertilizing, pruning and spraying’ of the specimen- boxed trees. The Contractor shall apply pesticides tot the trees and perform any other work necessary in maintaining healthy growing for the trees. The Contractor shall keep the tree storage site and tree boxes free from weeds and refuse at all times. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that all boxes are constructed to withstand the strains and stresses’ of moving and weathering. All trees and shrubs in boxes that break shall be re-boxed in new boxes in accordance with these specifications at the Contractors expense. Transport the trees and shrubs to the storage site in a manner least disturbing to the tree ball and head during moving. Lift trees with equipment such as, but not limited to, hydraulic or conventional crane, semi truck and trailer, balling carts, and skidding rollers. All overhead lines that will interfere with the tree or shrub transport shall be raised or temporarily removed according to the direction of the local governing agencies. P. Every effort shall be made to box the largest size root mass as possible. PART 7 - TREE PLACEMENT A. Trees and shrubs that are damaged, stolen, destroyed, or die during the pruning, moving and plant maintenance period shall be replaced. At the end of the plant maintenance period, all trees and shrubs that are not in a state of healthy, vigorous growth, as determined by the Agency Representative, shall be replaced. B. Replacement trees and shrubs shall be procured, delivered, and unloaded at the tree storage site at the expense of the contractor with no additional cost to the Owner. C. Every replacement tree or shrub shail be of the same species and of equal or greater height, width, and caliber as the original, before being pruned by the Contractor. The Agency Representative shall approve all replacement trees and shrubs before they are delivered to the tree or shrub storage site. D. The Contractor shall deliver the replacement trees/shrubs to the tree/shrub site within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date the original trees are rejected by the Agency Representative. TREE/SHRUB BOXING & PLANTING 02130 - CL 3 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE SYSTEM 1.02 A. PART 1 1 .Ol A. 1.03 PART 2 2.01 A. B. C. D. PART 3 3.01 GENERAL GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions, and Special Conditions are a part of this section and the Contract for this work and apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. WORK INCLUDED This work includes all services, labor, materials, transportation and . equipment necessary to perform the landscape drainage work as shown and note on the drawings and/or specified herein. RELATED SECTIONS Earthquake and Grading Concrete PRODUCTS MATERIALS: 6” Solid Drain Pipe - Smoothwall: Pipe shall be manufactured from high- density polyethylene resin conforming to ASTM D-3350. Drain Pipe Fittings: - Fittings shall be styrene conforming to ASTM D 2852, compatible with pipe used. Pipe Bedding: - Bedding material shall be compacted, coarse clean sand, 3/l 6-inch maximum graduation for solid pipe. Trench Grate: - Trench grate shall be M9045-4, cast iron. Walnut color 20 - 8002, 4” x 24” straight sections. Steel frame shall be galvanized. Trench grate shall be Ironsmith “Olympian” model as supplied by: Ironsmith Architectural Products, 41-651 Corporate Way, Unit 3, Palm Desert, CA 92260 - Phone l-8001338-4766. EXECUTION INSTALLATION: LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02721-l - CL 1 A. B. C. D. E. F. Bedding: Solid pipe shall be lain on 4” minimum bedding material with finish bottoms, without blocks. Cover solid pipe with bedding mated to 4” over top of pipe. Pipe: Install pipe to line and grade indicated on the drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s published directions. Trenching: Comply with Section 02810, Irrigation. Drain Inlets and Grates: Install parallel to walks and walls, and in accordance with the manufacturers published directions. Invert Elevations shall be accurate within l/IO of a foot. Rim elevations shall be at finish grade. See Attachment 02721-A for pedestrian trench grate frame detail with anchoring system. Backfill: Comply with Section 02810, Irrigation. 3.02 TESTING: A. Test all lines to insure positive drainage flow and to determine any leakage in lines. B. Clean out and re-test all lines which have restricted flow of any kind. C. Repair all damaged, restricted flow, and leaking lines and connections. 3.03 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Record all work on Record Drawings prior to backfilling lines and improvements, showing piping locations and invert elevations. 3.04 PROTECTION: A. Protect all inlets from entrance of foreign material and debris. B. Protect inlets and grates from traffic and damage. LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02721-I - CL 2 . IRRIGATION Delete sections 212 and 308 of the SSPWC and replaced with the following Irrigation Specifications. PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS The requirements of the General Conditions and Special Conditions shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1 .OZ DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Provide all labor, materials, transportation, and services necessary to furnish and install the Irrigation System as shown on the Drawings and described herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE & REQUIREMENTS A. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits and all inspections required by permits. All City permits are at no cost. B. Manufacturer’s Directions: Manufacturers directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the Drawings and Specifications. C. Ordinances and Regulations: All local, municipal and state laws, and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these Specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in the Specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules, regulations, or requirements. However, when these Specifications and Drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these Specifications and Drawings shall take precedence. D. Explanation of Drawings: 1. Due to the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between the irrigation system, planting, and architectural features. 2. All work called for on the Drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 1 3. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences, or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in design. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Agency Representative. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Material List: 1. The Contractor shall furnish the articles, equipment, materials, or processes specified by name in the Drawings and Specifications. No substitution will be allowed without prior written approval by the Agency Representative. 2. Complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work. Material list shall include the manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Although manufacturer and other information may be different, the following is a guide to proper submittal format: Item No Description Manufacturer Model No. 1 Backflow Preventer Febco 825 2 Automatic Controller Cal Sense 2100 Series 3 Gate Valve Nibco F-619 4 Etc. Etc. Etc. Irrigation submittal must be specific and complete. All items must be listed and should include solvent/primer, wire, wire connectors, valve boxes, etc. No copies of manufacturers literature (catalog cuts) are required as submittal information. 3. The Contractor may submit substitutions for equipment and materials listed on the Irrigation Drawings by following procedures as outlined in Section 4-1.6 of the SSPWG Book.. 4. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Agency Representative may be rejected and the Contractor may be required to remove such materials from the site at his own expense. 5. Approval of any item, alternative or substitute indicates only that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the “Drawings and Specifications on the basis of the information or samples submitted. 6. Manufacturer’s warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of its liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 2 . B. Record Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete record set of blueline ozalid prints which shall be corrected daily, showing every change from the original Drawings and Specifications and the exact installed locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Agency Representative at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set. 2. These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be the basis for measurement and payment for work completed. These drawings shall be available at all times for observation and shall be kept in the location designated by the Agency Representative. Should the record blueline drawing progress sheets not be available for review or not to be up-to-date at the time of any observation (refer to Section 3.10 - Site Observation Schedule), it wjll be assumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the Agency Representative. No observations shall take place prior to payment of the assessment. 3. The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the record drawing progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. For example, should a piece of equipment be installed in a location that does not match the plan, the Contractor must indicate that equipment has been relocated in a graphic manner so as to match the original symbols as indicated in the irrigation legend. The relocated equipment and dimensions will then be transferred to the original record drawing plan at the proper time. 4. Before the date of the final observation, the Contractor shall transfer all information from the “record drawing” prints to mylar material procured from the Agency Representative. All work shall be in waterproof India ink and applied to the mylar by a technical pen made expressly for use on mylar material. Such pen shall be similar to those manufactured by Rapidograph, Kueffell & Esser, or Faber Castell. The dimensions shall be made so as to be easily readable even on the final controller chart (see Section on “Controller Charts” below). 5. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, such as building comers, sidewalk edges, road intersections, etc., the location of the following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Connection to electrical power, c. Gate Valves. d. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension max. 100’ along routing). e. Electric control valves. f. Routing of control wiring. g. Quick coupling valves. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 3 r. h. Other related equipment as directed by the Agency Representative. 6. On or before the date of the final field observation, the Contractor shall deliver the corrected and wmpleted mylars to the Agency Representative. Delivery of the mylars will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing required information that may be omitted from the prints. C. Controller Charts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: As-built drawings shall be reviewed by the Agency Representative before controller charts are prepared. Provide one controller chart for each controller supplied. The chart shall show the area controlled by the automatic controller and shall be the maximum size, which the controller door will allow. The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual installed system. However, in the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a size that will be readable when reduced. The chart shall be a blackline or blueline ozalid print and a different color shall be used to indicate the area of coverage for each station. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each being a minimum of 10 mils. These charts shall be completed and approved prior to the final field observation of the irrigation system. 1. Prepare and deliver to the Agency Representative within ten calendar days prior to completion of construction, two hard cover, three-ring binders containing the foltowing information. a. Index sheet which states Contractors name, address, and telephone number, and which lists each installed equipment and material item, including names and addresses of manufacturers’ local representatives. b. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment item installed under this contract. c. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. d. Guarantee statement. 2. In addition to the above-mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the Owners maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment and show everything in writing to the Agency Representative at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 4 E. Equipment to be furnished: 1. Supply as a part of this contract the following tools: a. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of sprinkler and valve supplied on this project. b. Two (2) keys for each automatic controller. c. One (1) quick coupler key and matching hose swivel for every five (5) or fraction thereof of each type of quick coupling valve installed. 2. The above-mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project. Before final observation can occur, evidence that the Owner has received these items must be shown to the Agency Representative. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle, which allows the length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or a concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged will be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.06 GUARANTEE: The guarantee for the irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the attached form. The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications shall be filed with the Owner prior to acceptance of the irrigation system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use only new materials of brands and types noted on drawings, specified herein, or approved equals B. PVC Pressure Main Line Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pressure main line piping for sizes 2” through 4” shall be PVC Class 315. 2. Class 315 pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type 1, Grade 1, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1784. All pipe must meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70. with an appropriate standard dimension (S.D.R.) (Solvent-weld Pipe). 3. Pressure main line piping for sizes 6” and larger and l-1/2” and smaller shall be PVC schedule 40 with solvent welded joints. 4. Schedule 40 pipe shall be made from NSF approved Type I, Grade I PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipe must meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-21-70. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 5 5. PVC solvent-weld fittings shall be Schedule 40, 1-2, II-I NST approved conforming to ASTM test procedure D2466. 6. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of type and installation methods prescribed by the manufacturer. 7.. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings: a. Manufacturer’s name b. Nominal pipe size c. Schedule or class d. Pressure rating in P.S.I. e. NSF (National Sanitization Foundation) approval f. Date of extrusion 9. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable I.P.S. schedule and NSF seal of approval. C. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Line Pipe and Fittings: 1. Non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC class 200 with solvent-weld joints when installed in planting areas. Note: Use PVC Schedule 40 pipe for % size. 2. Non-pressure lateral line piping installed under paved areas shall be in PVC Schedule 80 sleeves, 2 times the size of the line it serves. 3. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1784. All pipe must meet requirements set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate standard dimension ratio. 4. Except as noted paragraphs 1, 2, and 3 of this section (2.OlC). all requirements for non-pressure lateral line pipe and fittings shall be the same as for solvent- weld pressure main line pipe and fittings as set forth in section 2.018 of these Specifications. D. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, use red brass screwed pipe conforming to Federal Specification #WW-P-351. 2. Fittings shall be red brass conforming to Federal Specification # WW-P-460. E. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Type K, hard tempered 2. Fittings: wrought copper, solder joint type IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 6 3. Joints shall be soldered with silver solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, 24% cadmium, solidus at 1125” F. and liquidus at 1145°F. F. Galvanized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, use galvanized steel pipe ASA Schedule 40 mild steel screwed pipe. 2. Fittings shall be medium galvanized screw beaded malleable iron. Galvanized couplings may be merchant coupling. 3. All galvanized pipe and fittings installed below grade shall be painted with two (2) coats of Koppers # 50 bitumastic. G. Shut-off Valves: As called out on the plans. - H. Quick Coupling Valve: As called at on the plans. 1. Quick coupling valves shall have a brass, two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 P.S.I. 2. Quick coupling valve shall be operable with a quick coupler key. Key size and type shall be as shown on the Drawings. I. Backflow Prevention Unit: As called out on the plans. J. Check Valve: As called out in the plans. K. Control Wiring: 1. Wire requirements as follows: a. Unless otherwise noted, connections between an automatic controller and it’s corresponding electronic control valves shall be made with direct burial copper wire AWG-U.F, 600 volt. b. Control wire installed in control wire conduit within structure shall be made with AWG-TW solid copper wire. c. Pilot wires shall be a different wlor wire for each automatic controller. Common wires shall be white with a different color stripe for each automatic controller. d. Install in accordance with valve manufacturers specifications and wire chart. In no case shall wire size be less than #14. 2. Wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as pressure supply or lateral lines whenever possible. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 7 3. Where more than one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together at intervals of ten (10) feet. 4. An expansion curl shall be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection. Expansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each electric control valve, so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the surface without disconnecting the control wires. Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench without stress or stretching wire conductors. 5. All splices shall be made with Scotch-Lok #3576 Connector Sealing Packs, Rainbird Snap-Tite wire connectors, or approved equal. Make only one splice with each connector sealing pack. 6. Field splices between the automatic controller and electric control valves will not be allowed without prior approval of the Agency Representative. L. Automatic Controller 1. Automatic controller(s) shall be of size and type shown on the Drawings. 2. Final location of automatic controller(s) shall be approved by the Agency Representative. 3. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the 120 volt electrical power to each automatic controller location shall be furnished by the Contractor. The final electrical hook-up shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor. M. Electric Control Valve: As shown on the plans. N. Valve Box: 1. Use 10” x 1 O-114” round box for all gate valves, Carson Industries #910-128 with green bolt-down cover or approved equal. Extension sleeve shall be PVC with minimum size of six (6) inches. 2. Use 9-l/2” x 16” x 11” rectangular box for all electrical control valves, Carson Industries # 1419-l 2B with green bolt-down cover or approved equal. 3. Use 10” x 10-114” deep round plastic valve box for all quick coupling valves, Carson Industries # 910-128 green bolt-down cover or approved equal. 0. Sprinkler Head: as shown on the plans. P. Identification Tag; 1. I.D. tags for electric control valves shall be manufactured from Polyurethane Behr Desopan. Use Christy’s standard tag hot-stamped with black letters on yellow background. Tags shall be numbered to match programming shown on the Drawings. Provide one tag for each electric control valve. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 8 2. Special order tags from T. Christy Enterprises, 1207 Struck Avenue, “E” Orange, CA 92667. Phone: 714/771-4142 and Fax: 714/771-3029. 3.01 .l OBSERVATION OF SITE CONDITIONS A. All scaled dimensions are approximate. -The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive approval from the Agency Representative prior to proceeding with work under the Section. 6. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. + The Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. C. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there shall be NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. - D. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before starting work on the irrigation system. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Physical Layout: 1. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads. 2. All layout shall be reviewed by the Agency Representative prior to installation. 3. The Agency Representative shall give written approval of sprinkler head spacing prior to commencement of installation. B. Water Supply: Connections shall be made at the approximate location(s) shown on the Drawings. The Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. C. Electrical Supply: Connections shall be made at the approximate location(s) shown on the Drawings. The Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Trenching: The Contractor shall make minor modifications in trenching alignment at no cost to the owner. 1. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Lay pipe to an even grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on the Drawings and as noted. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 9 2. If a conflict arises between the routing on the plans and actual field conditions, this conflict shall be brought to the attention of an Agency Representative prior to proceeding with trenching. 3. Provide for a minimum of eighteen (18) cover for all pressure supply lines of 2 ‘/z inch nominal diameter or smaller. 4. Provide for a minimum of twenty-four (24) inches cover for all pressure supply lines of 3 inch nominal diameter or larger. 5. Provide for a minimum of 36” for 6” or larger. 6. Provide for a minimum of twelve (12) inches for all non-pressure lines. 7. Provide for a minimum cover of eighteen (18) inches for all control wiring. 8. Provide a minimum of 24” cover under vehicular paving areas, B. Backfilling: 1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are perfom7ed. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth, stones or other foreign matter larger than one half (l/2) inch size. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting areas. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities. 2. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of the Agency Representative. 3. If settlement occurs and necessitates adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn, plantings, or other installed work, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the Owner. C. Trenching and Backfill Under Paving: 1. Trenches located under areas where paving, asphaltic concrete, or concrete will be installed, shall be backfilled with sand (a layer six (6) inches below the pipe and three (3) inches above the pipe) and compacted in layers to 95% compaction, using manual or mechanical tamping devices. Trenches for piping shall be compacted to equal the compaction of the existing adjacent undisturbed soil and shall be left in a firm unyielding condition. All trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. The Contractor shall set in place, cap and pressure test all piping under paving prior to the backfill. 2. Generally, piping under existing walks is done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where any cutting or breaking of sidewalks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced by the Contractor as a part of the Contract cost. Permission to cut or break sidewalks and/or concrete shall be obtained from the Agency Representative. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 10 D. Assemblies: 1. Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In absence of detailed drawings or Specifications pertaining to specific items required to complete work, perform such work in accordance with best standard practice with prior approval of Agency Representative. 2. PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, and moisture before installation. Installation and solvent welding methods shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. 3. On PVC to metal connections, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first. Teflon tape or approved equal, shall be used on all threaded PVC to PVC, and on all threaded PVC to metal joints. Light wrench pressure is all that is required. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adaptors into which the pipe may be welded. E. Line Clearance: 1. All lines shall have minimum clearance of six (6) inches from each other and from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. F. Automatic Controller Assembly: Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Electric control valves shall be connected to controller in numerical sequence as shown on the Drawings. G. Electric Control Valves: 1. Install each electric control valve in a separate valve box. 2. Install where shown on the Drawings. Where grouped together, allow at least twelve (6) inches between adjacent valve boxes. 3. Each valve number shall be heat branded on the valve box lid with 2” tall letters. Branding unit available from Hydroscape Products, Inc., phone number (714) 639-l 850 or (619) 560-6611. H. Flushing of System: 1. After all new sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, all necessary diversion work has been completed, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, the control valves shall be opened and full head of water used to flush out the system. 2. Sprinkler heads shall be installed only after flushing of the system has been accomplished to the complete satisfaction of the Agency Representative. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 11 I. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Install the sprinkler heads as designated on the Drawings. 2. If a conflict arises between the sprinkler head layout and actual field conditions, this conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Agency Representative prior to proceeding with installation of the sprinkler heads. Minor modifications in sprinkler layout shall be made at no cost to the owner. 3 Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on the Drawings. 4. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade of the area to be irrigated unless otherwise designated on the plans. 3.04 TEMPORARY REPAIRS The Agency Representative’reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to - keep the irrigation system equipment in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the Agency Representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as herein specified. 3.05 EXISTING TREES Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, the Contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation in areas where two (2) inch and larger roots occur shall be done by hand. All roots two (2) inches and larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a ditching machine is run close to trees having roots smaller than two (2) inches in diameter, the wall of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through. Roots one (1) inch and larger in diameter shall be painted with two coats of tree seal, or equal. Trenches adjacent to tree should be closed within twenty-four (24) hours; and where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded with burlap or canvas. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adjustment of the System: 1. The Contractor shall flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings. 2. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and more adequate coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments prior to planting. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes and degrees of arc as required. These adjustments shall be made at no cost to the owner. 3. Lowering raised sprinkler heads by the Contractor shall be accomplished within two (2) days after notification by the Agency Representative. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 12 4. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise designated on the Drawings. B. Testing of the Irrigation System: 1. The Contractor shall request the presence of the Agency Representative in writing at least 48 hours in advance of testing. 2. Test all pressure lines under hydraulic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. Note: Testing of pressure main lines shall occur prior to installation of the electric control valves. 3. All piping under paved areas shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch and proven watertight prior to paving. 4. Sustain pressure in lines for not less than two (2) hours. If leaks develop, replace joints and repeat test until entire system is proven watertight. 5. All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Agency Representative. No pipe shall be backfilled until it has been observed, tested, and approved in writing. 6. Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment. 7 When the irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test in the presence of the Agency Representative to determine if the water coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the Drawings, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the Drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Agency Representative. This test shall be accomplished before any ground cover is planted. 8. Upon completion of each phase of work, the entire system shall be tested and adjusted to meet site requirements. 3.07 MAINTENANCE: The entire irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for a period of serve (7) days prior to planting unless the period is waived in writing by the Agency Representative. 3.08 CLEAN-UP Cleanup shall be made as each portion of work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site. All walks and paving shall be broomed or washed down, and any damage occurring to the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 13 A. The Contractor shall operate each system in its entirety for the Agency Representative at time of final observation. Any items deemed not acceptable by the Agency Representative shall be reworked to the complete satisfaction of the Agency Representative. B. All accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required must be supplied to the Agency Representative before final site observation can occur. 3.10 SITE OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Agency Representative in advance for the following observation meetings, according to the time indicated: 1. Pre-Job Conference 7 days 2. Pressure supply line installation and testing 48 hours 3. Automatic controller installation 48 hours 4. Control wire installation 48 hours 5. Lateral line and sprinkler installation 48 hours 6. Coverage test 48 hours 7. Final site observation 7 days B. No site observations will wmmence without record drawings. In the event the Contractor calls for a site visit without record drawings, without completing previously noted corrections, or without preparing the system for said visit, he shall be responsible for reimbursing the Agency Representative at his current hourly billing rate, portal to portal (plus transportation costs), for the inconvenience. No further site observations will be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received. IRRIGATION 0281 O-CL 14 SITE FURNISHINGS: PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Special Conditions shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. B. C. D. E. F. Chairs Pots Drinking Fountain Litter Containers Tables-ADD ALTERNATE 1 (“Schedule A”) Benches-ADD ALTERNATE 1 (“Schedule A”) 1.03 RELATED SECTION Irrigation - Section 02810 Concrete 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWPA - LP-20 B. WWPA C. CLMA 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers published product information, catalogs, and installation instructions to Agency Representative for review and approval.. B. Submit small samples of material finishes where options are available, and no selection has been specified. C. Submit complete shop drawings, layout indicating installation details and accessories. SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS - CL 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Site furnishings shall conform to UBC-91; and general safety standards designed to assure public safety, B. Wood and metal surfaces are to be free of splinters, sharp edges, protrusions, and loose objects. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All site furnishings per manufacturer specifications. 2.03 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT A. Chairs Quantity: Four (4) Type : Windsor Range Arm Chair Materials: Teak Wood Size: 28.5” (top width) 16” seat height Model No. #K5802 (37 Ilbs.) Manufacturer/Supplier: Smith & Hawken Hanger No. 4 Hamilton Landing Novato, CA, 94949 Phone: 415-506-3888 B. Tables Quantity. Two (2) Type. Sussex 36” Table Materials. Teak Wood Size. . . . . . . 36” diameter.. .27.5” high Model No. ..#K613505 (53 Ibs.) Manufacturer/Supplier (same as chairs above) C. Pots Quantity: Four (4) Type: Round Precast Materials: Pre Cast Concrete Weight: 1055 Ibs. each Model No: P3630 RM Size: 36” Dia. X 30” Color: A-03-Sand SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS - CL 2 C. Pots (cont.) Note: When ordering confirm w/supplier that pots are drilled @ bottom to accommodate irrigation requirements. See Spec 02810 Manufacturer/Local Supplier: Precast Concrete 9702 Prospect Avenue Santee, CA 92071 Phone: 619-449-681 ODrinking Fountain D. Drinking Fountain Quantity: One (1) Type: Barrier Free Pedestal Mounted Steel Drinking Fountain Model: 3380 - Includes satin finish stainless steel receptor, heavy gauge steel pedestal w/access plates and vandal resistant screws, push button valve and %” NPT screwdriver stop. Color/Finish: Color shall be green to match book drop boxes. Submit color sample and finish to Owner Representative for approval. Manufacturer/Supplier: Haws .I435 Fourth Street P.O. Box 1999 Berkeley, CA 94710 Phone: 510-525-5801 Installation: See Detail Sheet attached at end of this section of specifications. D. Litter Receptacle: - (Base Bid) Quantity: Two (2) Type: Round, Precast Concrete Materials: Precast Concrete Model No.: #TR20RM ColorIFinish: A-03-Sand Manufacturer/Supplier: Pre Cast Concrete 9702 Prospect Avenue Santee, CA 92071 Phone: 619-449-6810 E. Litter Receptacle-ADD ALTERNATE 1 (“Schedule A”) Quantity: One (1) Type: Perforated Steel Materials: Body: 14 gauge perforated steel Frame: l/4” x 2” . 3/8” x 2” and l/4” x 1 l/2” steel bar Reveal Strip: 1/4”x5” steel bar Liner: 32 gallon plastic Top: Polyethylene with vinyl-coated cable Color/Finish: Seafoam, Polyester powder coat SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS - CL 3 E. Litter Receptacles (cont.) Model No.: 89-30 32 gallon, all steel 145 Ibs. Manufacturer/Supplier: Du Mor Inc. Site Furnishings P.O. Box 142 Mifflintown, PA 17059-0142 Phone: I-800-598-401 8 Local Supplier F. Tables - ADD ALTERNATE 1 (“Schedule A”) Quantity: Two (Models differ se model no’s.) Type: 42” Diameter steel top w/perforated metal seats Materials: Table Top: 10 gauge steel Seats: 10 gauge steel supports: 2” Sch. 40 Steel pipe, l/2” x 2” steel bar and 3/8” x 2 “/?” steel bar. Fasteners: Stainless Steel Color/Finish: Seafoam, Polyester powder finish Model No’s.: One (1) 101-4 (4 seats) and One (1) 101-3 (3 seats, ADA accessible) Manufacturer/Supplier: Du Mor Inc. Site Furnishings P.O. Box 142 Mifflintown, PA 17059-o 142 Phone: 1-800-5984018 Local Supplier G. Benches - ADD ALTERNATE 1 (“Schedule A”) Quantity: Two (2) Type: 6’ Perforated Metal Materials: Seating Surface: 10 gauge perforated steel Supports & End Straps: l/2” x 3” steel bar Fasteners: Stainless Steel Finish: Seafoam, Polyester powder finish Model No.: 104-60 Manufacturer/Supplier: Du Mor Inc. Site Furnishings P.O. Box 142 Mifflintown, PA 17059-0142 Phone: l-800-598401 8 Local Supplier PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate soil preparation and paving with other trades. SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS - CL 4 B. Inspect surfaces and conditions that will effect equipment and its function. C. Acceptance of surfaces and conditions will be assumed if work of Section is commenced. D. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s published, printed recommendations and instructions, and reviewed shop drawings. B. Inspect all equipment for sharp edges, burrs, splinters, and harmful . projections. C. Verify existing drinking fountain drain size and that retrofit for new drinking fountain will be fully operational upon completion of drinking fountain installation. D. Provide lcubic foot concrete footing (top buried 2” below finish grade) and 36” long galvanized steel chain (l/4” size) per seat and table, for securing chairs and tables in seating area (east of Library). Secure chain to concrete footing with U bolt embedded in footing. Install eye bolt in each table and chair (location to be approved by agency representative) for securing chain. City shall supply locks to secure chain to eye bolts. SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS - CL 5 ro-,‘I-oc; ,:~~pY;cI’usuIa c tY clerk ;7ec TZC aOIl c I. - Barrier Free Pedesta/ Mounted Steel Drinking Fountain I I l-5/l6' 33mm 1 ALLOW 8’ [203mml CF S-ACK ‘N SUPPLY LINE FOk STRAWR AND VAiiVE MAINTENANCE. S-RAINER (SlJPPLlED) ScREWDfirVER SKP a 3/e- 0.0. SUPPLY (I3 SCRWDRIVER S7 DUWNG wswunm of THIS FOUNTAIN. MAKE SURE SU?=LY JNE AND IJKE FROM VALVE TO Bi)BELER SLACK FO? F##i%-%r’%MkwA:~iX’ l/2”-UNC ANCHORS Model3380 - l435FmDmsnamP.o.mlsw &twey.~wlo Phom (510) SSSm = FAX SlB12 $&l#$d ozB70-c~ 6 019s 0 106 10-m 3-oc; I:“pu;L,‘HsuIa ; fY c er* ;7sc 75c 6911 c 2 - IANDSCAPE UNIT MASONRYISTONE PART1 GENERAL l-01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A TheGeneralConditions,andSpecialCond&msafeapaftofthissection andtheCorrbadforthisworkandapply~othissectionasfu1~ssif repeated herein. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A Thismwtrindudesallsetvic45s,labor,mterials,~and equipment necessarytoperbrminstallationofbridsandRagstonemwkas shownandnotedon~drawingsand/orspedfiedhereinindud~the following: Concrete 8lock Reinforcing and Dcweiii GmJting Stone Walls Brick wans Concrete Pavers Flagstone Pavers 1.03 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS Earthwork and Grading Concrete SUBMllTALS SAMPLES Provide Agency Representative with samples of the folkwing materials and receive approval prior to delivery. :: Concmte Block stone for walls 3. concfetePavefs 4. Brick for wails 5. Flagstone for Paving UNIT MASONRY/STONE SECTION - CL 04200 1 *o--I T-oc ; ,:~rpy;~,-Iswau :, ts C!Ot-h ;Tcuz :2c 0917 t j. - PART 2 2.01 A B. C. D. E. F. G. AGGREGATES: H. I. J. MATERIALS CONCRETE BLOCK - Concrete block as manufachrred by General ConcretePmductsorappmvedequal. Co&ormtoASTMC-9O,GradeM- l,ho!kw,&uctwal,loadbearingunite. Sizeasindiiondmwkqgs. STONE FOR WALLS AND PAVfNG - Stone for walls shall be such as supplied by SW Boulder & stone, 31405 old Hiihway 395. Escondw, CA 92026 - Phone 1-600-640-1147, and shall be type &erred to as a Cameron Fkgstone’. Thii for wall stone and paving shall be tW - 2% -. BRICK FOR PAVER HEADERS - BrM for paver headers shall be as manufactured by Pacific Clay Brick Pmduds and di&iMted by RCP Bkdc & Brick, Inc. l-600-794-4727. Type shall be x766 Calif. Paver, c&r shall be Medium Iron Spot or approved equal. BRICK FOR PAVER DRAINAGE - Bride for paver drainage shall be as manufactured by Pacific Clay Brick Products and distributed by RCP Bkxzk 8 Brick, Inc. l-800-794-4727. Type shall be #712 (solii, wire cut), c&r shall be Medium Iron Spot or approved equal. CEMENT - Conform to ASTM C-150, Type I or Type II, law alkali. Use only one brand. Masonry cement shall not be used. HYDRATED LIME - Conform to ASTM C-207, Type S and containing 85% by weight calcium oxide. Sand: Consist of fine granular material, composed of hard, strong, durable mineral p&ides, free from injurious amounts of saline. alkaline, organic or other deleterious substances. Conform to ASTM C-144. Pee Gravel: Graded with no more than fwe percent (5%) passing the No. 8 sieve and with 100% passing the 3l8’ sieve. Conform to ASTM C4M. WATER-Clean; from source intended for domes& use. ADMIXlURES - Sika Chemical Red Label Suconem formortarandGtwt Aid for grout. REINFORCEMENT STEEL - New, tested material of domestic manufacture confwming to ASTM A415 UNIT MASONRY/STONE SECTlON - CL 04200 2 .o--I'-oc; tr2'w;:a'ISU*S L ZY CIerh ;ZIC :ic 69,- c 4 7 K L. M. N. EXPANSION OR CONTROL JOINT FILLER STRIPS - Synthek, rubber, resistant to oils and solvents and compatible with spedfies sealants. conformtoAsTMc-5o9. ANCHOR TIES AND JOlNT REINFORCEMENTS - Galvanii iron or stainless&eel. Sheetm&altiesnot&sslhan22gaugeandatleastane inch (13 wide, bent for anchoring into ~watlandde#ormedinthe masonry to n3ceive mortar joint reinforr#ment Wiretiesandrnoftarjoint reinforcement9gaugewiretiesloopedforfasteniitoconcmteandfcw receiving joint reinforcement. Conform to U.B.C. standard No. 30-q. MORTAR AND GROUT Conform to ASTM C476. Mortar and grout not used within thirty (30) minutes &f&r leaving mixer shall nut be permitted on the wodc. 1. 2. Mortar: Type S conforming to U.B.C. Table 24-A Grout Composed (by volume), of one (1) part Portland cement, three (3) parts mortar sand, two (2) parts pea giavel to which add one(1)pint0fadm~ktureforeachsackofcement. Miiasrequimd for mortar, except adjust the amount of water to make‘s creamy flow that will not allow the gravel to segregate. Properly puddle the grout to fill voids. Omit gravel for grout spaces less than two inches (23 clear in horizontal dimension. 3. Vertical Bars: Continuous from bottom of cell to top of wall, centered in celb, except where otkwise indicated. Where necessary, hold vertical steel in place by frames or otk suitable devices as approved. 4. Horizontal Bars: VVwe temporarily above exact position and tag b indicate correct location. Use calibrated vertical makers to indii correct location. Provide horizontal ban where indikated, held in contact to vertical bars or dowels. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE - Elastomeric system (T/ken 201’ or Sonnebom HLM WOO”),60 mil. UNlT MASONRY&TONE SECTION - CL 04200 3 30-IT-oc; ,:atp&f;er- IIUIU L t3 caerh. ;TC)cz 72c es,-- - 5 : PART 3 3.M A B. C. ExEcunoN: iNsTAuATloN PROTECTION Storeconaetemasonryunits,BrkkandFlagstwe,wdercoversthatwill pennil cifculalion of air and pmvent exessive moistuneabsorption. Store oementand~iinwaWightshedswith~fbors. SURFACE PREPARATION 1. Masonry Units: Thoroughly dean of dust, grease, oil or other matterlhatwouldreducebond. 2. Welting: Protect cancrete masonry unik against wtting before installation. 3. Reinforcement: Clean of mill scale, loose rust, oil and coatings, whii would reduce bond. secumly anchor in place. UNlT MASONRY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Preserve unobstructed vertical continuity of cells to be filled. Fuliy bedwebsand crosswalk forming such cells in mortar to pwent bkage of grout. Fractional parts of masonry units are pmhibii where whole units can be used. The chinking of inten&es with fragments will not be allowed. Provide special units as necessary to form openings and lintels. Fill all cells of masonry so indicates solidly with grout in lifts not exceeding four-feet (4’) in height Except at the final course, stop grout onehatf (l/2) the course height below the top of the last coursegmuted. Whereitisabsolutely -v*for~-wrposes,to~ off longitudinal runs of masonry, stop ofF only by racking back one- half (l/2) unit length in each course. Toothing will not be permitted. At openings for ducts, pipes and conduits built into masonry walls. cut to form fractional units with an abrasive saw. Unless otherwise indii, lay blodr in regular running bond with 3Wjoints. UNIT MASONRY/STONE SECTION - CL 04200 4 '0-17-oc; I:3’w;;*~lbuaa c,t,' c IYCbk ;3ec ‘;zc 6917 c 6. - 7. Mixing: All rseamWm mat&As and sand shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixef for a minimum of fiva (5) minutes. 1. Theamsistencycifmortarmaybaadjusl!sdtothesatSsfaction ofthamason,butinkee@ngwlthstmngthrequirements. tf the mortar begins to stiffen, r+tampar immediately by adding watew. and re-mix the mortar. All mortar shall be usad within one-half (l/2) hour of the initial mixing. It shali not be used afbrithasbeguntoset 2. The con- of grout shall be such that, at times of placement, it has a siump of tin&n& (m to ten-inch (101 as determined by ASTM C-143. 8. Verticalbarsshallbe~inpositionsat~andbattomandat intervabnottoexceed192diametwsofthereinfocement. 9. Whenafoundatiandoweld~notlineupwiththeverticalcoreto bereinforced,itshallnatbebentover,but~ll egroutedintoa cora in direct vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent call to the vertical wall reinforcing 10. Vertical cells shall have vertical alii wffcknt to maintain a clear unobsbudied continuous vertical a3ll measuring not less than two-inches (23 by three-inches (33. 11. Clean-&t openings shall be provided at the bottoms of all cells to be filled at each lii or pour of grout where sure iii or pour of grout is in excess of four inches (47 in heiiht. Remove overtwnging mortar or other obstruction or debris from the inside of the cell walls. Seal the clean-outs befom groulhg, after inspection. 12. When the grouting is stopped for one (1) hour or longer, form horizontal construction joints by stopping the pour of grout one-hatf course bebw the next mortar joint above. 13. When the possibilii of rain occurs, cover the tops of all walls exposed to weather, and all amcrate masonry units with sheets of polyethylene film, or other approved effective forms of protection, to prevent absorption of mer. Store masonry units above the grout if the possibility of surface flooding exists. UNIT MASONRY/STONE SECTION - CL 04200 5 70-1 7-oc; ,r3.w;~~*~~UM L.tY Clerk ; lzac 72c 69,’ c 7;. - D. JOINTS 1. Mortar joints in masonry surfaces shall be finished as approved by AgencyReprcsenWivewithapoiMingtodmakingsolid,smooth, watertight joints. Agenq Rapresentativa may seled any joint treatm8ntwilhoutaddingtothecostofthewodc. 2. FkgstonapavingshaUbeamtinuouswithinthelimiiofthe mspectb symbol shcmn on the plans. Joints on flagstone paving shall have the f0lluwing wwances: a. HofiuuW-Ihewidtbofthejointsshallbebetwaenl%~and 1 %wwidewithW%bainglassthan.l’wide. b. Vertical-ThediialbeWaenthefiniieMrationofthe f@stone and mortw shall not exceed l/l6 ,. 3. ~joinEstbtwillbebdmffinishgfadeshdlbetodedfl~~ withthebkk. E. BOLTS, ANCHORS AND REGLETS 1. Set bolts, anchors, reglats and inserts necessq for the attadmsnt of subsequent work and items furnished under other sections. F. CURING 1. After the wall is constructed, it shall not be saturated with watar for curing or any other purposes. 4. In windy areas and where the atmosphere is dry, the waft shall have Its surface damped with a light fog spray during a curing period for the mwtar of three (3) days. Frequency to be detwmined by drying conditions. 3.02 FlELDQuAlmcoNmoL A. INSPECTIONS: 1. %: Reinforcing prior to grouting. Grout jointing and color. Provide 10’ x 10’ sample area of flagstone paving for owner approval prior ta proceeding with entire paving areas. UNIT MASONRY/STONE SECTlON - CL 04200 6 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS’ TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SECTION 203 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE. 203-6.2 Materials. Add the following: Asphalt concrete shall be class C2-AR 4000 for surface course, and B-AR 4000 for base course. 203-6.6.1, Batch Plant Method, modify as follows: Third paragraph, last sentence, delete “and from the Engineer’s field laboratory”. Last paragraph, add after D 2172: “method A or B.” 203-6.7 Asphalt Concrete Storage. add the following: Open graded asphalt concrete stored in excess of 2 hours, and any other asphalt concrete stored in excess of 18 hours, shall not be used in the work. Add the following section: 203-I 1 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CRACK SEALANTS 203-l 1 .I Elastomeric Sealant. Elastomeric sealant shall be a polyurethane material of a composition that will, within its stated shelf life, cure .only in the presence of moisture. No elastomeric sealant shall be incorporated into any portion of the work that is beyond the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer. No elastomeric sealant shall be incorporated into any portion of the work that has been stored under conditions not recommended by its manufacturer. Sealant shall be suitable for use in both asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete. The cured sealant shall have the performance characteristics in Table 203-l 1 (A). 071Q7iOQ5:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 1 of 12 TABLE 203-l 1.1(A) ELASTOMERIC SEALANT CHARACTERISTICS Property Hardness (indentation) Tensile Strength Elongation Flex at -40°C Weathering Resistance Salt-Spray Resistance Dielectric Constant Measuring Standard (ASTM Designation) ASTM D 2240 Rex. Type A, Model 1700 ASTM D 412 Die C, 65 - 85 3.45 MPa, minimum ASTM D 412 Die C, 400%, minimum 0.6 mm (25 mil) Free Film Bend (180”) ASTM D 822 Weatherometer 350 h ASTM B 117 28 days at 38°C No cracks Slight chalking ASTM D 150 3.45 MPa, minimum tensile; 400% minimum Elongation Less than 25% change Conditions 25°C @ 50% relative humidity pulled at 508 mm (20”) per minute pulled at 508 mm (20“) per minute over 13 mm ( 1/2”) Mandrel Cured 7 days at 25°C @ 50% relative humidity 5% NaCI, Die C, pulled at 508 mm (20”) per minute over a temperature range of -3ODC to 5onc SECTION 204 - LUMBER AND TREATMENT WITH PRESERVATIVES 204-l LUMBER AND PLYWOOD TABLE 204-I .2(A) add the following: TABLE 204-l .2(A) USES GRADES Headers for bituminous pavement up to 50 mm x Construction grade Redwood or preservative 100 mm (2”x4”) treated construction grade Douglas Fir Headers for bituminous pavement larger than 50 Number 1 grade Redwood, or preservative mm x 100 mm (2”x4”) treated number 1 grade Douglas Fir SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 21 O-l PAINT. 210-1.6 Paint for Traffic Striping, Pavement Marking, and Curb Marking. Modify as follows: Paint for traffic lane lines, turn pocket lines, edge lines, channelizing lines, bike lane lines, chevrons, and curbs shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to CALTRANS Specification No. 8010-91 D-30. Paint for pavement legends, pavement symbols, pavement arrows, cross walks, parking stall markings and stop bars shall be alkyd thermoplastic conforming to CALTRANS Specification No. 801 O-21 C-l 9. Glass beads shall be applied to the surface of the rapid dry water borne paint and the molten thermoplastic material and shall conform to the requirements of CALTRANS Specification No. 8010-2lC-22 (Type II). CALTRANS Specifications for water borne paint, thermoplastic material and glass beads may be obtained from the CALTRANS Transportation Laboratory, P.O. Box 19128, Sacramento, CA 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 2 of 12 95819, telephone number (916) 227-7000. Add the following section. 21 O-l .8 Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Markings. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Markings shall be Premark brand manufactured by Flint Trading Company 115 Todd Court, Thomasville, NC 27360, Premark 20120 Flex brand manufactured by Flint Trading Company 115 Todd Court, Thomasville, NC 27360, Pavemark brand manufactured by Stimsonite Corporation, 6565 West Howard Street, Niles, IL 60714 or approved equal. SECTION 212 - LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION MATERIALS 212-I LANDSCAPE MATERIALS. 212-l .2.3 Commercial Fertilizer. add the following: Preplant fertilizer shall be granular commercial fertilizer 7-7-7 or approved equal. Postplant fertilizer shall be 12-4-6 or approved equal with Ca, Fe, Zn, and Mn and with the majority of nitrogen in nonammoniac form to prevent acidification of soil. Planting tablets shall be compressed fertilizer tablets with a 20-10-5 analysis. Hydroseed fertilizer shall be long-lasting, controlled-release, plastic-coated, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application with approved equipment, and shall contain the minimum available percentages of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash and sulfur required by tables 212-l .2.5.1 (A) through 212-1-2-5-3(A). 212-1.2.4 Organic Soil Amendment. Add the following: For all types of Organic Soil Amendment mulch materials produced from pine trees grown in Alameda, Monterey, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz or San Mateo Counties shall not be used in the Work. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall conform to the requirements for type 1 Organic Soil Amendment except as modified hereinafter. Type IA Organic Soil Amendment shall be a wood or rice residual product derived from the bark of pine, white fir, or red fir or cedar or redwood shavings or rice hulls. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall be manufactured from clean wood, free from clods coarse objects and rocks and shall conform to the properties shown in Table 212- 1.2.4(B): Dry Weight Nitrogen Table 212-I .2.4(B) SOIL AMENDMENT PROPERTIES Property Minimum (1) Maximum (1) Dry Weight Passing 25 mm (1”) Sieve Drv Weiaht Passina #I4 Sieve Dry Weight Passing #16 Sieve 45% 65% Dry Weight Passing #30 Sieve 30% 40% Dry Weight Passing #50 Sieve 0% 10% Drv Weiaht Passina #lOO Sieve 0% 2% Salinity (1) (1) Iron ( Dilute acid soluble on dry weight basis) 0.08% - Ash (dry weight basis) 0% 6.0% PH 6.0 7.0 Wettability (1) (1) (1) (As Required by Table 212-1.2.4(A) SSPWC) 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 3 of 12 For all types of Organic Soil Amendment the Contractor shall supply the Engineer a sample of the proposed amendment accompanied by an analytical analysis from a qualified agricultural laboratory certifying compliance to the requirements herein. Qualified agricuttural laboratories shall have an on-going quality assurance program that fulfills the requirements of the most recent version of the “Western States Laboratory Proficiency Testing Program Soil and Plant Analytical Methods”. Certificates of compliance shall contain a statement attesting that the organic soil amendment meets the requirements of these specifications and that the testing agricultural laboratory does fulfil1 the requirements of “Western States Laboratory Proficiency Testing Program Soil and Plant Analytical Methods”. Said submittal shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3. 212-1.2.5 Mulch for Hydraulic Method Seed Lawn Planting. Add the following: The terms Hydroseeding and Hydroseed shall be synonymous with Hydraulic for the purposes of Section 212. Disturbed Areas, Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub and Upland Transition Zone planting areas shall be mulched, fertilized and seeded using method B. Mulch shall be manufactured from virgin wood cellulose fiber mulch and shall not contain growth or germination inhibitors. When mixed with water, the mulch shall remain in uniform suspension and when blended with the seed, fertilizer, and other approved additives, shall form a homogeneous slurry. When applied, the fibers shall form a moisture absorbing membrane with adequate percolation properties sufficient to allow one hundred percent of water applied at the rate of 3.1 liters per minute per square meter (0.075 gallons per minute per square foot) onto a surface inclined at a 2:l (horizontal: vertical) slope to pass through the membrane. A non- phyto-toxic wetting agent shall be added to the slurry .mixture. A water soluble, non-toxic green dye shall be added in sufficient quantity to clearly delineate the planted areas. When required, binder shall be added to the slurry mixture and shall be “CPA 4000”, “AZTAC”, “Ecology Control”, “M-Binder”, or approved equal. Add the following section: 212-1.2.5.1 Disturbed Area Mulch Fertilizer and Additives. In addition to the seed mix shown in the table for Disturbed Areas the slurry mixture shall be applied at the rates shown in Table 212-l .2.5.1 (A) Table 212-l .2.5.1(A) DISTURBED AREA MULCH FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES Component I Applicat on Rate r I (Pounds Der acre) grams per sq. mete . ,, Virgin Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 225 (2dOO) -’ Binder (1) 7 (60) Fertilizer (16-20-o) Ammonium 35 (300) Phosphate Sulfate, Plus 15% Soil Sulfur I . , Wetting Agent Per Mfg. Recommendation Green Colorant Per Mfg. Recommendation (1) Required to be incorporated only when applied between the months of Nov. through Feb. NOTES TO THE PROJECT ENGINEER FOR SECTIONS 212-1.2.5.2 & 212-I ,253 The use of alternative hydroseed mixtures for creation and/or restoration of environmental resources is becoming a frequent need. The following sections and some preceding references provide an example of such planting. If a consultant does not provide this type of data for planting the project manager should require it. If alternative hydroseed mixtures are not required for a project remove the sections and references to them. (REMOVE THIS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATION3t 07l07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 4 of 12 Add the following section: 212-1.2.5.2 Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub Area Mulch Fertilizer and Additives. In addition to the seed mix shown in the table for Southern willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub Areas the slurry mixture shall be applied at the rates shown in Table 212- 1.2.5.2(A) (WHEN APPROPRIATE REMOVE THIS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) Table 212-i .2.5.2(A) SOUTHERN WILLOW SCRUB AND RIPARIAN SCRUB AREA MULCH FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES Component Applicat on Rate grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) Virgin Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 225 (2000) Binder (1) 7 030) Fertilizer (38-O-O) Urea Formaldehyde 6 (50) Fertilizer (0-45-O) Triple Super Phosphate, Plus 15% 30 (250) Soil Sulfur Wetting Agent Per Mfg. Recommendation Green Colorant Per Mfg. Recommendation ’ (Required to be incorporated only when applied between the months of Nov. through Feb.) i:“r-iEh A=‘DROPRlkTE REid9Vf THIS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) Add the following section: 212-1.2.5.3 Riparian Scrub and Upland Transition Zone Area Mulch Fertilizer and Additives. In addition to the seed mix shown in the table for Riparian Scrub and Upland Transition Zone Areas the slurry mixture shall be applied at the rates shown in Table 212- 1.2.5.3(A) (WHEN APPROPRIATE REhlOVf TdlS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) Table 212-l .2.5.3(A) RIPARIAN SCRUB AND UPLAND TRANSITION ZONE AREA MULCH FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES Component Applicat on Rate grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) Virgin Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 225 (2000) Stabilizing Emulsion (1) 7 030) Fertilizer (38-O-O) Urea Formaldehyde 6 (50) Fertilizer (0-45-O) Triple Super 11 WO) Phosphate, Plus 15% Soil Sulfur Wetting Agent Per Mfg. Recommendation Green Colorant Per Mfg. Recommendation : 1 ! (Required to be incorporated only when applied between the months of Nov. through Feb.) iWHfN A?PROPRIPTE 3fMDL’E THIS TES’ .T BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) Add the following section: 212-1.2.6 Herbicides and Pesticides. Shall be used in their appropriate applications with strict adherence to manufacturer’s specifications and instructions. Postemergent herbicide for all areas shall be Glyphosate, N-(phosphonomethyl) glycine, in the form of its isopropylamine salt such as Roundup Pro, Diquat, Montar, or approved equal. Preemergent herbicide for shrubs and groundcover areas planted from flats shall be Treflan, Surflan, Eptan, or approved equal. Add the following section: 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 5 of 12 212-l .2.7 General Soil Conditioners. Agricultural-grade gypsum shall’ be a calcium sulfate (CaSO, H20) product - 94.3 percent. 90 percent shall pass a 50-mesh screen. Control of dust during application is mandatory. Iron Sulfate shall be ferrous sulfate in pelletized or granular form containing not less than 20.0 percent iron expressed as metallic iron. Iron Sulfate pellets shall be of size and gradation such that 98 percent is retained on a lo-mesh screen. Add the following section: 212-I .2.7 Stabilizing Emulsion. Stabilizing emulsion shall ‘be a concentrated liquid chemical that forms a plastic film upon drying and allows water and air to penetrate. The film shall be nonflammable and-shall have an effective life of at least one year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be nontoxic to plant and animal life and nonthinking to concrete or painted surfaces. In the cured state the stabilizing emulsion shall not be re-emulsifiable. The material shall be registered with, and licensed by the California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an “auxiliary soil chemical”. Stabilizing emulsion shall be miscible with water at time of mixing and application. 212-1.3 Seed. Add following: The quantity of pure live seed supplied shall meet or exceed the quantity shown in the specified mixes. Seed shall not contain more than 0.5 percent weed seed by volume Seed types shall be as specified on the plans and planting legends, and shall be applied at the rates indicated. All brand-name, patented seed must be received by Contractor in original manufacturer’s bag. Seed shall be received by Contractor in separate containers specifying kind, quantity, purity, and germination. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with each seed bag label used in the Work. Add the following section: 212-1.3.1 Seed for Disturbed Areas. Hydroseeding mix for Disturbed Areas (all areas excepting Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub and Upland Transition Zone seeded areas) (REFAOVE Tri!S TEXT 2EFORE P2l:iTi~;G THE SPECIFICGT iotis)shall consist of no less than the seed varieties shown in Table 212-l .3(A). Table 212-1.3.1(A) SEED FOR DISTURBED AREAS Seed Variety Applicat on Rate grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) Rose Clover 2.5 20 (” Festuca Megalura, Zorro Fescue 2.5 20 Eschscholzia Californica 0.35 3 Achilles Millefolia 0.45 4 Alyssum (Carpet Of Snow) 0.35 3 Dimorpholeca 0.25 2 (1) Rose Clover shall be inoculated with a nitrogen fixing bacteria and be applied dry either by drilling or broadcasting immediately before hydraulic application of the remaining seed mix and mulch. Add the following section: 212-1.3.2 Seed for Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub Areas. Hydroseeding mix for the Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub area shall consist of no less than the seed varieties shown in Table 212-1.3.2(A). 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 6 of 12 Table 212-l .3.2(A) SEED FOR SOUTHERN WILLOW SCRUB AND RIPARIAN SCRUB AREAS Seed Variety Applicat on Rate grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) Ambrosia Psilostachya 0.35 3 Artemesia Douglasiana 0.35 3 Artemesia Dracunculus 0.25 2 Atriplex Patula SSP, Hastata Halberd Leaf Saltbrush 0.25 2 Encelia Californica, California Sunflower 0.25 2 Festuca Megalura, Zorro Fescue 0.25 2 lsocoma Venetus, Coastal Goldenbrush 0.45 4 Leymus Condensatus, Giant Wild Rye 0.45 4 . Oenothera Hookerii, Hooker’s Primrose 0.10 1 Add the following section: 232-1.3.3 Seed for Riparian Scrub and Upland Transition Zone Areas. Hydroseeding mix for the Riparian Scrub and Upland Transition Zone area shall consist of not less than the seed varieties shown in Table 212-l .3.2(A). Table 212-l .3.3(A) SEED FOR RIPARIAN SCRUB AND UPLAND TRANSITION ZONE AREAS Seed Variety Applicat on Rate grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) Encelia Californica 0.45 4 Eschscholzia Californica. California PODDV 0.25 2 Festuca Megalura, Zorro Fescue ’ ’ * lsocoma Venetus, Coastal Goldenbrush Leymus Condensatus, Giant Wild Rye Lotus Scoparius, Deerweed Lupinus Succulentus, Arroyo Lupine Phacelia Tanacetifolia 0.25 2 0.45 4 0.45 4 0.45 4 0.35 3 0.25 2 212-1.4.1 General. Add the following: Plants shall be the variety and size shown on the plans or in the special provisions and shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours before each plant delivery so that the Engineer can inspect the plants. The scientific and common names of plants herein specified shall conform to the approved names given in “A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington” published by the University of California, Division of Agriculture Sciences, Publication 4091 (1979). Each group of plant materials delivered on site shall be labeled clearly as to species and variety. All patented plants (cultivars) required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent attached. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are to be planted. Evidence that clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer. All plants furnished by the Contractor shall be true to type or name as shown on the plans and shall be tagged identifying the plants by species or variety; however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the Engineer and the Engineer’s decision shall be final. Plants shall be individually tagged or tagged in groups by species or variety. Carpobrotus cuttings need not be tagged. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 7 of 12 certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants, and certificates shall be delivered to the Engineer. Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely, and well-rooted, and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well- grown, free from insect pests and disease, and shall be grown in nurseries which have been inspected by the State Department of Food and Agriculture and have complied with the regulations thereof. The Engineer is the sole judge as to acceptability of each plant. Vigorous, healthy, well-proportioned plants are the intent of this specification. Plants which are even moderately “overgrown”, or are showing signs of decline or lack of vigor, are subject to rejection. The size of the plants will be as shown on the plans. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Engineer, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, soil amendments shall be increased proportionately. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected, and immediately removed from the site and replaced with new plants by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. The Engineer reserves the right to change the species, variety, and/or sizes of plant material to be furnished, provided that the cost of such plant changes do not exceed the cost of plants in the original bid, and with the provision that the Contractor shall be notified in writing, at least 60 days before the planting operation has commenced. No plant shall be transported to the planting area that is not thoroughly wet throughout the ball of earth surrounding the roots. Any plant that, in the opinion of the Engineer, has a damaged root ball or is dry or in a wilted condition when delivered to the planting area will not be accepted, and shall be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. Each plant shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn. Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than 2 plants nor more than 2 percent of the total number of plants of each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than 2 plants of .each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Agency reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will not be paid for. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when plants are to be shipped to the project site. The notification shall be given not less than 10 days prior to the actual shipment date. Carpobrotus cuttings shall be 250 mm (10”) or more in length and shall not be rooted. Delosperma cuttings shall be 150 mm (6”) or more in length and shall not be rooted. Cuttings shall be tip cuttings from healthy, vigorous and strong-growing plants and shall be insect and disease free. Mature or brown-colored stem growths or cuttings which have been trimmed will not be accepted. Cuttings shall be planted not more than 2 days after cutting and shall not be allowed to dry or wither. Carpobrotus cuttings shall not be taken from any plants that indicate the presence of ice plant 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 6 of 12 scale (Pulvinaria species). The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the location where cuttings are to be taken at least 10 days prior to taking the cuttings and shall be responsible for all permit and inspection fees involved in obtaining cuttings. 212-I 5.3 Tree Stakes. Modify as follows: Tree stakes shall be 50mm (2”) diameter tuned lodgepole pine, pointed on their driven end. Add the following section: 212-l .8 Root Barriers. Root barriers shall be no less than lm (39”) in width. Root barriers shall be “Biobarrier”, as manufactured by Reemay, Inc., 70 Old Hickory Boulevard, Old Hickory, TN 97138, Phone 615-847-7000, no substitutes will be accepted. 212-2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS. 242-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use with Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fittings, add the following: Except as provided in this section, all buried piping in the irrigation system shall be installed with underground utility marking tape conforming to the requirements of section 207-21 and identifying it as reclaimed water. Intermittent pressure lines (lines on the downstream side of a controller valve that will not be subject to constant pressure) will not require underground utility marking tape. All PVC pipe used for irrigation systems shall be colored purple by the addition of a dye integral to the PVC. Painted pipe will not be accepted. Pressure mainline piping for sizes 50 mm (2”) and larger shall be PVC having a pressure rating of 2170 kPa (315 PSI), S.D.R. 13.5. Stenciled pipe is required for all irrigation system piping including portions not required to be marked with underground utility marking tape. All pipe shall have stenciling appearing on both sides of the pipe with the marking “Reclaimed Water” in 16 mm (‘&“) high letters repeated every 300 mm (12”). PVC non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC Schedule 40. Add the following section: 212-2.1.7 Brass Pipe and Fittings. Brass pipe shall be IPS standard weight 125 LB 85 percent copper and 15 percent zinc, trade designation seamless red brass pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM B43-91. Brass pipe fittings and connections shall be Standard 125 LB class 85 percent red brass fittings and connections. 212-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. Add the following: All valve boxes shall be marked “RCV”, “BV” or “QC”, “PB” respectively. Remote control valves shall be marked with station numbers embossed on the valve cover with a brass tag. (RCV boxes shall have locking covers.) Other boxes such as pull boxes, etc., shall be marked with appropriate identification. Add the following section: 212-2.2.8 Ball Valves. Ball valves shall have bottom-loaded pressure-retaining stems, glass- reinforced seats, and reinforced TFE stem packing seals. Valves sizes 13 mm (‘!!) to 50 mm (2”) shall be pressure rated at 4140 kPa (600 PSI) WOG and 1030 kPa (150-PSI) saturated steam. Each valve shall be tested, air under water, in the opened and closed position by the manufacturer. Ball valve must conform to Federal Specification WW-V-35B, Type II, Class A, Style 3, End Connection A or C. Add the following section: 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 9 of 12 212-2.2.9 Pressure Regulator Valve Pressure regulator valve shall be bronze body with screw fitting. Add the following section: 212-2.2.9 Wye Strainers. Wye strainers shall have a cast iron or all-bronze body with a removable stainless steel or monel strainer. Wye strainers shall be capable of withstanding a cold water working pressure of 1034 kPa (150 psi). Wye strainers at backflow preventer assemblies shall be equipped with a gate valve at the outlet. All other wye strainers shall be equipped with a garden valve at the outlet. The strainer screen for the wye strainer in a backflow preventer assembly shall have an open area equal to at least 3 times the cross-sectional area of the pipe based on an iron pipe size and shall be woven wire fabric with 850~urn mesh or perforated sheet with 1.14 mm (0.045”) diameter holes. All other wye strainers shall be equipped with 425pm strainer screens. 222-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment. Add the following: All sprinkler heads are to have factory built-in check valves or a check valve under each head. Drip assemblies shall meet the following requirements: The drip emitter shall be Pepco Quadra or Rainbird XERI-Bird-8 or approved equal as called on drawings, with four ports. Drip tubing for emitter outlets shall be Rainbird (RBT-160V), Salco, or approved equal. Drip tubing stakes shall be Rainbird No. RS-13, Salco, or approved equal. Bug cap for drip tubing shall be manufactured by Rainbird, Pepco, or approved equal. The drip pressure regulator shall be Rainbird, Netafim PVR, or approved equal. Drip emitter filter shall be Amiad, Rainbird, or approved equal. Drip emitter access boxes shall be Rainbird No. SEB-6X, Salco Subterranean Emitter Box, or approved equal. Check valves shall be of heavy-duty virgin PVC construction with FIP thread inlet and outlet. Internal parts shall be stainless steel and neoprene. Antidrain valves shall be field adjustable against drain out from 1.5 m to 12 m (5’ to 40’) of head. All sprinkler heads that are without valves in the heads are to have an antidrain valve feature and shall have an excess flow feature, which will automatically stop the flow of water when it exceeds the GPM preset by the manufacturer. Check valves shall be King Bros., Rainbird, or approved equal. 212-2.3 Backflow Preventer Assembly. Add the following: Backflow preventers shall be one of the approved reduced pressure principle devices listed by the California Department of Health Services, Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management, 601 North 7th Street, Mailing Station (MS) 92, P.O. Box 942732, Sacramento, CA 94234-7320. Backflow preventers shall be factory assembled and shall include 2 check valves, one pressure ’ differential relief valve, 2 shut-off valves and 4 test cocks. Backflow preventer and valves shall be the same size as the pipeline in which they are installed, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Backflow preventer shut-off valves shall be manufactured from iron or bronze and shall be either resilient wedged gate valves, resilient seated and fully ported ball valves, or resilient seated butterfly valves. Threaded type shut-off valves shall be provided with a union on one side of each valve. Unions shall be brass or malleable iron. Add the following section: 212-2.4.1 Additional Equipment. Contractor shall provide the following items to the Engineer: 1. Two control valve keys. 2. Two wrenches for removing each different type of sprinkler head. 3. Two quick coupler keys. The keys and hose ells shall be of the same manufacturer as 4. the coupling valve. 07/07mo5:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 10 of 12 5. Five keys for opening and locking each automatic controller and enclosure. Add the following section: 212-2.5 Flexible Hose.- Flexible hose shall be nonrigid polyvinyl chloride (nonrigid PVC) hose conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: D 2287, Cell-type 6464500. Wall thicknesses of nonrigid PVC hose shall conform to Table 212-2.5(A) when determined in accordance with ASTM Designation: D 2122. TABLE 212-2.5(A) FLEXIBLE HOSE Hose Size-Nominal Minimum Wall Thickness* (Millimeters) (Inches) (Millimeters) (Inches) 15 “h 3.73 0.147 20 “4 3.91 0.154 25 1 4.55 0.179 *as measured at any point on the cross section. Range (Percent) 12 12 12 The hose shall provide leak-free, non-separating connections suitable for the purpose intended when connected to the fittings specified herein. Fittings for flexible hose shall be injection molded PVC, Schedule 40, conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: D 2466. Fittings shall be solvent cemented type. Solvent cement for flexible hose and fittings shall be of commercial quality specifically manufactured for use with nonrigid PVC hose. Primer for flexible hose fittings shall be the same as specified for plastic pipe supply line fittings. 212-3 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS. 212-3.1 General. Add the following: All electrical materials shall conform to the requirements of the 1996 National Electrical Code. 212-3.2.2 Conductors. Add the following: Low voltage electric wiring running from controller to the automatic control valves shall be no smaller than No. 14 solid single conductor, copper wire, 0.015 mm (60 mil) insulation, 0.015 mm (60 mil) neoprene jacket, style UF (Direct Burial), or equal, color code wires to each valve. Neutral wires shall be white, no smaller than No. 12 solid single conductor wire, 0.015 mm (60 mil) insulation, 0.015 mm (60 mil) neoprene jacket, style UF (Direct Burial). 212-3.3 Controller Unit. Add the following: All controllers shall be grounded by one 19 mm (518”) diameter by 3 m (10’) long stainless steel grounding rod and a 50-ohm resistance lightning arrestor. Add the following section. 212-3.4 Irrigation Electrical Service Equipment and Enclosures. Electrical service equipment shall incorporate the following elements: 1. One loo-amp, 1201240~volt, single-phase load center, as approved by the Engineer; 2. One loo-amp rated commercial meter socket suitable for the San Diego Gas and Electric Company meter, with provision for test block bypass having a UL listing and EUSERC approval; 3. One 15-amp circuit breaker for each irrigation controller energized by the service; 4. One 20-amp circuit breaker for the duplex receptacle. 07/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 11 of 12 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. The design, assembly, grounding, wiring, and components of th’e irrigation electrical service equipment and enclosure shall meet the requirements of the 1996 edition of the National Electrical Code. Electrical service equipment shall be enclosed in a cabinet constructed entirely of l4-gage, or heavier, 304 stainless steel. The cabinet shall be of welded construction with a brushed finish; anchoring points shall be inside the enclosure. The cabinet shall be HYDROSAFE Model No. HS9, Strong Box, or approved equal. The cabinet shall have a 304 stainless steel interior bulkhead separating the 120/240-volt electrical service section from the irrigation controller section. No wood components shall be used in the enclosure. Each section of the cabinet shall have full front opening doors with piano hinges, integral keylock and hasp and staple, or other provision, for padlock. The cabinet shall be provided with cross-flow ventilation. Ventilation openings shall be located and designed to preclude rain, irrigation splash, vermin, and insects from entering the cabinet. The controller side door shall have provision for mounting control schematics without the use of adhesives or fasteners. The service side door shall have a clear acrylic plastic window to allow the electrical meter to be read. The cabinet shall have a duplex 15amp, 120-volt receptacle with ground fault interrupter protection mounted on the interior service side. Concrete footings and pads supporting the Electrical service equipment shall be 560-G 3250 and shall be no less than 150 mm (6’) thick. Anchor bolts to secure the service equipment to the concrete pad shall be 10 mm (36“) diameter by 150 mm (6”) long hot dip galvanized or stainless steel headed bolts with washers, without sleeves, conforming to section 304-I .7. Anchor bolts to secure the service equipment to the concrete pad shall be embedded in the concrete slab between 65 mm and 100 mm (2%” and 4”). 0?/07/005:49 PM Part 2 Standard Supplemental Provisions Page 12 of 12 TABLE OF COMNTS PART 3 Section 300 300-3 Section 301 Treated Soil, Subgrade Preparation And Placement Of Base Materials 301-I Subgrade Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NN Section 302 302-5 302-9 Section 303 303-I 303-5 Section 306 Underground Conduit Construction 306-I Open Trench Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NN Section 308 308-2 3084 308-5 308-7 308-8 Section 310 310-5 PART 3 ofthe SPECIAL PROVISIONS Descritiion Paae Supplemental Provisions To Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction Part 3, Construction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NN Earthwork ............................................................................................... NN Structure Excavation And Backfill ........................................................... NN Roadway Surfacing Asphalt Concrete Pavement . . . . . ..*........................................................... NN Asphalt Pavement Repairs And Remediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NN Concrete And Masonry Construction. Concrete Structures . . . . . . . . . . . ..**....................*.....................*..................... NN Concrete Curbs, Walks, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Alley Intersections, Access Ramps, And Driveways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*............................. NN Landscape And Irrigation Installation Earthwork And Topsoil Placement .......................................................... NN Planting .................................................................................................. NN Irrigation System Installation ................................................................... NN Maintenance And Plant Establishment .................................................... NN Guarantee.. ............................................................................................ NN Measurement And Payment. .................................................................. NN Painting Painting Various Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NN Ylamo Contmct No. NNNN Page1of16Pagea SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO ’ STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 3, CONSTRUCTION METHODS SECTION 300 - EARTHWORK 3005 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 3009.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall excavate to the lines and levels required and/or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, cribbing, pumping, and planking required. The Contractor shall excavate and maintain the bottom of all trenches in a condition that is level, firm, clean and free from all debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. The Contractor shall remove any unsuitable material encountered below grade as directed by the Engineer SECTION 3010 TREATED SOIL, SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS 301-l SUBGRADE PREPARATION. 3014.2 Preparation of Subgrade. Modify the second and third paragraphs as follows: Change each instance reading ‘I 50mm (6 inches)” to “300 mm (12”)“. 301-l .3 Relative Compaction. Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following: The Contractor shall compact the upper 300 mm (12”) of subgrade beneath areas to be paved, have base or subbase material placed on them, or curb, gutter, curb and gutter, alley pavement, driveway or sidewalk constructed over them to no less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM test D-l 557-91. 3014.7 Payment Modify the first paragraph as follows: Payment for subgrade preparation shall be included in the contract bid price for which the subgrade is prepared and shall include all labor, materials; including water, operations and equipment to scarify, adjust moisture, compact or reoompact the subgrade, both in cut areas and in fill areas, and no further compensation will be allowed. SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING 3026 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. ContmctNo. NNNN Pq2of18Pages 3624.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to receive asphalt concrete paving with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 2 (two) working days prior to paving the area. Allowance for the two day period shall be shown in the schedule required per section 6-l. 3025.2.5 Pavement Transitions. add the following: The Contractor shall ramp the approaches and termini to all structures and vertical joints in the cold-milted area which are transverse to through traffic with temporary asphalt wncrete pavement as specif&d in section 306-I .5.1. Ramps shall be constructed the same day as cold milling and removed the same day as permanent paving. Ramp dimensions and compaction shall be as approved by the Engineer. 302-5.4 Tack Coat add the following: The Contractor shall place a tack coat between the successive interfaces of existing pavement and new pavement when, in the opinion of the engineer, the Contractor has failed to maintain or prepare each existing or previously laid course of asphalt receiving the subsequent wurse of asphalt in a sufficiently clean state and the asphalt receiving the new pavement course is dirty enough to impair bonding between the next lift of asphalt. 302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading. modlfy as follows After second sentence of sixth paragraph, add: The Contractor shall provide the spreading and finishing machine used to construct the asphalt ancrete surface course with an automatic screed control for surface course paving. The automatic screed control shall be 9 m (30’) minimum length. The paving machine shall be operated by an operator and two full-time screed men during all paving. The surface course shall be 50 mm (2’) thick. Leveling courses will be required in a variable thickness pavement section. 30246.1 General. modify as follows: Second paragraph, Part (2) add: Pinched joint rolling procedures shall be required, and vibratory rollers shall be limited to breakdown, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. modify as follows: After last paragraph, add: Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, the initial breakdown rolling shall be followed by a pneumatic-tired roller as described in this section. 30215.9 Measurement and Payment. add the following: Payment for asphalt concrete shall be at the lump sum bid. No additional payment shall be made for any tack coat. Add the following section: 302-9 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIRS AND REMEDlATlON Add the following section. 3029.1 General. Asphalt pavement Repairs and Remediation shall consist of the repair and restoration of existing asphalt pavement. Repair of asphalt pavement shall consist of the saw cutting, removal and disposal of existing asphalt pavement in conformance with section 300-1.3, compaction of existing subgrade in conformance with section 301-1, grading and compaction of base material in conformance with section 301-2, application of grade SS-1 h emulsified asphalt and the placement of asphalt concrete base and wearing courses as specified herein Add the following section. 3029.2 Full Depth Asphalt Concrete Patch. Full depth asphalt concrete patch shall consist of removing asphalt concrete and/or aggregate base/subgrade to 300 mm (I’) below existing asphalt surface and placing replacing the material so removed with asphalt concrete. The area shown on the plans or set forth in the bid item are for estimating purposes only, final quantity will be as measured in the field. The Engineer will .designate and mark the final limits of the asphalt patch area by outlining the area to be patched. The Contractor shall cut such areas to straight lines in square or rectangular areas as marked. The area so cut shall have two of the sides at right angles to the direction of traffic. The excavated faces of the base/subgrade shall be straight and vertical. The Contractor shall compact the upper 3OOmm (1’) of subgrade to 95% relative compaction. A tackwatofSS-lh emulsified asphalt shall be applied uniformly to all asphatt to asphalt contact surfaces at a rate of 0.25 Urn2 to 0.45 Urr? (0.05 to 0.1 Ogallons per square yard) in acwrdance with subsection 302-5.4, SSPWC. The Contractor shall fill and compact areas designated to be removed with 300 mm (1.0’) full depth asphatt concrete. Asphatt concrete for full depth asphatt concrete patch shall be B-AR- 4000. The asphalt concrete so constructed shall have a finish surface and density conforming to subsection 302-5.6.2 SSPWC. Add the following section. 3029.3 Crack Sealing The Contractor shall wash, blow out and thoroughly dry all cracks designated to be sealed before installing elastomeric sealant material. The Contractor shall dispose debris from crack cleaning outside the public way in accordance with Section 7-6. I, ‘Cleanup and Dust Control.” The hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be melted in a jacketed, double boiler type melting unit. Temperature of the heat transfer medium shall not exceed 245’C (475°F). Application of the hot-melt sealant shall be made with a pressure feed applicator or pour pot. Sealant shall be applied when the pavement surface temperature is greater than 4°C (40°F). Containers of hot-melt sealant shall be delivered to the job-site in unopened containers that are clearly marked with data showing the manufacturer’s name, the product designation and the manufacturer’s batch number and lot numbers. The level of the sealant shall be flush with the surface of the existing pavement. All excess sealant shall be removed from the crack with a minimum overlap onto adjacent pavement. Add the following section. 302-9.4. Measurement and Payment Quantlties of full depth asphatt wncrete patch and crack sealing set forth in the bid item are for estimating purposes only, final quantity will be as designated and measured in the field. The Engineer will designate and mark the limits of the Full depth asphatt concrete patch and crack sealant application areas. Payment for emulsion-aggregate slurry treatments shall include post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to receive for emulsion- aggregate slurry treatment. Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of constructing full depth asphatt concrete patch shall include but not be limited to: furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for doing the work including, but not be limited to, saw cutting and removing 300 mm (I’) thick section of existing asphalt concrete, aggregate base/subbase and basement soil as designated by the engineer, placement of asphalt concrete, compaction of subbase and asphalt concrete, placement of SS-1 h asphalt emulsion and all other work incidental to full depth asphalt concrete patch shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid for full depth asphalt concrete patch and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of crack sealing shall include but not be limited to, furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to do the work. Crack cleaning, roadway clean up, application of sealant, removal of excess sealant and all other work incidental to crack sealing shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. SECTION 303 CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION. 303-l CONCRETE STRUCTURES 303-1.6.2 Falsework Design. add the following: The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing necessary to withstand all imposed loads during erection, construction, and removal of any falsework. The Contractor shall provide falsework drawings and calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer, civil or structural, that show provisions for resolution of all loads that may be imposed upon the falsework. Such plans and calculations shall include: 1. Resolution of all live, dead, wind, construction and impact loads that may be imposed on the falsework. 2. Temporary bracing or methods to be used during each phase of erection and removal of the -No. NNNN Page4dl8Pagm 3. Concrete placement sequence. 4. Erection and removal sequence. 5. Deflection values for the falsework that include recommended methods to compensate for falsework deflections, vertical alignment, and anticipated falsework deflection. 3034 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GlJmRS, CROSS GUTIERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS, ACCESS RAMPS, AND DRIVEWAYS. 303-5.5.2 Curb. add the following: The Contractor shall stamp the curb face with 75 mm (3’) high block letters directly above the point that it is crossed by underground facilities with the marking specified in Table 303-5.5.2(A) TABLE 39345.5.2(A) Curb Face Markings Type of underground facilities Water Service Lateral Sewer Service Lateral irrigation Water Lateral or Sleeve Marking W S RW 3034.9 Measurement and Payment. add the following: Curb and gutter, and curb, shall be considered as continuing across driveways and access ramps when constructed adjacent thereto. Neither curb and gutter nor curb will be paid for across the length of local depressions, except that which occurs in gutter transitions at each side of an inlet. SECTION 306 - UNDERGROUND CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION 306-l OPEN TRENCH OPERATIONS Add the following section: 306-l .1.7 Steel Plate Bridging - Wtth a Non-Skid Surface. This section covers the use of steel plate bridging, The Contractor shall not employ the use or use steel plate bridging or trench plate that does not meet the requirements of this section both in application and circumstance of use. Add the following section: 306-1.1.7.1 Requirements for Use. Alternate construction methods that avoid the use of steel plate bridging shall be used by the Contractor unless othenvise approved by the Engineer. It is recognized that to accommodate excavation work, steel plate bridging may be necessary. All conditions for use of steel plate bridging set forth in the following requirements must be fulfilled as conditions of approval of the use of steel plate bridging. Consideration of steel plate bridging in the review process will take into account the following factors: 1. Traffic volume and composition. 2. Duration of use of the steel plate bridging. 3. size of the proposed excavation. 3. Weather conditions. The following formula shall be used to score the permitted use of steel plate bridging: PS = [ ADT + EWL + DAYS + 10 X WEEKEND + 5 X NIGHTS + 20 X WEATHER + SPEED Ikmh) + SLOPE X 100) X LANES a Ylwo ContmctNo. NNNN PW$35Of18F9fpS 1000 8 PS = [ ADT + EWL + DAYS + 10 X WEEKEND + 5 X NIGHTS + 20 X WEATHER + SPEED (mph) + SLOPE X lOO] X LANES 1000 where: PS ADT EWL DAYS site WEEKEND NIGHTS WEATHER SPEED number SLOPE spanning a proposed steel LANES = 5 plate score. average daily traffic as defined in the CALTRANS Traffic Manual. equivalent wheel loads as defined in the CALTRANS Traffic Manual. total number of 24 hour periods during which the plates will be utilized at the being wnsidered. total number of Saturdays, Sundays and holidays that the plates will be utilized at the site being considered. total number of overnight periods that the plates will be in place, exclusive of Saturday, Sunday and holiday nights. total number of 24-hour periods that the plates will be utilized at the site being considered when the possibilii of rain exceeds 40 percent. the design speed in kilometers per hour or miles per hour, as applicable in the formulae above, of the street where the plates are to be installed. This shall not be reduced for construction zone speed reductions. the quotient of the vertical differential divided by the horizontal distance. The vertical and horizontal dimensions shall be measured at the locations distance of 15 m (SO’) up and downstream of the position of the plate bridging. the number of lanes where plates will be used. When the computed value of the plate score exceeds 50, steel plate bridging shall not be used unless, and at the sole discretion of the Engineer, the Engineer determines that no alternative method of construction is possible in lieu of using steel plate bridging or that other overriding considerations make the use of steel plate bridging acceptable. Alternatives considered to bridging shall include, but not be limited to, detouring traffic, construction detour routes, tunneling, boring and other methods of trenchless construction. Unless specifically noted in the provisions of the Engineer’s approval, the use of steel plate bridging at each location so approved shall not exceed four (4) consecutive working days in any given week. Add the following section: 306-l .1.7.2 Addltional Requirements. In all cases when the depth of the trench exceeds the width of the steel plate bridging resting on each side of the pavement adjacent to the trench, safety regulations require or the Engineer determines that shoring is necessary to protect the health or safety of workers or the public the Contractor shall install shoring conforming to Section 7-10.4.1 of the Standard Specifications. The trench shoring shall be designed and installed to support the steel plate bridging and traffic loads. All approvals for design, substitution of materials or methods shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with all provisions of section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and Submittals. The Contractor shall backfill and resurface excavations in accordance with section 306- 1.5. Add the following section: 306-1.1.7.3 installation. When backfilling operations of an excavation in the traveled way, whether transverse or longitudinal cannot be properly completed within a work day, steel plate bridging with a non-skid surface and shoring may be required to presence unobstructed traffic flow. In such cases, the following conditions shall apply: a) Steel plate bridging when the plate score exceeds 50 is not allowed except when, at the sole discretion of the Engineer, it is approved as specified hereinbefore. b) Steel plates used for bridging must extend a minimum of 610 mm (2’) beyond the edges of Ylm -No. NNNN PaQe8dl8PaQm3 the trench. c) Stwl plate bridging shall be installed to operate wlth minimum noise. When the use of steel plate bridging and shoring is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install using either Method (1) or (2) depending on the design speed of the portion of street where the steel plate bridging is proposed for use. Method 1: not applicable. Method 2 For speeds 70 KmIhr (45 MPH) or less: Approach plate(s) and ending plate (if longitudinal placement) shall be attached to the roadway and shall be secured against displacement by using two adjustable cleats that are no less than 50 mm (2”) shorter than the width of the trench bolted to the underside of each plate and located within 150 mm (6”) of the beginning and end of the trench for plates at the beginning and end of the trench, a minimum of two 300 mm long by 19 mm diameter (12” x X”) steel bolts placed through the plate and driven into holes drilled 300 mm (12”) into the pavement section, or other devices approved by the Engineer. Subsequent plates shall be butted to each other. Fine graded asphalt concrete shall be compacted to form ramps, maximum slope 6.5O16 with a minimum 300 mm (12’) taper to cover all edges of the steel plates. When steel plates are removed, the dowel holes in the pavement section shall be completely filled with elastomeric sealant material. At the Contractor’s option, the methods required for Method 1 may be used. If the Contractor so elects, all requirements of Method 1 shall be used. The Contractor shall maintain the steel plates, shoring, and asphalt wncrete ramps and maintain and restore the street surface during and after their use. Add the following section: 306-l .1.7.4 Materials. The minimal thickness of steel plate bridging shall be as shown in Table 306-l. 1.7.4(A) TABLE 306-l .1.7.4(A) REQUIRED PLATE THICKNESS FOR A GIVEN TRENCH WlDlH Maximum Trench-Width (‘I I Minimum Plate Thickness 0.3 m (10”) 13 mm (V2”) 0.6 m (23”) 19 mm (“/,“) 0.8 m (31”) 22 mm (‘/<) 1.0 m (41”) 25 mm (1”) 1.6 m (63”) 32 mm (1 X”) (1) For spans greater than 1.8 m (5’). a structural design shall be prepared by a registered civil engineer and submitted to the Engineer for review and approval in accordance with section 2-5.3. Steel plate bridging shall be steel plate designed to support the HS20-44 truck loading per CALTRANS Bridge Design Specifications Manual. The Contractor shall maintain a non-skid surface on the steel plate with no less than a coefficient of friction of 0.35 as determined by California Test Method 342. If a different test method is used, the Contractor may utilize standard test plates with known coefficients of friction available from the CALTRANS District 11 Materials Engineer to correlate skid resistance results to California Test Method 342. In addition to all other required construction signing, the Contractor shall install Rough Road (W33) sign with black lettering on an orange background in advance of steel plate bridging. Add the following section: 306-l .1.7.5 Measurement and Payment. Steel plate bridge materials including, but not limited to: steel plates, anchoring devices, cold milling, elastomeric sealant material, asphalt ramping and padding, signage, placing, installation, removal, relocation, preparation and processing of shop drawings and submittals to support the use of steel plate bridging and all other materials, labor, YloEoo CodmctNo. NNNN Page7dWPaga supervision, overhead of any type or description will be paid for as an incidental to the work that the bridging is installed to facilitate. No separate payment for steel plate bridging will be made. No extension to contract time will be allowed for, or because of, the use of steel plate bridging. 306-1.3.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall install detectable underground utility marking taps 230 mm 75 mm (9 3”) above each or, in the case of bundled underground conduit of the same type, the upper underground conduit being installed by the open trench method. The type and color of detectable underground utility marking tape shall conform to the requirements of section 207-25 et seq. 308-1.3.4 Compaction Requirements. delete Section 306-1.3.4 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall densify trench backfill to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction except that in the top 300 mm (12”) of the street right-of-way, compaction shall be 95 percent. 306-l .5 Trench Resurfacing. 306-1.5.1 Temporary Resurfacing. Delete the fourth and fifth paragraphs and substitute the following: Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials which are placed by the Contractor are for its convenience and shall be at no cost to the Agency. Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials shall be used in lieu of permanent resurfacing only when approved by the Engineer. When temporary bituminous resurfacing materials are used in lieu of permanent resurfacing it shall be removed and replaced with permanent resurfacing within 7 days of placement. No additional payment will be made for temporary bituminous resurfacing materials. The price bid for the associated conduit or structure shall include full compensation for furnishing, placing, maintaining, removing, and disposing of such temporary resurfacing materials. 308-l 52 Permanent Resurfacing. Add the following: Except as provided in section 306-l .5.1, “Temporary Resurfacing,” the Contractor shall perform permanent trench resurfacing within 24 hours after the completion of backfill and densification of backfill and aggregate base materials. 306-1.6 Basis of Payment for Open Trench Installation. add the following: Payment for utilities undergrounding which includes the utility trench for CAlV and SDG&E and conduit for SDG&E’s electric conversion shall be made on the basis of contract lump sum price for utilities undergrounding and no other payments will be made. Cox Cable will supply and deliver conduits and fittings to be installed by the Contractor. Cox Cable will install enclosures. The Contractor will furnish and install 6.4 mm (%) nylon pull ropes in all conduit. 306-6 ABANDONMENT OF CONDUITS AND STRUCTURES. Add the following: Unless otherwise noted on plans, the Contractor shall remove all existing abandoned pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, and pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, that are abandoned during the course of the work and shall replace said pipelines and conduits with properly compacted soils. Payment for removal and disposal of abandoned utilities shall be included in the lumpsum bid for Clearing and Grubbing, and no additional payment will be made. SECTION 308 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION This section has not been edited. Please secure final edited version from Mark Steyaert, Jr. ASLA, Recreation Department - Park Development Coordinator or Lii Ketabian, Asst. to Park Dew. Coordinator. Editing of Table of Contents is also required. 3089 EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL PLACEMENT Q Y1woo ContmctNo. NNNN Page8ofl8Pages 308-2.3.2 Fertllization and Conditioning Procedures. add the following: The Contractor shall cultivate the surface of all areas to be planted or hydroseeded by discing, ripping or scarifying the finish grade. After cultivation the Contractor shall clear the planting areas of stones to the depth Of cultivation and shall be rake the planting areas to a smooth friable and plantable surface. The Contractor shall cultivate all planting areas, except slopes steeper than 3-l/2:1 (horizontal to vertical), to a depth of 300 mm (12”). The planting areas that are slopes steeper than 3-l/2:1, shall be cultivated to a depth of 150 mm (6’). After cultivation, the soil amendments shown in table 308- 2.3.2(A) shall be thoroughly blended 150 mm (6’) deep in all planting areas. Except for planting pits the cultivation depths are designated as the root area. Backfill for planting pits shall conform to the requirements of section 3084.5. After surface preparation and application of the soil amendments shown in Table 308-2.3.2(A) the Contractor shall obtain a minimum of one test for each soil property listed in Tables 308-2.3.2(B) and 308-2.3.2(C) from each median planter, at least one test per 150 m (500’) from each parkway and for each hectare (2.5 acres) of hydroseeded, area and shall submit the results of said tests to the Engineer. The Contractor shall then adjust the soil properties to the acceptable ranges of soil properties shown in Tables 308-2.3.2(B) and 308-2.3.2(C) using such materials and methods as may be necessary. Organic soil amendment materials shall not be included in the samples used to determine compliance to the soil particle gradation requirements of Table 308-2.3.2(C). If adjustments are necessary the soil shall be tested by the Contractor after such adjustments for each soil property listed in Table 308-2.3.2(B) and 308-2.3.2(C) to determine that the adjustments to the soil made by the Contractor result in soil properties within the acceptable range. The Contractor shall adjust the soil properties and show acceptable ranges prior to any planting or application of hydroseed slurry. Prior to the start of any planting or application of hydroseed slurry the surface and root area shall be evenly and thoroughly moistened to no less than 75 percent of field capacity. The Contractor shall certify, in writing, that the ground surface has been prepared in’ accordance with this section and shall request inspection by the Engineer prior to any planting or seeding. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval before any planting or hydroseeding. lendment TABLE 308-2.3.2(A) SOIL AMENDMENTS I Metric Aoolication Rate I ADD~OX. U.S. Aoalication Rate SoilAn . rr~~------~ . -m-r----- ---- -t-r-------.- . ---- Agricultural Gypsum 500 g per square meter 100 Ibs. per 1,000 square feet Iron Sulfate 50 g per square meter 10 Ibs. per 1,000 square feet Calcium Carbonate Lime 500 g per square meter 100 Ibs. per 1,000 square feet Organic Soil Amendment 0.04115 cubic meters per square 5 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet TABLE 308-2.3.2(B) (EC.) Soluble Salts Liquid Limit N/A to 30 ASTM D 423 *2 Plasticity Index NP to 10 ASTM D424 *2 TABLE 308-2.3.2(C) SOIL PARTlCLE GRADATlON Sieve Siize Percent Passing 19 mm (3/,*) 100 9.5 mm (3/a”) 95-100 4.75 mm (No. 4) 60-85 1.89 mm (No. 10) 40-75 ContrutNo. NNNN Pa@eQofl8Pa~en 475 pm (No. 40) 35-70 75 pm (No. 200) Xl-70 For areas to receive planting of all types, excluding only hydroseeding, the Contractor shall amend the prepared soil by blending 200 g of 7-7-7 fertilizer per square meter (40 Ibs. per 1,000 square feet) into the top 160 mm (a) of soil after the completion of adjustment of soil properties and acceptance of the planting area by the Engineer. The Contractor shall apply post-plant 1246 fertilizer at the rate of 20 pounds per 1,000 square feet, 30 days after planting and every 30 days through the end of the maintenance period. 308-2.4 Finish Grading.. add following: The Contractor shall prepare the finish grade in hydroseed slope areas with a moderately rough texture to provide a suitable surface for adherence of the hydroseed mix. 3084 PLANTING. 3084.1 Gemral. add the following: The Contractor shall perform actual planting during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice and as approved by the Engineer. No planting shall be done in any area until it has been satisfactorily prepared in accordance with these specifications. Soil moisture level prior to planting shall be no less than 75 percent of field capacity. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of planting pits before planting operations begin. For pit planted vegetation when the soil moisture level is found to be insufficient for planting, the Contractor shall fill the planting pits with water and allow them to drain before starting planting operations. No more plants shall be distributed in the planting area on any day than can be planted and watered on that day. The Contractor shall plant and water all plants as herein specified immediately after removal from their containers. Containers shall not be cut prior to placing the plants in the planting area. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide continuous horticuttural services and temporary and/or permanent irrigation to all planted and hydroseeded areas so that the planted and hydroseeded vegetation is 100 percent healthy and thriving prior to, and throughout the, landscape maintenance period. 3084.2 Protection and Storage. add the following: The Contractor shall submit a sheltered and secure location for on-site plant storage area for the Engineer’s approval prior to the delivery of any plant materials. Any plant determined by the Engineer to be wilted, broken, or otherwise damaged shall be rejected at any time during the project, whether in the ground or not. All plants shall be handled by their containers. Any plant that has been handled by its trunk or stem shall be rejected. All rejected plants shall be removed from the site immediately. 3081.3 Layout and Plant Location. modify as follows: Planting areas shall be staked by the Contractor and the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of the planting layout before planting operations begin. 308=4.5 Tree and Shrub Planting. add the following: The Contractor shall amend the backfill for planting holes to a thoroughly blended mixture of clean loamy soil meeting the requirements of Tables 306-2.3.2(B) and 306-2.3.2(C) and then blend the amendments listed in Table 306-4.5(A) into the backfill for planting holes. TABLE 308-4.5(A) BACKFILL AND AMENDMENTS FOR TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING Soil Amendment Metric Application Rate Approx. U.S. Application Rate Agricultural Gypsum 18 kg per cubic meter 30 Ibs. per cubic yard Iron Sulfate 600 g per cubic meter 1 lb. per cubic yard Calcium Carbonate Lime 6 kg per cubic meter 10 Ibs. per cubic yard CmmctNo. NNNN Page 10 d 18 Pqpa Organic Soil Amendment 0.67 cubic meters per cubic meter 2/3 cubic yards per cubic yard Planting Tablets ’ 1 per 100 mm dia. pot container 1 per 4’ dia. pot container Planting Tablets ’ 2 per 19 liter container 2 per 5 gal. container Planting Tablets ’ 1 per each 50 mm width of each box- 1 per each 2” width of each box- Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, and to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-tenth the branching structure. Pruning may be done only with the approval of, and in the presence of, the Engineer. Cuts over 19 mm (W) shall be painted with an approved tree wound paint. NOTE TO PROJECT ENGINEER Section 30845.1 Root Barrier Depth The Project Engineer must review the recommendation of the Design Engineer or Landscape Architect regarding the depth of the root barrier. Reported resurfacing distances for roots of various species of trees range between 1:8 to 1:20 (vertical : horizontal). The variation is due to the species and the moisture permeability of the soil and/or soil and cover material as well as the amount of water and nutriants that may be available to the roots elsewhere. (REMOVE lHlS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) Add the following section: 3084.51 Root Barriers. Root barriers shall conform to section 212-1.8, Root Barriers. The Contractor shall install root barriers continuously at the edges of all median planter areas. The top of the root barrier shall be 25 mm (1”) below the finish grade of the planted area. The bottom of the root. barrier shall be installed 520 mm (20’/,‘) OR, choose one (REMOVE THIS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) 1.25 m (40”) below the finish grade of the planted area. Install as indicated on the plans, eliminating any breaks in the barrier by providing at least 150 mm (6”) of overlap at splices or damaged areas. Splices and repair patches shall be stitched to the root barrier material by a running stitch of no less than 6 2 1 stitches per 25 mm (1”). 3084.6 Plant Staking and Guying. add the following: The Contractor shall install all boxed trees per drawings L-l and L-2 of the San Diego Regional Standard Drawings unless details shown on the project plans differ therefrom. 3084.8.2(b) Method B. add the following: The Contractor shall prepare hydroseeding slurry on the job site. Slurry additives shall arrive at the site in bags sealed and properly identiied by the manufacturer. All specified additives and water shall be added on the job site at the rates specified and shall be thoroughly mixed at the job site. The Contractor shall add seed to the slurry after the fiber mulch has been thoroughly incorporated. The Contractor shall spray all areas with a uniform, visible coat using the green color of the mulch as a guide. The Contractor shall apply the slurry in a sweeping motion, in an arched stream so as to fall like rain allowing the mulch fibers to built on each other until a good coat is achieved and the material is spread, evenly, at the required rate per area. The Contractor shall use care not to drag spray hoses over container planted material and shall attempt to spray from the edges of the planting areas wherever possible. Any slurry mixture which has not been applied to the planting areas within four (4) hours after mixing is be rejected and removed from the project at the Contractor’s expense. Any sluny spilled into areas outside the limits of work shall be cleaned up at the Contractots expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall assure that the site is properly prepared. The Contractor shall repair all tire ruts created by the equipment. Areas needing grading repair prior to hydroseeding shall be blended and floated to match surrounding grades. Areas having less than 80% plant coverage within thirty (30) days after the initial application shall be reseeded every twenty (20) days until 80% of the ground surface is evenly covered by hydroseeded or subsequently reseeded growth. a YlQmo ContmctNo. NNNN Pixigel1of18Pages Add the following section: 3084.8.3.1 Weed Eradicrtion. The Contractor shall water all irrigated areas to be hydroseeded for three (3) weeks prior to hydroseeding to allow for germination of the weed seeds. The Contractor shall spray all weeds with a post emergent herbicide immediately after the completion of the three week irrigation period. After two (2) weeks, the Contractor shall again eradicate the weeds and complete the preparation of the soil prior to the application of the hydroseed mixes. Add the following section, 3084.10 Erosion Control Matting Installation Add the fallowing section, 3084.10.1 General. Before installation of erosion control matting the Contractor shall complete all soil preparation, fine grading, and hydroseeding of the areas to receive erosion control matting. Add the following section: 3084.10.2 Coordination with Hydroseeding. Erosion wntrol matting shall be installed by the Contractor immediately after the first application of hydroseed materials. In all cases the Contractor shall place the erosion control matting within three days after the first hydroseed material appiication. Should any seed in the hydroseed materials begin to germinate within the three-day period after application or before the installation of the erosion control matting, the installation of the erosion &ntrol matting shall be considered as late and the Contractor shall disc the hydroseed materials into the top 1OOm (4”) of the underlying soil, condition the soil for hydroseeding, apply hydroseeding materials at the rates and of the type specified and then install the erosion control matting. No additional payment will be made for second or subsequent hydroseed applications resulting from late installation of erosion control matting. Add the following section: 3084.10.3 Installation. The Contractor shall install erosion control matting using the following techniques: 1. Begin at the top of the slope by placing the erosion control matting into a 150 mm (69 wide by 150 mm (6”) deep trench with the end of the matting laid flat in the bottom of the trench 2. Anchor the end of the erosion control matting with erosion control mat staples spaced no more than 300 mm (12”) on centera placed at the intersection of the bottom and the downhill vertical face of the trench. 3. Roll the erosion control matting down the slope. 4. Staple the erosion control matting on an alternating grid consisting of three across and two across lines of staples in horizontal lines spaced 900mm (3’) on centers. 5. Erosion control mat so stapled shall be spaced such that no less than 1 % staples per square meter (1 W staples per square yard) are provided to anchor the erosion control matting. 6. Start the adjacent erosion control mat as in Item 1. of this section, overlapping the previously placed mat by no less than 50 mm (2”). 7. Staple placement may be such as to use the staples used to secure the adjacent mat to secure both mats along their edges. 3086 IRRlGATlON SYSTEM INSTALLATION. 3086.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall apply irrigation water as often and in sufficient amounts, as conditions may require, to germinate and establish the seed and keep the container plants healthy and growing. The Contractor shall lay out lines, valves, and other underground utilities and receive the approval of the Engineer before digging trenches. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by its operations. Connections shall be made at approximately the locations shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for unapproved changes. Permission to shut off any existing in-use water lines must be obtained 48 hours in advance, as to the date, time and exact length of time of each shut-off. The Contractor Yloloo Conlmct No. NNNN Page 12 of 18 Pages shall demonstrate that the entire irrigation system is under full automatic operation for a period of seven days prior to any planting. 3084.2 lrrlgation Pipeline Installation. add the following: The Contractor shall install all pressure main line piping from the irrigation system so as to maintain 3.1 m (lo’) minimum horizontal separation from all potable water piping. Where reclaimed and potable water pressure mainline piping cross, the reclaimed water piping shall be installed below the potable water piping, sleeved in a pressure rating of 200 PSI SDR 21 “Alertline” PVC sleeve which extends a minimum of 3.1 m (lo’) on either side of the potable water piping and be located to provide a minimum vertical clearance of 300 mm (12”) between the reclaimed and potable water lines. Conventional (white) PVC pipe Schedule 40 may be used for sleeving material if it is taped along its entire length with 75 mm (3”) wide purple warning tape which reads “Caution Reclaimed Water”. For trenching through areas where topsoil has been spread, the Contractor shall deposit topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on opposite side. Subsoil shall be free of all rocks 13 mm (%“) in diameter or larger, debris, and litter, prior to use as backfill. The Contractor shall repair any leaks and replace all defective pipe or fittings until lines meet test requirements. The Contractor shall not cover any lines until they have been inspected and approved by the Engineer for tightness, quality of workmanship, and materials. The Contractor shall not be backfill trenches until all required tests and observations are performed. Obsenrations include sprinkler heads, all fittings, lateral and mainline pipe, valves, and direct burial wire. 3084.2.3 Plastic Pipeline. add the following: The Contractor shall store all pipe and fittings under cover until used, and all pipe and fittings shall transported in a vehicle wtth a bad long enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat so as not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Pipe ends and fittings shall be wiped with MEK, or equal, before welding solvent is applied. Welded joints shall be given a minimum of 15 minutes to set before moving or handling. All field cuts shall be beveled to remove burrs and excess before ftiing and gluing together. The Contractor shall center load pipe with small amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Joints shall be exposed for inspection during testing. Plastic-to-plastic joints shall be solvent-welded, using only solvent recommended by pipe manufacturer. Add the following section: 308-6.2.6 Installation of Brass Pipe. The Contractor shall cut brass piping by power hacksaw, circular cutting machine using an abrasive wheel, or hand hacksaw. No piping shall be cut with metallic wheel cutter of any description. The Contractor shall ream and remove rough edges or burrs on all pipe so that smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained, place Teflon tape, Teflon dope, or approved equal on male threads only, and tighten to prevent any leakage. The Contractor shall tighten screwed joints with tongs or wrenches. Caulking is not permitted. Add the following section: 308-6.3.1 Valves. add the Wowing: The Contractor shall install each control valve in a separate valve box with a minimum of 300 mm (12”) separation between valves and 150 mm (6”) from any fixed object or structure. Add the following section 308-6.3.2 Valve Boxes. The Contractor shall install no more than one valve per box. All boxes are to be marked as to the type of valve. Remote control valve boxes shall also indicate control station number. Add the following section: 30843.3 Backflow Preventer. The Contractor shall install backfiow preventer assembly in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and as directed on drawings. Exact location and positioning shall be verified on the site by the Engineer. e Ylmo CallrElNo. NNNN P8ge 13 d 10 Page6 308-5.4.4 Sprinkler Head Adjustment. add the following: The Contractor shall flush and adjust all irrigation heads and valves for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways buildings, walls, and other structures. Add the following section: 308-5.4.5 Drip Assembly. The Contractor shall install drip emitter filter on the supply side of all electric pressure regulating control valve for all emitter systems. The Contractor shall install a flush valve on the discharge side of all drip laterals. 3086.5 Automatic Control System Inetallation. add the following: The Contractor shall install all portions of the electrical installation with materials and methods conforming to the requirements of the 1996 National Electrical Code. The Contractor shall provide. no less than one control wire and one wmmon ground wire to service each valve in system. 308-5.6.3 Sprinkler Coverage Test add the following: This test shall be accomplished before any ground wver is planted. 308-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. Add the following: For hydroseeded areas, median planting and mitigation area, The Contractor shall maintain said areas for period of no iess than 120 days or until final acceptance of the project, whichever is the greater. Mowing is not required for hydmseeded areas. The Contra&or shall provide wmplete landscape maintenance of all planted areas. The work shall include, but not be limited to, watering, litter control, weed control, stake repair, cukivating, supplementary fertilii, repair of irrigation systems, and wntroi of dii and pests. The Contractor shall submit a written plan to control weeds, disease, and pest infestations in tha planting amas. The submittal shall wnfonn to the requirements for shop drawings as sp&fiad in section 26.3 et seq. of the specifications. The Engineer shall approve all methods and materials for such wntroi. Upon appmval, the Contractor shall implement the wntrol measures, exercising extreme caution in using pesticides and taking all steps to ensure the safety of the p&Iii. Only ticen& personnel will ba permitted to perform toxic spraying work. During the plant establiihment period, the Contractor shall furnish suMcient workers and equipment on a daily basis to perform the work required by thii section. Any day when the Contractor fails to adequately carry out specified maintenance HIork, as determined necessary by the Engineer, will not be credited as one of the plant establishment days. All planting areas which are damaged by wnstr&ion shall be repaired by the Contractor within twnty (20) days following wmp@on of wnsttuction in such. The Contractor shall repair such damaged areas. The repair shall consist of bringing the damaged area back to final grade, preparing the soil, replanting the area with the same vegetation as originally q&tied, and maintaining the area to achieve aaqtabla plant establishment The Contractor shall provide temporary irrigation for hydmseeded amas for a minimum of 120 days to ensure adequate plant establishment. Towards the end of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall gradually reduce the amount of inigatiin to allow plant adaptation to non-inigated wndllons. Upon the approval of the engineer, the temporary irrigation system shall be shut off at the end of the maintenance period. The hydmseeded areas must have their growth of SO?!% establiihed and the wverage must be evenly successful over the entire hydmseeded amaandadequatetopreventerosionnolessthan30 days before the end of the maintenance period. Should the wverage not be achiied the maintenance period shall be extended until the required wverage is achieved plus an additional 30 day period. The Contractor shall call for a final inspection 30 days before the end of the maintenance period and at the end of the maintenance period. Failure to pass inspection will result in an extension of the maintenance period. The Contractor shall continue to provide maintenance for such time necessary to obtain conformance to the specifications. 308-7 GUARANTEE. Add following: The Contractor shall guarantee all 600 mm (24”) box trees instaW under~wntradtoliveandgrowforoneyearfnxnthedayoffinalacceptanceofthewntractwwk.The Contractor shall guarantee all other plant material, including ground covers to live and grow for a period of 30 days from the last day of the maintenance oeriod or final acceotance of the contract work, whiier is e- w Ylwm Ckntmct No. NNNN Page 14 d 18 PaQw the later. The Contractor Bhd replace, at its expense, all plant material found to be d&d, missing, or in poor condition during the maintenance period within 5 days of dii of such plant material. The Engineer shall be the sole judga as to the wndiion of tha plant material. Plant material found to be daad or in poor condition within the guarantee period shall ba repked by the Contractor, at its expanse, within 15 days of written notification. Replaceman& shall be made to tha same specificatiins required for the original plantings. The Contractor shall submit written vegetation, planting and irrigation guarantee in approved form that all work showing defects in materials or workmanship will be repaired or replaced at no wst to the Engineer for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Engineer. The Guarantee form shall be retyped on the Contractor’s letterhead and contain the following verbiage: ‘Guarantee For Vegetation, Planting and Irrigation System For (PmjecZ Name) We hereby guarantee that the vegetation, planting and inigetion system we have furnished and installed for (pmject name) is fme fmm defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. We agree to repair or replace any defect in vegetation, material or workmanship, including that due to ordinary wear and tear, which may develop during the periods specified in section 308-7 of the Standard Specifications and the Special Provisions of said pmject from date of completion of the Wok or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is the later, and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost Co the Agency. . This guarantee does not extend to unusual abuse or neglect that may occur subsequent to the date of completion of the Work or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is fhe later. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the Engineer, abler receipt of written notice. In the event of failure to make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice fmm the Engineer, we authOrit8 the Engineer to proceed fo have said repairs or replacements made at our’expense, and we will pay the costs and charges themforw upon demand. Pm&&: (Pmject Name) Location: (Legal Description of Pmject Pmpe*) Name of Contractor: Address: (Of Contractor) Telephone: : (Of Contractor) By.’ (Typed or printed names of signing Officers) of the Contractor authotized to bind the Contractor in &a/ matters) Tiiie: (Of said officer(s)) Signature(s) Date of Execution.” Add the following section: 308-7.1 Record Drawings. In addition to the requirements of section 2-5.4, herein, the Contractor shall prepare record drawings that show all changes in the work wnstituting departures from tha original contract drawings, including those involving both wnstant-pressure and intermittent-pressure lines and appurtenances. The Contractor shall accurately record, on a daily basis, on ona set of blue line prints of the inigation drawings, all changes in work wnstituting departures from the original contract drawings, including changes in both pressure and nonpressure line. The Contractor shall post information on record drawings no later than the next working day after the work is installed. The Contractor shall rewrd changes and dimensions in a legible and professional manner. When the drawings are approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall transfer all information to a set of reproducible photo mylar drawings. Items required to be shown shall be dimensioned by the Contractor from two pemranent points of reference (buildings, monuments, sidawalks, curbs, pavement). The accuracy of location of all items to ba shown on the drawings shall be 150 mm (a) in both tha vertical and horizontal planes. Ail text and numerals placed on ConlTaNo. NNNN Pago 15 of 18 Pagea drawings shall be 0.30 mm (l/t) in size. Facilii and items to be located in their horizontal and vertical positions and shown on the rewrd drawings include all: a) Point(s) of connection, for water and eiechtcal services b) Routing of irrigation pressure mainlines c) Backfiow preventers d) Ball, gate and check valves e) Irrigation control valves. 9 Quick coupler valves g) Routing of service wires h) Routing of control wires 0 Eiechical seuvice equipment j) Elecbical junction boxes k) Mgatkmwntrollers 1) Sleeves for future connecWns m) Other equipment of a similar nature (as directed by the Engineer). The Contractor shall keep the blue print drawings available for the Engineer’s inspection at any time. The Contractor shall make all changes to reproducibie drawings in waterproof black ink (no ball point pen). Changes in dimensions shall be recorded in a legible and pmfessiinal manner. Record wnstruction &awings shall be maintained at the job site during wn&ucWn. The Contractor shall provide one set of mylar “record” drawings to the Engineer after submiing Mu&ine prints of the proposed “record” drawings for, and obtaining their approval by, the Engineer. Add the following section: 308-7.2 Controller Chart. The Contractor shall prepare record drawings which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval by the Engineer before charts are prepared. The contractor shall provide one controller chart of the maximum size the controller doorwill allow, for each controller supplied, showing the area covered by that automatic controller. The chart shall be a reduction of the actual record system drawing with a legend to explain all symbols. If the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, The Contra&or shall enlarge it to a size that will be readable when reduced. The Contmctor shall photocopy the chart, with a pastel transparent wlor used to show area of coverage for each station. When completed and approved, the Contractor shall hermetically seal the chart between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils thick. The Contractor shall complete the charts and obtain the Engineers approval prior to final inspection of the irrigation system. Add the following section: 308-7.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals. lb8 QMactor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer, within 10 calendar days prior to completion of construction, all required and necessary descriptive material in complete detail and sufficient quantity, properly prepared in four individual bound copies. The descriptive material shall describe the material installed in sufficient detail to permit qualified operating personnel to understand, operate, and maintain all equipment. The ContmcW shall include spare parts list and related manufacturer information for each equipment item installed. Each manual shall include the following: a) Index sheet stating Contractofs address and telephone number. b) Duration of Guarantee period. c) List of equipment, with names and addresses of manufacturers local representative. d) Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. e) In addition to the maintenance manuals, the Contractor shall provide the agency maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment, and show written evidence to the Engineer at the conclusion of the work that this service has been rendered. Add the following section: 308-7.4 Check List The Contractor shall complete and forward signed and dated checklist to the # YlOJQO cormclN0. NNNN Page 16 al 18 Pqgls Engineer before final acceptance of project. the following checklist at the end of the project, using the format shown: a) Plumbing permits (if none required, so note) b) Materials approval c) Pressure mainline test (by whom, and date) d) Record drawings completed (received by, and date) e) Controller chart completed (received by, and date) 9 Materials furnished (received by, and date) g) Operation and maintenance manuals furnished (received by, and date) h) System and equipment operation instructions (received by, and date) 0 Manufacturer warranties (received by, and date) j) Written guarantee by Contractor (received by, and date) NOTE TO PROJECT ENGINEER FOR SPECIAL PROVISION 308-8 *‘Measurement and PaVment” The Project Engineer needs to adjust the amount to withhold from the landscape bid amount to secure the maintenance of the landscaping. The amount needs to be sufficiently large to pay for the actual cost of the maintenance AND for the cost of rehabilitation that may be necessary to meet the specifications due to the Contractor’s failure to maintain the landscaping. (REMOVE THIS TEXT BEFORE PRINTING THE SPECIFICATIONS) 308-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. add the following: The lump-sum or unit prices set forth in the contract documents shall include, but not be limited to, full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment and performing all work necessary to complete, maintain, and guarantee the planting and irrigation work described or specified in the contract documents, including soils testing and recommended soil amendments, seed and hydroseed slurry, tree stakes, bark mulch, erosion control matting, plant materials, temporary irrigation and permanent irrigation, including reduced-pressure back-flow preventer, ball valves, drip valve assembly, electric control valves, quick couplers, control wires, pull boxes, valve boxes, all piping and sleeves, electrical conduits, irrigation heads, drip emitters, bubblers, drip irrigation equipment, connection from electrical service to irrigation electrical”meter, connection from meter to irrigation wntroller(s), installation of controller enclosure, concrete pads, preparation, correction, reproduction and lamination of “as-built drawings, controller charts, assembly and submittal of the check list and operation and maintenance manuals and all appurtenances to the aforementioned items, as well as 120 days’ maintenance and project guarantees. After completion of the project, the Engineer will retain $12,000 of the total contract amount, and will subsequently disburse the $12,000 to the Contractor on a monthly basis of $3,000 per month. The Engineer reserves the right to stop payment until all punch list submitted to the Contractor every month are completed. SECTION 310 - PAINTING 3105 PAINTING VARIOUS SURFACES. 3106.8 Painting Traffic Striping, Pavement Markings and Curb Markings. Modify the fiffh paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall furnish ail equipment, materials, labor, and supervision necessary for painting traffic lanes, directional arrows, guidelines, curbs, parking lines, crosswalks, and other designated markings in accordance with the Plans, or for approved temporary detours essential for safe control of traffic through and around the construction site. The Contractor shall remove by wet grinding all existing or temporary traffic markings and lines that may confuse the public. When temporary detour striping or markings are no longer required, they shall be removed prior to painting the new traffic stripes or markings. ContmctNo. NNNN Page 17 of 18 Pe&ps 31046.3 Equipment. Delete the ninth paragraph and substitute the following: The Contractor shall provide a wet grinding machine with sufficient capacity to completely remove all existing or temporary traffic striping or markings that conflict with the striping plan, or are wntrary to the Trafic Manual, or that may be confusing to the public. The surface produced by grinding the existing or temporary traffic striping or markings on pavement shall not exceed variations from a uniform plane more than 3 mm (‘I,“) in 3 m (lo’) when measured parallel to the centerline of the street or more than 6 mm (‘I,,) in 3 m (lo’) when measured perpendicular to the centeriine of the street. The use of any equipment that leaves ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks in the pavement shall be discontinued, and equipment capable of providing acceptable surface shall be furnished by the Contractor. This equipment shall meet all requirements of the air pollution control district having jurisdiction. 310-5.8.6 Preparation of Existing Surfsces. Modify the first paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall remove all existing markings and striping, either permanent or temporary, which are to be abandoned, obliterated or that conflict with the plans by wet grinding methods. Removal of striping by high velocity water jet may be permitted when there is neither potential of the water and detritus from the high velocity water jetting to damage vehicles or private property nor to flow from the street into any storm drain or water course and when approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall vacuum ail water and detritus resulting from high velocity water jet striping removal from the pavement immediately after the water jetting and shall not allow such materials to flow in the gutter, enter the storm drain system or to leave the pavement surface. Surface variation limitations for high velocity water jet striping removal shall be the same as for grinding. The Contractor shall not use dry or wet sandblasting in any areas. Alternate methods of paint removal require prior approval of the Engineer. Obliteration of traffic striping with black paint, light emulsion oil or any other masking method other than a minimum 30mm (0.10’) thick asphalt concrete overlay is not permitted. 31046.7 Layout, Alignment, and Spotting. Modify the first paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall establish the necessary control points for all required pavement striping and markings by surveying methods. No layout of traffic striping shall be performed by the Contractor before establishment of the necessary control points. The Contractor shall establish all traffic striping between these points by string line or other method to provide striping that will vary less than 8Omm per 1OOm (l/2 inch in 50 feet) from the specified alignment. The Contractor shall obliterate, straight stripes deviating more than 80mm per 1OOmm (l/ 2 inch in 50 feet) by wet grinding, and then correcting the markings. The Contractor shall lay out (cat track) immediately behind installation of surface course asphalt and as the work progresses. 31046.8 Application of Paint Modify the second paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall apply the first coat of paint immediately upon approval of striping layout by the Engineer. The Contractor shall paint the ends of each median nose yellow. Add the following to the eighth paragraph: The Contractor shall apply temporary traffic stripes in one coat. Temporary traffic stripes shall be maintained by the Contractor so that the stripes are clearly visible both day and night. 310-6.6.10 Measurement and Payment. Modify the first paragraph as follows: Final and temporary traffic striping, curb markings and pavement markings as shown on the plans and required by the specifications shall be included in the lump-sum price bid for temporary and final traffic striping, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Reapplication of temporary stripes and markings shall be repainted at the Contractor’s expense, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. The lump sum prices bid and shall include all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals for doing ail work in installing the final and temporary traffic striping. Conbaot No. NNNN Pqa 18 d 18 Pagea AIA 201, DIVISIONS 1 through 16 Division Section Tile DlVlSlON 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01027 Application for Payment 01035 Changes To Work 01040 Coordination 01095 Reference Standards 8 Definition8 01200 Project Meetings 01300 Submittals 01315 Schedules and Reports 01400 Quality Control 01509 Temporary Facilities 01600 Material 8 Equipment ol630 Substitutions 8 Product Options 01700 Project Closeout 01710 Final Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents 01730 Operating & Maintenance Data 01731 Cutting And Patching 01732 Selective Demolition 01740 Guarantees, Bonds, Service 8 Maintenance DMSION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02511 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving 02721 Landscape Drainage System 02764 Pavement Joint Sealants 02810 Irrigation 02870 Site Furnishings 02900 Landscaping DlVlSlON 3 - CONCRETE 03331 Cast-in-place Architectural Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies DMSION 5 - METALS 05120 Stnlctural steel 05700 Ornamental Metal DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTlON 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WlNDOWS 08800 Glazing 06925 Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Walls DMSION 9 - FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 09912 Painting (Professional Line Products) DIVISION 10 - SPECIALlIES 10200 Louvers And Vents 10425 Signs DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS DMSION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTlON DlVlSlON 14 - CONVEYlNG SYSTEMS DMSION 15 - MECHANICAL DIVISION 16 - ELECTRlCAL 16011 General Requirements, Electrbl 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16110 Raceways and Fiings 16112 utllll Boxes 16120 Wire and Cable (600 vott and below) 16130 Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16450 Grounding 16470 Panel Boards 16475 overcurrent Protection Devices 16520 Exterior Lighting 0 2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises general construction required for Exterior Improvements of the existing Georgina Cole Library, Carlsbad, California. This work generally includes but is not limited to: trash enclosure, mechanical equipment enclosure, selective demolition, new sloped screen walls with glazing and louvers, landscaping, irrigation, asphaltic paving, overlay and patching, new building louvers, complete exterior painting, new signage, new site lighting, miscellaneous electrical and other improvements as indicated. B. The work shall be performed in accordance with applicable Code Requirements and applicable requirements of all other regulatory agencies, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 1990. 2. The 1997 Edition of the Uniform Building Code and 1997 California Amendments (92 California building Code - Part 2, Title 24, CCR). 3. The 1999 Edition of the National Electric Code, and 1997 California Amendments (91 California Electrical Code - Part 3, Tile 24, CCR). 4. The 1997 Edition of the Uniform Building Code Standards. 5. California Code of Regulations, California Administrative Code Title 24, 1997 Edition. 6. California Health and Safety Code. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), “Life Safety Code”, NFPA 101, 1997 Edition. 8. Uniform Fire Code, 1997 Edition. 9. National Earthquake Hazardous Reduction Program (NEHRP). 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All components and systems of the facility as well as all construction procedures, materials, and equipment, whether installed as an integral part of the facility or merely employed incidental to the construction process, shall in all aspects comply with the latest requirement of OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Act) and/or any other regulating body having jurisdiction. During the entire construction period, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain conditions ‘at the job site so as to meet in all respects the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, OSHA. This provision shall cover the Contractor’s employees and all other persons working upon or visiting the site. To this end, the Contractor shall inform himself and his representative of OSHA standards. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01010-1 00014 SECTION 01027 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. The format and detail included in the schedule of values must be based on AIA standard documents and approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to submitting the first Application For Payment. B. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. C. Each prime Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of Values for its part of the Work with preparation of the Contractors’ Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. b. C. d. e. f. 9. h. Contractor’s construction schedule. Application for Payment form. List of subcontractors. Schedule of allowances. Schedule of alternates. List of products. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Owner’s Representative on the 25th day of the month, but in no case later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. D. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. C. Project number. d. Contractor% name and address. e. Date of submittal. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01027-l 00014 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Generic name. b. Related Specification Section. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value. g. Dollar value. h. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. Provide separate line items for stored materials for which the Contractor is requesting payment, refer to Article 9.3.2. 4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 6. Refer to contract for terms regarding payment for mobilization. 7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.02 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent .with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Appkation for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the fom, for Application for Payment. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01027-2 00014 D. E. F. G. H. I. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor’s Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. Transmittal: Submit 5 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Owner’s Representative by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, General Contractor shall submit waivers of mechanics lien and related to the Work covered by the payment. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractot’s Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractors staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor’s principal consultants. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. 3. Test/adjust/balance records. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01027-3 00014 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Maintenance instructions. Meter readings. Start-up performance reports. Changeover information related to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. Final cleaning. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. Advice on shifting insurance coverage’s, Final progress photographs. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion. J. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Completion of Project closeout requirements. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. Certified property survey. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. Removal of temporary facilities and services. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. Change of door locks to Owner’s access. Conditional Upon Payment Lien Waivers from the General Contractor, Subcontractors and their subcontractors and suppliers who have lien rights. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01027-4 00014 SECTION 01035 CHANGES TO WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .Ol MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to Contract Sum or Time, will be issued by the Owner’s Representative. 1.02 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Proposal requests that require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Time if accepted, will be issued by the Owner’s Representative, with a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specification. Proposal requests are for information only and shall not be considered as instruction to stop work in progress, or to execute the change. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, within ten days of receipt, submit an estimate of cost to execute the change. a. Submit all quotes from Subcontractors and subcontractors and suppliers. b. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the amount of purchases to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. C. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts and Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s mark-up. d. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract time. e. The Western Edition of the R.S. Means Estimating Guides will be used as a base for all Change Proposal. 1.03 CONTRACTOR INITIATED CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. When unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request to the Owner’s Representative. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change. Provide a complete description of the change. Indicate effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with amount of purchases to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Section 01630 if the change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 5. The Western Edition of the R.S. Means Estimating Guides will be used as a base for all Change Proposal. July 7, 2000 01035-l 00014 Georgina Cole Library B. Change in Scope: Submit claims for increased costs because of change in scope or in WntraCt documents, whether for purchase amount or Contractofs handling, labor, installation, overhead and profit, within 10 days of receipt or construction change directive authorizing work to proceed. Claims submitted later than 10 days will be rejected. 1. Change order cost amount shall not include Contractor’s or subcontractor’s indirect expense except when clearly demonstrated that the nature or scope of work required was changed from what could have been foreseen from the allowance description and other information in contract documents. 2. No change to the Contractor’s indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower priced materials or systems, of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. When the Owner and Contractor are not in agreement on terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Owner’s Representative may issue Construction Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change and designate method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Time. 2. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. Time and material tickets are to be signed by the Owner’s Representative on a daily basis. 3. After completion of the change submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. B. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the work, shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum. Each change in Contract Price shall be itemized and submitted for approval in the following fonat: 1. Materials (attached itemized quantity, unit cost) 2. Equipment l 3. Labor (attached itemized hours and rates l * 4. Subtotal 5. Subcontractor overhead and profit at a % (cost or credit) 6. P.L., P.D., Compensation Insurance, Social Security, and Unemployed Taxes aof Item 3) (cost or credit) 7. Sales tax: 8. Subtotal July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01035-2 00014 9. General Contractors Overhead and Profit at 3% (cost or credit) 10. Subtotal 11. Bond Premium (not to exceed 1% of Item 10, where applicable) 12. Total l Major equipment or rentals only, small tools to be included in Item 5. t* Direct field labor only, general supervision to be included in Item 5. C. Upon approval of price quotation, a City of Carisbad Change Order, will be issued to modify the Contract Documents. D. No Change Orders or modifications to the Contract shall be valid without the signatures of the parties to the Contract. END, OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0 1035-3 00014 SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate activities included in various Sections to assure efficient and orderly installation of each component. Coordinate operations included under different Sections that are dependent on each other for proper installation and operation. 1. Where installation of one component depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation, schedule activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Where space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining required coordination procedures. Include required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress. Such activities include: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. D. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings where close coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division-16 for requirements for electrical installations. E. Staff Names: Wrthin 10 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of Contractors staff assignments, including Superintendent and personnel at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities, addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies in the Project meeting room, the field office, and at each temporary telephone. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01040-1 00014 F. Inspection of Conditions: The Installer of each component shall inspect the substrate and conditions under which Work is performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. G. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that they are more stringent than requirements in Contract Documents. H. Inspect material immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. I. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing each construction element. Secure each construction element true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. J. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints to obtain the best effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for decision. K. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting installation, - L. Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will ensure the best results. Isolate each part from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. M. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests, to minimize uncovering completed construction for that purpose. N. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install components at standard heights for the application indicated. Refer questionable decisions to the Architect. 0. Cleaning and Protection: During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protectiie covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 1. Clean and maintain completed construction as often as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 2. Limiting Exposures: Supervise operations to ensure that no part of construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful or deleterious exposure. Such exposures include: a. Excessive static or dynamic loading. b. Excessive internal or external pressures. C. Excessive weathering. d. Excessively high or low temperatures or humidity. e. Air contamination or pollution. f. Water or ice. g. Chemicals or solvents. h. Heavy traffic, soiling, staining and corrosion. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01040-2 00014 i. Rodent and insect infestation. i Unusual wear or other misuse. k. Contact between incompatible mateiials. I. Theft or vandalism. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01040-3 00014 SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. July 7, 2000 Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. Indicated: Refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the Drawings; Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications; and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Where terms such as “shown, ” “noted,” “scheduled,” and “specified” are used, it is to help locate the reference. Directed: TemIs such as “directed,” “requested,” “authorized,” “selected,” “approved,” “required,” and “permitted” mean “directed by the Architect or Owner’s Representative,” “requested by the Architect or Owner’s Representative,” and similar phrases. Approve: Used in conjunction with action on submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect’s duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Regulation: Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. Furnish: Means “supply and deliver, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.” Install: Describes operations at site including “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.” Provide: Means “furnish and install, complete and ready for use.” Installer: “Installer” is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term “experienced,” when used with “Installer” means having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size to this Project, and being familiar with precautions required and with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Project Site: Is the space available for construction activities, either exclusively or with others performing other construction on the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the Project is to be built. Testing Laboratories: A “testing laboratory” is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 01095-l 00014 Georgina Cole Library L. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute’s 18Division format and MASTER- FORMAT numbering system. M. Language: Language used in Specifications is the abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and the context so indicates. 1. Imperative language is used generally. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. 2. The words “shall be” shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. N. Abbreviations and Names: Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the “Encyclopedia of Associations,” published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. 0. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01095-2 00014 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. The Owners Representative will schedule a preconstruction conference and organiza- tional meeting at the Project site or other convenient location no later than I5 days after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Attendees: The Owner, Architect and their invited consultants, the Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and author&d to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Designation of responsible personnel. 3. Critical Work sequencing. 4. Use of the premises. 5. Distribution of Contract Documents. 6. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 7. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 8. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 9. Preparation of record documents. 10. Office, Work and storage areas. 11. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 12. Safety procedures. 13. First aid. 14. Security. 15. Housekeeping. 16. Working hours. I .02 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Conduct a pm-installation conference at the site before each wnstruction activity that requires coordination with other construction. The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Owner’s Representative and Architect of scheduled meeting dates. B. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each pm-installation conference. 1. Purchases 2. Deliveries. 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data and qualii control Samples. 4. Possible conflicts. 5. Compatibility problems. 6. Time schedules. 7. Weather limitations. 8. Manufacturer’s recommendations. July 7,200O 01200-l Georgina Cole Library 00014 9. Acceptability of substrates. 10. Temporary facilities. 11. Space and access limitations. 12. Governing regulations. 13. Inspection and testing requirements. 14. Required performance results. 15. Recording requirements. 16. Protection. C. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 1.03 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project site at regularly scheduled intervals at a location approved by the Owner’s Representative. B. Attendees: 1. Owner’s Representative 2. Owner’s Consultants as appropriate 3. Contractor’s Project Manager 4. Superintendent 5. Subcontractor, as appropriate 6. Others as appropriate or as directed by Owner’s Representative C. Agenda: 1. Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. 2. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. 3. Scheduling and Coordination. 4. Topics for discussion as appropriate to the current status of the Project. D. Contractors Construction Schedule: Review. progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. E. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as: 1. Interface requirements. 2. Time. 3. Sequences. 4. Deliveries. 5. Off-site fabrication problems. 6. Access. 7. Site utilization. 8. Temporary facilities and services. 9. Hours of Work. 10. Hazards and risks. 11. Housekeeping. 12. Quality and Work standards. 13. Change Orders. 14. Documentation of information for payment requests. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01200-2 00014 1.04 BILLING MEETINGS A. B. C. D. A. B. C. 1.05 Attend a meeting monthly prior to submittal of the Application for Payment, at a location acceptable to Owner’s Representative. Attendees: 1. Owner’s Representative 2. Owners Consultants as appropriate 3. Contractor’s Project Manager 4. Superintendent 5. Subcontractors, as appropriate 6. Others as directed by Owner’s Representative Agenda: 1. Determination of current schedule progress. 2. Review of work completed based on the cost loaded schedule to be billed in the application for Payment. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contract Schedule prior to the meeting based on information determined at progress meetings. Review schedule revisions and prepare a final revised schedule for submission with the application for payment following the meeting. GUARANTEES, BONDS, AND SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS REVIEW MEETING Attend a meeting eleven (11) months following the date of Substantial Completion. Attendees: 1. Owners Representative 2. User’s Representative 3. Owner’s Consultants as appropriate 4. Contractor’s Project Manager 5. Subcontractors, as appropriate 6. Others as appropriate or as directed by Owner’s Representative Agenda: 1. Review of guarantees, bonds, service and maintenance contracts for materials and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01200-3 00014 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. DEFINITIONS: 1. The terms “Shop Drawings” and “Product Data” as used herein also include, but are not limited to, fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, manufacturers’ standard drawings, descriptive literature, catalogues, brochures, performance and test data, calculations, wiring and control diagrams, all other drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit systems, and methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment, or systems and the positions thereof conform to the Contract Documents. 2. As used herein, the term “manufactured” applies to standard units usually mass- produced. The term “fabricated” means items specifically assembles or made out of selected materials to meet individual design requirements. Shop Drawings shall establish the actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining Work, and amplify design details of mechanical and electrical equipment in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure. B. Manufacturers Instructions: Where any item of Work is required by the Contract Documents to be furnished, installed of performed in accordance with a specified product manufacturer’s instructions, Contractor shall procure and distribute the necessary copies of such instructions to Owner’s Representative and all other concerned parties; and Contractor shall furnish, install or perform the Work in strict accordance therewith. C. Submittal Schedule: 1. Within ten (10) working days after Notice to Proceed, submit a schedule for submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor (the Submittal Schedule). The Submittal Schedule shall be agreed upon by both parties in order that the items covered by these submittals will be available when needed in the construction process and so that each party can plan its workload in an orderly manner. Contractor shall identify on the Submittal Schedule all of the submittal items required by the Contract Documents listing Shop Drawings, product data, literature, sample reports, in-service training and all other submittal items separately. 2. No submittals will be processed before the Submittal Schedule has been submitted to and accepted by Project Architect. 3. In preparing the Submittal Schedule, Contractor shall first determine from the Contract Schedule the date the particular item is needed for the Work. Working backward, Contractor shall indicate on the Submittal Schedule the required number of days for shipment, time for fabrication, field sample or mockup, time for review and approval by Project Architect, time for one (1) re-submittal and similar items to determine the date of the first submittal. 4. The Submittal Schedule shall be adjusted to meet the needs of the construction process and the Contract Schedule. Submit seven (7) copies of the Submittal Schedule and each updated Submittal Schedule. Prove updated Submittal Schedules concurrent with July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01300-l 00014 updated Contract Schedule. Format of Submittal Schedule shall be similar to Contract Schedule. Contractor shall indicate, as a minimum, for each submittal item on the Submittal Schedule. a. A Schedule Activity for preparation of the submittal. b. A Schedule Activity for Project Architect’s approval. c. A Schedule Activity for revisions to the submittal by Contractor. d. A Schedule Activity for re-review by Project Architect. e. A Schedule Activity for fabrication and delivery. 5. In preparing the Submittal Schedule, Contractor will consider the nature and complexity of each submittal item and shall allow ample time for review, revision and/or correction. In preparing the Submittal Schedule, Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with Owner’s Representative to stagger the review of any submittal review activities showing free float. 6. Contractor shall schedule a minimum of ten (10) working days for review of first time submittals. Schedule five (5) working days for review of m-submittals. Contractor is responsible for the time associated with obtaining approvals and re-submitting beyond times indicated are not grounds for a time extension. Cost of re-review of re-submittals, (third submittal) by the Project Architect will be borne by the Contractor. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for m-submittals. a. Allow ten (10) working days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow five (5) working days to re-process each submittal. d. No extensions of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing, B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01300-2 00014 1. Provide a space approximately 4” x 5” on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor’s review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. b. C. d. e. f. 9. h. i. Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Number of title and appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each Submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor’s certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 1.04 SHOP DRAWlNGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle or othewise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. a. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 24” x 36”, but no larger than 36” x 48”. b. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable translucent reproducible print and two (2) blue- or black-line prints for the Architects review. The reproducible print will be returned along with bluelblackline prints. c. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. 6. The use or re-use of the Architect’s or Engineer’s drawings for Shop Drawings is strictly prohibited. Such use will constitute rejection of the Shop Drawing. C Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01300-3 00014 1. Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in Section ‘Project Coordination” and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawjngs or Product Data. 2. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specialty prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as “Shop Drawings.” 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturers printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 3. Preliminary submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required. 4. Submittals: Submit two (2) copies of each required submittal; submit four (4) copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. 5. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer’s possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 1. Mount, display or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect’s Sample. Include the following: a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01300-4 00014 c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. e. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, wlor, pattern and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in wlor, pattern, texture of other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3) that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specifications Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. 3. Preliminary Submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken. 5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the Construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. 1.07 ARCHITECT’S ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor’s responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01300-5 00014 1. ‘No Exceptions Taken” means that no deviations from the Design Concept have been found. 2. “Revise As Noted” means that deviations from the Design Concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. “Revise and Resubmit” means that the submittal must be revised and resubmitted in response to the Architect&/Consultant’s notations. 4. “Sub Specified Item” means that the submittal does not conform to the Design Concept or approved Alternate Materials and/or Product Data. 5. “Rejected” means that the submittal does not conform to the Design Concept or meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 6. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked “Action Not Required.” END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01300-6 00014 SECTION 01315 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for schedules and reports required for proper performance of the Work, including: 1. Preliminary construction schedule. 2. Contractor’s construction schedule. 3. Submittal schedule. 4. Schedule of inspections and tests. 5. Daily construction reports. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section “Applications for Payment” specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section “Project Meetings” specifies requirements for submittal and distribution of meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports. 4. Division 1 Section “Materials and Equipment” specifies requirements for submittal of the list of products. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of other construction activities. 1.03 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: The Contractor shall submit a preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule, within 5 calendar days of the date of Notice to Proceed. 1. Provide a separate time bar for each construction activity. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities. Schedule each construction activity in proper sequence. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. 2. Indicate completion of the Work in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. B. Submittal Tabulation: With the submittal of the Preliminary Construction Schedule, include tabulation by date of submittals required during the first 30 calendar days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead-time for manufacture or fabrication. 1. At the Contractor’s option, show submittals on the schedule, instead of tabulating them July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01315-I 00014 separately. 1.04 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: The Contractor shall secure time commitments for performing critical construction activities from other sub-contractors. The Contractor shall prepare a combined construction schedule for the entire Project. The schedule shall be a comprehensive, multi- sheet, integrated, fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type schedule. The schedule shall be based on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and shall reflect updating and feedback received since the start of the Project. 1. Submit the schedule within 15 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. 2. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. a. If practical, use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the Schedule of Values. 3. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion percentage. 4. For significant construction activities that require longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within the time bar. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion percentage. 5. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. a. Show the activities of each prime contract on a separate sheet. b. Prepare a simplified summary sheet indicating the combined construction activities of the prime Contracts. 6. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on schedule with other construction activities. Include minor elements involved in the overall sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 7. Coordinate Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 8. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect’s administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by the following: 1. Requirements for continued occupancy of the facility. Indicate the erection of temporary egress ramps and safety barriers and enclosures. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01315-2 00014 2. Work by separate contractors. 3. Work by the Owner. 4. Pre-purchased materials 5. Coordination with existing construction 6. Limitations of continued occupancies. 7. Un-interruptible services 8. Partial use prior to Substantial Completion 9. Site restrictions. 10. Provisions for future construction. C. Work Stages: Use crosshatched bars to indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. Such stages include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Subcontract awards. 2. Submittals 3. Purchases. 4. Fabrication 5. Sample testing. 6. Deliveries 7. Installation 8. Testing. 9. Adjusting. 10. Startup and placement into final use and operation D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. For the purposes of this Article, a “major area” is a story of construction, a separate building phase, or a similar significant construction element. 1. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Completion of basic construction b. Completion of Painting C. Completion of the electrical portion of the Work d. Substantial Completion July 7, 2000 01315-3 Georgina Cole Library 00014 E. F. G. 1.05 A. B. C. D. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section “Applications for Paymenr for cost reporting and payment procedures. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. SUBMllTAL SCHEDULE Concurrently with development and acceptance of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 calendar days of the date required for submittal of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values and the list of products as well as the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: 1. Schedule date for the first submittal. 2. Related Section number. 3. Submittal category 4. Name of the subcontractor. 5. Description of the part of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for re-submittal. 7. Scheduled date for the Architect’s final release or approval. Distribution: Following the Architects response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. 1. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 2. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned part of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or other activity where revisions July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01315-4 00014 have been rewgnized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Prepare a schedule of inspections, tests, and similar services required by the Contract Documents. Submit the schedule within 15 calendar days of the date established for commencement of the Work. B. Form: The schedule shall be in tabular form and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Specification Section number. 2. Description of the test 3. Identification of applicable standards 4. Identification of test methods 5. Number of test required. 6. Time schedule or time spans for tests. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests. 8. Requirements for taking samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each service C. Distribution: Distribute the schedule to the Owner, Architect, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where inspections and test are required. 1.07 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following Information concerning events at the site. Submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals: 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 4. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 5. Accidents 6. Meeting and significant decisions 7. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses 9. Emergency procedures July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01315-5 00014 10. Orders and requests of governing authorities 11. Change Orders received, implemented. 12. Services connected, disconnected. 13. Equipment or system tests and startups 14. Partial Completions, occupancies 15. Substantial Completions authorized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01315-S 00014 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART I- GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.02 A. B. 1.03 SUMMARY Administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. Quality control services include inspections and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Owner’s Representative. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. Inspections, tests and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor’s quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Documents requirements. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Owners Representative, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Regularly engaged and specializing, for the preceding five (5) years, in the design and manufacture of the product specified, equivalent in type, size, complexity and physical characteristics to those required. 1. Currently listed, for the product or products which constitute the Work of this Section, by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO), where applicable. 2. Equipped and staffed, and having a demonstrated ability to produce components required within the constraints of the accepted construction schedule. Installer’s Qualifications: Regularly engaged and specializing, for the preceding five (5) years, in the design and manufacture of the product specified, equivalent in type, size, complexity and physical characteristics to those required. 1. Specifically trained and licensed, certified or otherwise approved, in writing, by the manufacturer. 2. Capable of furnishing a verifiable list of not less than five (5) projects of equivalent type and size successfully completed within the preceding two (2) years. RESPONSIBILITIES July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01400-1 00014 A. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for costs of re-testing, including compensation for Owner’s Representative and Owners Consultants where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractors responsibility. 2. Cost of re-testing construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractors responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. 3. Cost of re-testing construction used as temporary facilities by the Contractor is the Contractors responsibility. 4. Costs of testing construction required by Contractor’s substitutions is the Contractors responsibility. 5. Milling inspection and factory testing of steel is the Contractors responsibility. B. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to: 1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. 3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. 4. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. 5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. C. Scheduling: Provide forty-eight (48) hours notice to Owner’s Representative sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for Owner’s Testing Laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When test or inspections are not performed after such notice, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Owners testing Laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred. D. Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspection, tests and similar quality control services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor, except where they are specifically indicated as the Contractors responsibility or are provided by another identified entity. Costs for these services are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing laboratory or other qualified firm, to be known as the “Owners Testing Laboratory,” to perform services which are the Owners responsibility. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01400-2 00014 2. If the Owner requires re-testing, and the results indicate that the Work re-tested complies with the Contract Documents. All costs of such additional tests shall be paid by the Owner. 3. An inspector employed by the Owner and responsible to the Owner’s Representative will be assigned to the Work. Notice of forty-eight (48) hours prior to inspection is required. Request for inspection form will be provided. 4. Holidays/No Inspection: The following is a list of holidays. No work requiring inspection should be scheduled on these dates. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify with the Owners Representative the specific dates of each holiday for each year. New Years Eve Day Labor Day New Years Day Columbus Day Martin Luther King Day Veteran’s Day Presidents’ Day Thanksgiving Day (and day after) Memorial Day Christmas Eve Day Independence Day Christmas Day E. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition, Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 1.04 SUBMRTALS A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test of similar service, to the Owners Representative, in triplicate unless the Contractor is responsible for the service. 1. Owner’s Testing Laboratory and Contractor’s Testing Laboratory shall submit five (5) copies of all reports to Owners Representative, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Owner’s Representative will distribute one (1) copy of the reports to Owner, Owner’s Consultants and Contractor. B. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. C. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. Designation of the Work and test method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete inspection or test data. Test results and an interpretation of test results. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01400-3 00014 10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. 11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on m-testing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification” by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. B. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in California. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for “Cutting and Patching.” B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Reparation and protection is the Contractors responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01400-4 00014 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 2. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Project identification and temporary signs. 2. Waste disposal facilities. 3. Field offices. 4. Storage and fabrication sheds. 5. Temporary stairs. 6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Tree and plant protection. 3. Pest control. 4. Site enclosure fence. 5. Security enclosure and lockup. 6. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 7. Covered walkways. 8. Temporary enclosures. 9. Fire protection. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures” for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section “Execution Requirements” for progress cleaning requirements. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner’s construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01500-l 00014 B. 1.4 A. B. 1.5 A. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal Of Contractor’s Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility. QUALITY ASSURANCE Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA’s ‘Temporary Electrical Facilities,” and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PROJECT CONDITIONS Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owners acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all patties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts. C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch g-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD comer and pull posts, with l-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. D. E. F. 2.2 A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry.” Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. Water Potable. EQUIPMENT General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01500-2 00014 B. Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading. C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. D. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. E. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. B. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. 8. July 7, 2000 01500-3 General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owners easements cannot be used for that purpose. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to,ensure privacy. 3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel. 4. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F. 00014 Georgina Cole Library C. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. C. Provide a separate telephone line for Owner’s use. d. Install a telephone on every second or third story of construction. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. :: Contractor’s home office. Owner’s office. 3. Provide voice-mail service on superintendents telephone. 4. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent’s use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 3. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. 4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section “Execution Requirements” for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01500-4 00014 D. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. 1. Furnish and equip offices as follows: a. Desk and four chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase. b. Water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine cabinet with mirror. C. Coffee machine and supplies, including regular and decaffeinated coffee, filters, cups, stirring sticks, creamer, sugar, and sugar substitute. d. Provide a room of not less than 150 sq. ft. for Project meetings. Furnish room with conference table, 12 folding chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board. 2. Provide resilient floor covering and painted gypsum wallboard walls and acoustical ceiling. Provide operable windows with adjustable blinds and insect screens. 3. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68 deg F. Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 deg F. 4. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. Provide llO- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot intervals, 1 per wall in each room. E. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site. 1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood. 2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. F. Temporary Stairs and Ramps: Until permanent stairs/ramps are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate, and ramps as required for temporary egress to the facility. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. C. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin install portable chain-link enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01500-5 00014 other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. Provide a fenced corridor as required to allow for egress to the facility, which will remain in operation during posted normal operating hours. 1. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate wlors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. 1. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- thick exterior plywood. F. Covered Walkway: Erect a structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of persons to the facility as required when work occurs above the egress path. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner. 5. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- thick exterior plywood. G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials. 5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use fire- retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers. b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire- protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01500-8 00014 4. 5. 6. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures.” END OF SECTION 01500 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01500-7 00014 SECTION 01600 PART 1 - GENERAL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.01 A. B. C. - 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor’s selection of products for use in the Work. Standards: Refer to Section “Definitions and Standards” for applicability of industry standards to products specified. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions (Value Engineering) made after award of the Contract are included under Section 01630, “Product Substitutions.” DEFINITIONS Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as “specialties,” “systems,” “structure,” “finishes,” “accessories” and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. “Products” are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,” “equipment,” “system” and terms of similar intent. a. “Named Products” are items identified by manufacturer’s product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturers published product literature that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. “Materials” are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. “Equipment” is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. SUBMITTALS Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer’s name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractors Contract Schedule including the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01600-l 00014 d. Manufacturer’s name and address. e. Suppliers name and address. f. Installers name and address. g. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period. h. Identification Number on Contract Schedule network. 3. Initial Submittal: Within ten (10) days after date of commencement of the Work, submit three (3) copies of an initial product list schedule for the Owner’s Representative’s review. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. 4. Completed Schedule: Within fifteen (15) days after date of commencement of the Work, submit three (3) copies of the completed product list schedule for the Owner’s Representative’s review. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. 5. Action Required: The Project Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within two (2) weeks of receipt of each product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers of products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Owners Representative’s response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer’s or producers nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data as well as specific requirements in Divisions 2-16 of the specifications: a. Name and product of manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.05 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured products in their original unbroken containers or bundles, clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand and grade seal or model number. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01600-2 00014 B. Handle materials and equipment in a manner to avoid damage to products and their finishes. C. Promptly remove damaged or defective products from the Project site and replace with no adjustment of Contract Sum. D. Imported Materials and Products: 1. Examine materials at the following points: a. At the origination point prior to crating. b. At the port of embarkation (for damage to crates). c. At the port of entry (for damage to crates). d. Immediately following delivery to the Site. 2. If crates show signs of damage, open them and inspect materials and products. 3. Reject damaged or defective products or materials, and replace promptly. 4. Provide a detailed Bill of Goods at each point listed above, indicating quantity and condition of each item. At port locations, Bill of Goods may be accepted unless damage is observed. 1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with seals and labels intact and legible. . . 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Exterior Storage: 1. Store materials and equipment above ground on blocking or skids to prevent soiling, staining and damage. 2. Cover products which are subject to damage by the elements with impervious protective sheet coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. 3. Store sand, rock or aggregate material in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. Arrange storage to allow adequate inspection. D. Periodically inspect stored produck to assure that produck are maintained under specified conditions are free from damage and deterioration. E. Protection After Installation: 1. Prevent damage to materials and equipment. 2. Use whatever protective materials or methods are prevent damage to installed products from traffic, construction operations and weather. Remove protection when no longer required. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions in interior spaces for the Work in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions for the materials and equipment being protected. 1.07 UL OR WARNOCK HERSHEY LABELS: July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01600-3 00014 Materials and equipment, for which labeled standards have been established and their label service is available, shall bear the appropriate label. Do not paint over or cover labels, which shall be maintained in a clean and readable condition. 1.08 MANUFACTURERS’ TRADEMARKS AND NAMES A. Owner’s Representative reserves the right to review and request the removal or redesign of manufacturers’ trademarks and names in items of materials and equipment which will be exposed to view in the completed Work. Such removal or redesign shall be with no adjustment of Contract Sum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named and indicated as “no known equal,” provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted., 2. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Section 01630 provisions concerning “substitutions” to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. “Or equal” clauses or similar language shall be treated as a substitution request and comply with Section 01630. 3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. 5. Manufacturers recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer’s certification of performance. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 016004 00014 6. 7. 8. 9. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified. Visual Matching: Where specifications require matching an established Sample, the Owners Representative’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning “substitutions” for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase “. . . as selected from manufacturers standard wlors, patterns, textures.. . ” or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Owners Representative will select the wlor, pattern and texture from the product line selected. _ PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturers instruction and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01600-5 00014 SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor’s selection of products and product options are included under Section 01600, “Material and Equipment”. B. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.02 PRODUCTS LIST A. Submit five (5) copies of complete list of major products and systems which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate products and systems by Specifications Section Number, and title. C. For products and systems specified only by reference standards, list for each such product or system: 1. Name and address of manufacturer or fabricator. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation, including date. 4. Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s data and literature on: a. Reference Standards. b. Performance test data. c. Certifications. 1.03 OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating “or equal”, or ” or approved equal”, or other such working on Drawings or within Specifications Sections, submit a request for substitutions for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named, but only after submitting bid on specified products and systems. 1. Use attached Substitution Request Form. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Within ten (10) days after notice to proceed, formal requests will be considered for substitutions of products in place of those specified. After the end of that period, substitution requests will be considered only if specified product or system has gone out July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01630-l 00014 of production subsequent to bidding, or specified product or system has been deemed illegal or dangerous by governing agencies having jurisdiction over this project. B. It is the intent of the Owner and Architect to have this project constructed with materials, products and systems originally designed and specified into project. This opportunity to request substitutions is not for the convenience of bidders or contractors to submit bids for materials, products and systems which may be more familiar to them, or having a lesser cost. 1. The Contractor will be required to bear the cost for additional compensation to the Architect and his consultants for evaluation services, redesign or redetailing of the Contract Documents. C Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with an explanation for the request, and include: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutions with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer’s name and address. b. Manufacturer’s literature; identify: 1) Product description 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name, address, and date of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation, as well as servicing agency and installer. 2. ltemized comparison of the proposed substitution with products specified, listing significant variations. 3. Data relating to changed in the construction schedule. 4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 5. Any effect of substitution on in-place construction, or other materials and systems to be installed. 6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. 7. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 8. Designation of availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement materials. D. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request. 2. Acceptance may require extensive revision of Contract Documents. E. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance and authorization of Owner and Architect. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01630-2 00014 F. Only the Owner and his representatives will determine the acceptability of,proposed substitutions. 1.05 REPRESENTATIONS A. In making a legitimate, authoriied formal request for substitution, represent that: 1. A thorough investigation has transpired concerning the proposed product, and it has been determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specifed. 2. The same warranties or bonds, and guarantees will be provided as for that specified. 3. Installation of the accepted substitution will be coordinated into the work; and such changes to in-place work, ordered materials and products, or other work to be in progress prior to installation of the requested substitutions, will be performed without any additional cost to Owner. 1.06 DUTIES A. Requests for substitutions must be expeditiously forwarded for consideration. B. Notification of decisions concerning acceptance or rejection will be in writing, and are final without need for clarification. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01630-3 00014 From: To: Project SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM (To be submitted by Contractor) We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the speckied item for the above project. Section Paragraph specllied Item Proposed Substiiution: Attach complete technical data, including laboratory test, if applicable. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which substitution will require for proper installation. Fill in blanks below: A. B. C. D. E. F. Does the substitution affect dinsions shown on Drawings: The undersigned agrees to pay for all changes to the building design, including engineering and all other costs caused by the requested substitutiin. What effecl does the substitution have on other trades? Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: -Same -Diirent (Explain on attachment) What are the differences in cost between proposed substiiution and specified item? Identify and list savings. The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quaiii are equivalent or superior to speckied item. Submitted By: For Use by Dwneh Representative: A-ptd Accepted Not Signature Dwnefs Consultant: Contractors Name By: Address Date: -A=#& Accepted Not Date: Owner’s Representative: Telephone By: Fax: Date: July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01630-d 00014 SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART I- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Closeout, including, but not limited to Inspection Procedures. B. Related Work: 1. Final Cleaning, Section 01710. 2. Project Record Document Submittal, Section 01720. 3. Operating and Maintenance Manual Submittal, Section 01730. 4. Submittal of Warranties, Section 01740. C. Close-out requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2-16. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request for inspection. I. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documents for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final Project photographs, damage or settlement survey, property survey and similar final record information. B. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. C. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise the Owner’s personnel of changeover in security provisions. D. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the Site, along with construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements. E. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. F. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractors Punch List and request for inspection, the Project Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Owners Representative will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. Final inspection will only be performed for the Project as a whole - partial inspections will not be permitted. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01700-1 00014 2. Allow three (3) days for the Owner’s Representative to prepare the list of items to be corrected. 3. The Owner’s Representative will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 4. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request for inspection. 1. Complete final clean-up requirements as described in Section 01710. 2. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 3. Submit and updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Submit a certified copy of the Owner’s Representative’s final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Owner’s Representative. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Re-Inspection Procedure: The Owners Representative will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Owners Representative. 1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Owners Representative will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: As required in Section 01730. B. Record Documents: As required in Section 01720. C. Cleaning: As required in Section 01710. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01700-2 00014 SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING PART I- GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. 1.02 A. SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial and Final Completion. Special cleaning requirements for specific elements of the Work are included in appropriate sections of Division 2 through 16. General Project Closeout requirements are included in Section 01700, “Project Closeout.” General clean-up and waste removal requirements are included in Section 01500, “Temporary Facilities.” QUALITY ASSURANCE Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waster disposal operations in compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations. I. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. 2. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the premises will not be permitted. 3. Comply with requirements of Southern California Air Quality Management District in effect at time of Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS’ 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning operations when indicated. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of Work to the condition expected from a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers instructions. 8. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Final Completion for the Project. 1. Clean the Project Site, yard and grounds, areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, or rubbish, waste materials, litter and foreign July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01710-1 00014 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. substances. Sweep paved areas clean. Remove petro-chemical spills, stains and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, evenly textured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from the Site. Interior cleaning is specifically required to remove dust, tracked soil and debris caused by construction activities to the satisfaction of the Owner. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free conditions, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. Broom-clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces. Wet mop all interior resilient surfaces and buff as directed by the Owner. Vacuum-clean all interior carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap. Shampoo if required. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that can not be satisfactorily repaired or restored, or that show evidence of repair or restoration. Do not paint over “UL” and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings and other foreign substances. Replace disposable air filters, and clean permanent air filters. Clean exterior exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Clean exterior light fixtures, lamps, globes and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, defective and noisy starters, and ballast in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures. Leave the Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid the Project of rodents, insects and other pests. Comply with regulations of local authorities. D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect previously completed installation during the remainder of the construction period. E. Compliance: Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove waste materials from the Site and dispose of in a lawful manner. F. When extra materials of value remain after completion of associated construction have become the Owner’s property, dispose of these materials and directed. 3.02 CLEANING DURING THE OWNER’S OCCUPANCY 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Should the Owner occupy the Work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibility for interim and final cleaning shall be determined by the Owners Representative in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01710-2 00014 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART I- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Project record documents consisting of: a. Record drawings. b. Record project manual (specifications). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit after substantial completion, but prior to final completion. I. Record drawings: Submit in form of 1 set of reproducible plots and 2 sets of drawing files. a. Submit original marked-up print set. b. Sets shall include all drawings, whether changed or not. 2. Other record documents: Submit originals or good quality photocopies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents of any type for construction purposes. B. Maintain record documents in a secure location separate from Contract Documents at the site accessible by the contractor and the architect during normal working hours. C. Record information within 24 hours or as soon as possible after it is obtained. D. Assign a person on Contractors staff responsible for maintaining record documents. E. Record the following types of information on all applicable record documents: 1. Dimensional changes. 2. New and revised details. 3. Revised routings of piping and conduits. 4. Revisions to electrical circuits. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01720-I 00014 3.02 A. B. - c. D. E. F. G. 3.03 A. B. C. 5. Changes made by modifications to the contract; note RFI and ASI numbers if applicable. 6. New information which may be useful to the owner, but which was not shown in either the contract documents or submittals. RECORD DRAWNGS Maintain a complete set of opaque prints of the contract drawings, marked to show changes. Where the actual work differs from that shown on the drawings, mark this set to show the actual work. 1. 2. Mark location of concealed items before they are covered by other work. Mark either record contract drawings or shop drawings, whichever are best suited to show the change. When the contractor is required by a provision of a modification to prepare a new drawing, rather than to revised existing drawings, obtain instructions from the architect as to the drawing scale and information required. Keep drawings in labeled, bound sets. 1. Mark with colored pencil. 2. Mark work of separate contracts with different wlors of pencils. 3. Incorporate new drawings into existing record sets, as they are issued. Review completed redord set with the architect. Upon authorization by the architect, prepare a full set of transparencies of contract drawings with all record changes marked. The architect will make the original contract drawing files available to the contractor for production of finalized Record Documents. RECORD PROJECT MANUAL Maintain a complete copy of the project manual, marked to show changes. Submit significant miscellaneous records: 1. Field Inspection Records by governing authorities. 2. Testing and qualifications of Subcontractors and Tradesmen. Where the actual work differs from that shown in the project manual, mark the record copy to show the actual work. 1. Include a copy of each addendum and modification to the contract. 2. In addition to the types of information required on all record documents, record the following types of information: July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01720-2 00014 a. Product options taken, when the specification allows more than one. b. Product substitutions. C. Name of the supplier and installer, for each product for which neither a product data submittal or a maintenance data submittal is available. 3.04 TRANSMITTAL TO OWNER A. Collect, organize, label, and package ready for reference. 1. Provide cardboard drawing tubes with end capes for transparencies. 2. Label each document (and each sheet of drawings) with “PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS - This document has bee prepared using information furnished by . ” [insert the contractors name], and the date of preparation. B. Submit to the architect for transmittal to the owner, prior to project closeout, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01720-3 00014 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART I- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: I. Administrative and procedural requirements for operating and maintenance manuals including the following: a. Preparation and submittal of instruction manuals covering the care, preservation and maintenance of architectural products and finishes. B. Related Work: I. Special operating and maintenance data requirements for specific pieces of equipment or building operating systems are included in the appropriate Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. 2. Preparation of Shop Drawings and Product Data are included in Section 01300, “Submittals”. 3. General Closeout requirements are included in Section 01700, “Project Closeout.” 4. General requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents are included in Section 01720, Project Record Documents.” 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintenance Manual Preparation: In preparation of Maintenance Manuals, use personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the equipment or system involved. 1. Where written instructions are required, use personnel skilled in technical writing to the extent necessary for communication of essential data. 2. Where drawings or diagrams are required, use draftsmen capable of preparing Drawings or clearly in an understandable format. 3. Instructions for the Owners Personnel: For instruction of the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel, use experienced instructors thoroughly trained and experienced in the operation and maintenance of the building equipment or system involved. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTAL A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner’s personnel. B. Format: I. Size: 8 % inches by 11 inches. 2. Paper: 20 lb. Minimum, white for typed pages. 3. Test: manufacturers’ printed or neatly typewritten data. 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, which is bound with the text. b. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01730-I 00014 1.04 A. B. C. D. E. 1.05 A. B. 1.06 A. B. C. 5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product and major component parts of the equipment. a. Provide typed description of products and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.” List: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of general subject matter covered in this volume. 7. Binders: a. Commercial quality 3-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. b. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groups. CONTENTS OF MANUAL Table of Content: Include in each volume, neatly typewritten. Identify Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and phone number. List each product included, indexed to the content of the volume. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: 1. Subcontractor or installer. 2. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 3. Identify area of responsibility of each of the previously mentioned parties. 4. Nearest source of supply for parts and replacement. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in the contract documents. PRODUCT DATA Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. Annotate each sheet to: 1. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. 2. Clearly identify the data applicable information. DRAWlNGS Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: 1. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2. Control and flow diagrams. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01730-2 00014 D. Written text: As required to supplement product data for the particular installation. 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service wntract issued: 1. Provide information sheet for the Owners personnel, giving: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Circumstances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.07 MATERIAL AND FINISHES MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit manuals on material and finishes. Provide one section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes, and for products designed for moisture-protection and products exposed to the weather. 1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on care and maintenance of materials and finishes. B. Architectural Products: Provide manufacturer’s data instructions on care and maintenance of architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. 1. Manufacturers Data: Provide complete information on architectural products, including the following, as applicable: a. Manufacturer’s catalog number. b. Size. c. Material Composition. d. Color. e. Texture. . f. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 2. Care and Maintenance Instructions: Provide information on care and maintenance, including manufacturers recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. Provide information regarding cleaning agents and methods that could prove detrimental to the product. Include manufacturer’s recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture-Protections and Weather-Exposed Products: Provide complete manufacturer’s data with instructions on inspection, maintenance and repair of products exposed to the weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes: 1. Manufacturer’s Data: Provide manufacturers data giving detailed information, including the following, as applicable: a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Installation details. d. Inspection procedures. e. Maintenance information. f. Repair procedures. D. Schedule: Provide complete information in the materials and finishes manual, including, but not limited to products specified in the following Sections: July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01730-3 00014 1. Glass: Section 08800. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.08 CONTENT, FOR EACH ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEM, AS APPROPRIATE: A. Description of system and component parts. I. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. 2. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts. B. Circuit directories of panelboards. 1. Electrical service. C. As-built, colorcoded wiring diagrams. D. Operating procedures: 1. Routine and normal operating instructions. 2. Sequences required. 3. Special operating instructions. E. Maintenance procedures: 1. Routine operations. 2. Guide to “trouble-shooting.” 3. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly. 4. Adjustment and checking. F. Manufacturers printed operating and maintenance instructions. G. Original manufacturers parts list, illustrations, current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. 2. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. H. Other data as required in the individual sections. 1. Prepare and include additional data as may be required for instruction of the Owners personnel. 2. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as specified in the individual sections. 3. Provide complete information for products specified in the individual sections. 1.09 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE FOR MANUALS A. Submit two (2) copies of the completed data in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. A copy will be returned with comments after final inspection. No final inspection will be made until the required data has been submitted and found to be satisfactory. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01730-4 00014 B. 1.10 A. B. C. D. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form 10 days after final inspection. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL Work requiring instruction of the Owner’s personnel is specified in the individual sections. Schedule the instructional meeting(s) 2 weeks after instructional manuals have been submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Owner’s Representative. 1. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instructions during other seasons. Upon the Owner’s taking beneficial occupancy or after final acceptance (whichever is earlier), fully qualified representatives of the manufacturers shall fully instruct the Owner’s designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Basis of Instruction: Operating and Maintenance manual. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01730-5 00014 SECTION 01731 - CUT-I-ING AND PATCHING PART I- GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. B. C. D. SUMMARY This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. . DEFINITIONS Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-protection systems. 3. Control systems. 4. Communication systems. 5. Electrical wiring systems. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior wall construction. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architects opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01731-I 00014 A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials, where indicated to match existing. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 32 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer’s written recommendations. I. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01731-2 00014 C. 4. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. I. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished. area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings / Soffits: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings / soffits as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION 01731 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01731-3 00014 SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. B. C. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section “Summary” for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section “Work Restrictions” for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 3. 4. Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. DEFINITIONS Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and shall be removed from Project site. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner’s property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Demolition work shall be scheduled outside the normal operating hours of the facility. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01732-I 00014 C. D. E. 1.5 A. B. C. 1.6 A. B. C. D. E. F. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Ownefs on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 6. Coordination of Ownefs continuing occupancy of existing building. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. QUALITY ASSURANCE Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has special&d in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Standards: Comply with ANSI Al0.6 and NFPA 241. PROJECT CONDITIONS Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner’s operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01732-2 00014 A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. E. 3.2 A. B. C. 3.3 A. EXAMINATION Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. UTILITY SERVICES Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied.or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours’ notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities sewing areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. PREPARATION Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01732-3 00014 B. Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and during selective demolition operations. C. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. F. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01732-4 00014 C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt,,‘and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor- or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily wver openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during -flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager’s requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. D. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner’s storage area off-site as designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete, E. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. F. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01732-5 00014 G. 3.6 A. B. C. D. E. 3.7 A. B. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. PATCHING AND REPAIRS General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. I. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer’s written recommendations. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. I. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 2. 3. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint wats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01732 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01732-6 00014 SECTION 01740 GUARANTEES, BONDS, SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE PART I- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Guarantees from subcontractors shall not limit Contractor’s warranties and guarantees to Owner. Whenever possible, Contractor shall cause warranties of subcontractors to be made directly to Owner. If such warranties are made to Contractor, Contractor shall assign such warranties to Owner prior to final payment. 1.02 FORM OF GUARANTEE A. Submit written guarantees, in the form contained at the end of this Section unless othe&ise shown in individual Sections. I.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble required guarantees, bonds and service and maintenance contracts. B. Number of original signed copies required: 2 each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed and in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item as follows: I. Product or Work item. 2. Firm name, address, telephone number and name of principal. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of guarantee, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of guarantee, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Contractor’s name, address and telephone number, and name of principal. 6. Provide information for Owner’s personnel including proper procedure in case of failure and circumstances which might affect the validity of guarantee or bond. 1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: I. Size 8 X-inch by 1 l-inch sheets punched for 3-ring binder. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Identify each packet on the cover with typed or printed title, “GUARANTEES AND BONDS,” Title of Project and name of Contractor. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 3-ring with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after date of Substantial Completion, prior to request for Final Payment. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 01740-I 00014 B. For Work activities, where Final Completion is delayed materially beyond the date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after Final Completion, listing the date of Final Completion as the start of the Guarantee to Repair Period. 1.06 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit guarantees, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts specified in the individual Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 01740-2 00014 SECTION 02511 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. I.2 A. I.3 A. I.4 A. B. C. D. I.5 A. B. C. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: I. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt overlays. 4. Pavement-marking paint. 5. Wheel stops. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Standard Specification: “The Greenbook”, Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 1997 Edition. 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and Districts, and other information specified. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with requirements indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Architects satisfaction, based on Architect’s evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM D 3666, that the independent testing agency has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0251 l-l 00014 D. E. 1.6 A. B. 1.7 A. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of authorities having jurisdiction for asphalt paving work on public property. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with Al’s ‘The Asphalt Handbook,” except where more stringent requirements are indicated. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer’s labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water- based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. 2.2 A. B. C. 0. AGGREGATES General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed rock; crushed gravel; complying with ASTM D 692. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073. I. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 10 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. ASPHALT MATERIALS Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration- graded material. Prime Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application, Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. Water: Potable. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0251 l-2 00014 2.3 A. B. C. D. E. B. PART 3 3.1 A. B. C. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. B. - EXECUTION AUXILIARY MATERIALS Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental PrOkCtiOn Agency (EPA). Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. Paving Geotextile: Nonwoven polypropylene, specifically designed for paving applications, resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS l-T-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. Color: Blue. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in Al’s “Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types.” I. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Provide mixes complying with the composition, grading, and tolerance requirements of ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes: a. Base Course: 1 inch. b. Surface Course: l/2 inch. Wheel Stops: Provide pre-cast concrete wheel stops, 6’-0” long by 6 in nominal high, fabricated from 3000 PSI concrete minimum strength mix. EXAMINATION Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. Proof-roll subbase using’heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected. COLD MILLING Clean existing paving surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement, including hot-mix asphalt and, as necessary, unbound- aggregate base course, by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 1. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. SURFACE PREPARATION General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. I. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer’s recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of wmpacted- aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose, July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0251 l-3 00014 C. 3.4 A. B. C. 3.5 A. 3.6 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum. 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide, except where infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt surface course. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. JOINTS Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. 2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as described in Al’s “The Asphalt Handbook.” 5. 6. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while hot- mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0251 l-4 00014 D. E. F. G. H. * 3:7 A. B. 3.8 A. B. C. D. 3.9 A. 1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according .to ASTM D 1559, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is Still warm. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus l/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus l/8 inch, no minus. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a lo-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: l/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: i/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is l/4 inch. PAVEMENT MARKING Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with District. Allow paving to cure for 30 days before starting pavement marking. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer’s recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: District will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. . July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0251 l-5 00014 B. C. D. E. F. Additional testing, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979. 1.. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 1559, and compacted according to job-mix specifications. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 02511 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0251 l-6 00014 SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. 1.5 A. B. C. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 02764-l 00014 2.1 A. MATERIALS, GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. 2.2 A. Color of sealant: Black. COLD-APPLIED JOtNT SEALANTS Multicomponent Low-Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation consisting of reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, self- leveling sealant. B. 2.3 A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Multicomponent Low-Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: a. SOF-SEAL; W.R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. C. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant-substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. 3.2 A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturers written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 02764-2 00014 experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturets written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. -D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 02764 July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 02764-3 00014 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. -. B. 1.4 A. B. b C. D. E. 1.5 A. SUMMARY This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. DEFINITIONS Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. Design Mixes: For each type of concrete mix indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer Qualifications: A fim~ experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association’s Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete.” 2. ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 00014 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 03300-l A. B. C. D. E. 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. 2.4 A. B. C. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. b. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 314 by 3/4 inch, minimum. Form-Release Agent: Commercially fomulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spatting of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. 3. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. STEEL REINFORCEMENT Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSl’s “Manual of Standard Practice” from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: CONCRETE MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, or II. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Negligible weathering region, but not less than 1N. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 03300-2 00014 D. 2.5 A. B. C. D. 2.6 2.7 A. B. C. D. 2.8 A. B. 2.9 A. B. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. ADMIXTURES General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry. Water: Potable. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Evaporation Retarder: a. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The). b. Spray-Film; ChemMasters. C. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing 8 Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. r”. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation. Or equal. RELATED MATERIALS Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. CONCRETE MIXES Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. Footings and Matt Foundation: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 03300-3 00014 D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 5 inches. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash, Pouolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pouolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete. G. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturel’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent, unless otherwise indicated. . H. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. -I. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSl’s “Manual of Standard Practice.” 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket infomation. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from l-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class B, 114 inch. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 03300-4 00014 D. E. F. ‘G. H. I. - J. K. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. B. C. 3.4 A. B. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. Coat contact surfaces of forms with fom+release agent, according to manufacturers written instructions, before placing reinforcement. EMBEDDED ITEMS Place and secure dowels, anchorage bolts and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS General: Formwork, for sides of footings, slabs and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. STEEL REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with CRSl’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 03300-5 00014 C. D. 3.5 A. B. C. 3.6 A. B. C. 0. E. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. JOINTS General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least l-112 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for footings and slabs in the middle third of spans. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. 3. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 112 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants,” are indicated, Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete, 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 03300-6 00014 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. . 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractors option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete: 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 118 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade. C. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs. d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding lo-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. l/4 inch. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either F. 3.7 A. 3.8 A. B. C. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 03300-7 00014 3.9 A. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 3.10 A. CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. -B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturers written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3.11 A. JOINT FILLING Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect’s approval. thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 03300-8 00014 B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include wlor and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than l/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete’s durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day’s pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each concrete mix. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. E: Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. END OF SECTION 03300 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 03300-g 00014 SECTION 84810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY 1.2 A. 1.3 A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Ties and anchors. DEFINITIONS Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. 1.5 A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store masonry units on elevated platfons in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 04810-l 00014 B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS B. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for comers, jambs, columns, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside comers. Concrete Masonry Units: UBC Standard 21-4 and as follows: 1. Weight Classification: Medium weight. 2. Provide Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units. 3. Size: Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 8 inches nominal wide (7-518 inches actual), by 8 inches nominal high (7-5/8 inches actual), by 16 inches nominal long (15-518 inches actual). 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturets standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates. 2.2 A. B. C. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color cement. Hydrated Lime: UBC Standard 21-13, Type S. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. E. F. Mortar Cement: UBC Standard 21-14. Masonry Cement: UBC Standard 21-l 1. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than l/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. H. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. Water: Potable. 2.3 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mortar Cement: a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement. b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation. C. <Insert product and manufacturer.> REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; Grade 60. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0481 O-2 00014 2.4 A. B. 2.5 A. 2.6 A. 2.7 A. B. C. D. TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Headed bolts. 2. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. MASONRY CLEANERS Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1Rcup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and l/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. Mortar for Unit Masonry: -Comply with UBC Table 21-A, Proportion Specification. 1. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with UBC Standard 21-19. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with UBC Table 21-C for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION, GENERAL July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 04810-3 00014 A. 8. C. 3.3 A. B. C. D. 3.4 A. B. C. D. 3.5 A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Comply with tolerances in ACI 53O.lIASCE 6ITMS 602 and the following: For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external comers, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than l/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 112 inch maximum. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than l/4 inch in 10 feet, nor l/2 inch maximum. For horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than l/4 inch in 20 feet, nor l/2 inch maximum. LAYING MASONRY WALLS Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at comers, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where cells or cavities to be filled with grout. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 04810-4 00014 B. C. 3.6 A. B. -C. 3.7 A. B. C. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to cany their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of Section 2104.5 of the Uniform Building Code. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 2164.6 of the Uniform Building Code for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including comers, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance.. Prepare joints for sealant application. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution. END OF SECTION 04810 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0481 O-5 00014 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. B. 1.5 SUMMARY This Section includes structural steel. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section “Painting” for surface preparation and priming requirements. SUBMITTALS Product Data for each type of product specified. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip-criiical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS Dl .l “Structural Welding Code- -Steel.” 1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. materials from erosion and deterioration. Protect steel members and packaged 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. SEQUENCING July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 05120-l 00014 A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 8. C. D. E. F. 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. 8. C. MATERIALS Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows: 1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi. Cold Formed Steel: 1. 12 and 16 Gage members: ASTM A-570, Grade 50, Fy = 50 ksi. 2. 18 and 20 Gage members: ASTM A-570, Grade 30, Fy = 30 ksi. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows: 1. Bolts and Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; and carbon-steel nuts. 2. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy. hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts. 3. Washers: ASTM A 36. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc-coating, ASTM A 153, Class C. Welding Electrodes: E70XX (Low hydrogen electrodes). PRIMER Primer: Fabricators standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20. FABRICATION Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 2. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. 3. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop priming operations. 4. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for structural steel. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 05120-2 00014 D. Steel Wall Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall framing to be attached to structural steel framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. 2.4 A. B. SHOP CONNECTIONS Shop install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where’high-strength bolts are indicated. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl .l for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting ,welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. 25 A. SHOP PRIMING Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. B. C. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Galvanized surfaces. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 2 “Hand Tool Cleaning.” 2. SSPC-SP 3 “Power Tool Cleaning.” Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer’s instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection, Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Apply a l-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC’s “Painting System Guide No. 7.00” to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2.6 A. GALVANIZING Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 05120-3 00014 2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specifiid requirements. C. Additional testing, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 -A. 3.3 A. B. C. D. EXAMINATION Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. ERECTION Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. a. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for proprietary grout materials. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 05120-4 00014 E. F. G. 3.4 A. B. 3.5 A. B. C. 3.6 A. B. C. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. FIELD CONNECTIONS Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl .l for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on structuralsteel are included in Division 9 Section “Painting.” Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05120 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 05120-5 00014 SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Metal gates at trash enclosure and cooling tower anclosure. 2. Miscellaneous steel shapes to support gates. 3. Gate hardware. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of ornamental metal. lndude plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate materials and profiles of each ornamental metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. 1. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and other anchorages. Qualification Data: For firms and parsons speclfiad in “Qualll Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilll and experience. lndude lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addressas of architects and owners, and other information Specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualllwtllns: Arrange for installation of ornamental metal specified in this Section by the same firm that fabricated it. Fabricator Qualllcations~ A firm experienced in producing ornamental metal similar to that indicated for this Project and wlth a record of suwessful in-service performance, as wall as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Welding Standards: Quail procedures and personnel acwrding to the following: 1. AWS Dl .l , “Structural Welding Code-Steel.” 2. AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel.” DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store ornamental metal inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Where ornamental metal is indicated to flt to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating ornamental metal without field measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 0570&l ooo14 1.6 A. COORDINATION Coordinate installation of anchorages for ornamental matal items. Furnish setting Drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, induding sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 8. 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. METALS General: Provide metals free from surface blamishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, warn marks, roller marks, stains, diswlorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. Steel and Iron: Provide steal and irun in form indicated to comply with the follking requirements: 1. Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500. 2. Steal Plate, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 3. Steel Sheet: Commemialquality, aWrolled, stretcherWed, carbon-steel sheat complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, Class I, matte finish. 4. Steel decking: l-112 inch deep 26gage minimum steel decking, galvanizad. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Steel Dacking for Gates: Gate Hardware: 1. Hinges: 4 inch by 4 inch galvanized steal hinges, haavy duty rated, sealed ball bearing type, weld to gate frame and tube steel at jamb. 2. Pad lock eye: galvanized pad lock eye, weld to each gate frame for Owner provided pad lock. 3. Cane Bolt: on in-active leaf provide % inch diameter cane bolt by length required, zinc plated steel. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electmdes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable AWS specifications, and as required for wlor match, strength, and wmpatibillty in fabricated items. Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are wrrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide wncealed fasteners for interwnnecting ornamental metal components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental metal components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method. 3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 468 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Cast-in-place anchors. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 06706-2 ooo14 F. 2.3 A. B. C. D. E. I=. 2.4 A. B. C. D. PART 3 3.1 A. 2. Chemical anchors. 3. Expansion anchors. Shop Primer for Galvanlzed Steel: Zincdust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc- coated steel and for compatibility wlth finish paint systems indicated, and complying wlth SSPG Paint 5. FABRICATION, GENERAL Form ornamental metal to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to comply wlth requirements indicated for structural performance. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed fasteners where possible. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or diioring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux, and dress all exposed and contact surfaces. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter wmer joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exdude water penetration. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arria. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimlze field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. IRON AND STEEL FtNlSHES Galvanizing: Hotdip gahranize products made from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. 1. Hot-dip galvanize iron and steel hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging wlth zinc solder and filing off smooth. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly dean ornamental metal of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per applied coat, to surfaces that will be exposed after assembly and installation. EXECUTION INSTALLATION, GENERAL Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing ornamental metal to in- place construction. 05700-3 floo14 B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.2 A. B. 3.3 A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install ornamental metal. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be buitt into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of ornamental metal, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such wrrective work. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS apecifrcation, for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in conectlng welding work. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed welded joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent surfaces. Install gates plumb and in alignment, provide stop taps as required to hold gates in dosed position with Owner provided pad lock. CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after eredion, dean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. PROTECTION Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05700 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 05700-4 orIo14 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. SUMMARY This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Metal flashing. 2. Metal eave extension. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. SUBMIT-I-ALS Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: 1. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 .O mm), unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275) commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275) lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanited steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1 .O mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 07620-l 00014 C. 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 2.3 A. B. C. D. E. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated, commercial-quality steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 755, G 90 (ASTM A 755M, Z 275) coating designation, coil coated with high- performance fluoropolymer coating as specified in “Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet Finish” Article; not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style lb. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. FABRICATION, GENERAL Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 07620-2 00014 F. G. H. I. J. 2.4 A. B. C. 2.5 A. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or glazing tape; Tremw Polyshim II, or equal, butyl tape with continuous built in shim. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. Wall cap and miscellanous flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.125 inch, unless otherwise noted. Eave Extension: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.09 inch, unless otherwise noted. ALUMINUM FINISHES High-Performance Organic Coating: as specified below. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 3-Coat Coating System: Manufacturers standard 3-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss for wall caps: PPG Duranar XL Coating #UC51 131 “XL Silver”. b. Color and Gloss for Eave Extension: PPG Duranar UC43350 “Bone White”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturers installation instructions, and SMACNA’s July 7,200O 07620-3 00014 Georgina Cole Library B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.3 A. B. “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.” Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to resutt in waterproof and weather- resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). Sealed Joints: Fom~ nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 07620-4 00014 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. - 1.2- A. 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. B. C. SUMMARY This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Joints between metal panels. b. Joints between different materials listed above. ii: Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. Other joints as required for a weather tight construction. Contractor is required to inspect all exterior sealant building joints to establish extent of work. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section “Pavement Joint Sealants” for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing. 2. Division 8 Section “Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls” for structural and other glazing sealants. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to, those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer’s technical representative present. 5. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 07920-l 00014 1.5 A. B. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet. B. C. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS 6. 7. a. Install joint sealants in 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long joints using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches (50 mm) long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch (25 mm) from cross-cut end of 2-inch (50-mm) piece. C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch (50-mm) piece of sealant between cross-cut end and l-inch (25-mm) mark; pull firmly at a go-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts ‘while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. d. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multiwmponent materials. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 07920-2 00014 A. 2.2 A. 8. 2.3 A. 24 A. B. 2.5 A. B. C. PART 3 3.1 A. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. MATERIALS, GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range for each condition, match existing for limited areas of repair. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. JOINT-SEALANT BACKING General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, pnmers, and other joint fillers: and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin, 2. Type 0: Open-cell material. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Inspect the entire existing building for sealant and joint conditions; walls, soffits and all changes of material and all existing sealant joints. Prior to field painting of structure; repair and or replace deteroriated sealant joints. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 07920-3 00014 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. :: Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturers written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 07920-4 00014 E. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. 3.6 A. B. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide wncave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated or directed. CLEANING Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by. manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: E: Chem-Calk 2641; Bostik Inc. Vulkem 227; Mameco International. :: Elasto-Thane 920 Gun Grade; Pacific Polymers, Inc. Dynatred; Pecora Corporation. F. PSI-270; Polymeric Systems, Inc. NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: a. Chem-Calk 900; Bostik Inc. b. Vulkem 921; Mameco International. c;: PR-255; Ohio Sealants, Inc. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corporation. TT Flexiprene 1000; Polymeric Systems, Inc. PSI-901; Polymeric Systems, Inc. 9. SM7100 Permathane; Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. DyMonic; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 07920-5 00014 3. 4. 5. Class: 25. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. END OF SECTION 07920 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 07920-6 00014 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Walls. DEFINITIONS Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 25 psf. b. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: % inch. Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass and of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 1. Each color of tinted float patterned glass. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 08800-l 00014 1.5 A. B. C. D. - E. F. 1.6 A. 1.7 A. 2. For each color of exposed glazing sealant indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations for Tinted and Coated Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light- reducing float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI 297.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA’S “Glazing Manual” and “Laminated Glass Design Guide.” DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other Muses. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PRODUCTS TINTED PATTERNED GLASS: Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II (patterned glass, flat), Class 2 (Tinted Blue), Form 3 (patterned), Quality q3 (glazing), Finish fl (patterned one side); with ceramic frit color white on #2 surface. Pattern to be 1 inch nominal opaque white squares with l/l6 inch clear separation, or as approved by Architect. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08800-2 00014 2.2 A. B. 2.3 2.4 A. B. C. D. E. 2.5 A. B. ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers’ written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range for this characteristic. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. GLAZING TAPES 1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 08800-3 00014 C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. 3.3 -A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. EXAMINATION Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at comers. 2. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. GLAZING, GENERAL Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide l/8-inch (s-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08800-4 00014 I. 3.4 A. B. C. 3.5 A. B. C. D. E. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. SEALANT GLAZING (WET) Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. PROTECTION AND CLEANING Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08800-5 00014 SECTION 08925 - STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Two-sided, structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall incorporating an aluminum framing system, with vertical butt silicone joints and captured horizontal joints. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section “Glazing.” 2. Division 10 Section “Louvers and Vents.” SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on preconstruction testing: 1. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure. Glazing-to-glazing joints accommodate thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and system, prevent glazing-to-glazing contact, and maintain required edge clearances. Tensile or shear stress in structural silicone sealant joints is less than 20 psi. Structural silicone sealant does not carry gravity load of glazing. Wind Loads: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers’ ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” 6.4.2, “Analytical Procedure,” whichever are more stringent. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 11360 of clear span, 3/4 inches maximum, where plaster or gypsum board surfaces are subject to bending. 2. Test Performance: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system that does not evidence sealant failures, other material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category. Seismic Loads: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” Section 9, “Earthquake Loads,” whichever are more stringent. Thermal Movement: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental effects. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08925-l 00014 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. H. I. J. 1.i A. B. C. D. E. 1.4 A. B. Structural Support Movement: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system that accommodates structural movements including, but not limited to, sway, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. Structural Sealant: Provide structural silicone sealant that withstands tensile and shear stresses imposed by system without failing adhesively or cohesively. 1. Provide sealant that fails cohesively before sealant releases from substrate when tested for adhesive compatibility with each substrate and joint condition required. 2. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from a substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 3. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within a joint but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealants internal strength. SUBMITTALS Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer’s standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements in “Quality Assurance” Article. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include sealant manufacturer’s interpretation of test results for sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. QUALITY ASSURANCE Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing structural-sealant-glazed July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08925-2 00014 curtain wall systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1.5 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2; A. B. C. D. E. 2.3 A. B. C. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. Arcadia 3. Vistawall, or equal. 4. Basis of design: Vistawall E-Z Set, Butt Glazing System, 2” x 4”. MATERIALS Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section “Glazing.” Glazing Tape: Tremco Polyshim II, or equal, butyl tape with continuous built in shim. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, nonmigrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and system performance requirements. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. SEALANTS General: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants with insulating-glass units. Structural Silicone Sealant: Type recommended by sealant and system manufacturers that complies with ASTM C 1184 requirements, is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, and is specifically formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 2. Tensile Strength: 100 psi minimum. 3. Provide sealant with modulus of elasticity that will not allow movement of more than 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system design. Secondary Sealant: Compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact and that accommodates a 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when measured according to ASTM C 719. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 08925-3 00014 2.4 A. B. C. 2.5 A. 8. C. D. E. F. G. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. COMPONENTS Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturets standard high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall. 1. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. 2. 3. Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, provide reinforcement to receive fastener threads. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing members, unless otherwise indicated. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. FABRICATION General: Fabricate structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system according to Shop Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA’s “Glazing Manual.” Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by applying sealant tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section “Glazing,” unless otherwise indicated. 1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 2. Install structural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08925-d 00014 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 8. Finish designations prefixed by AA wnfom, to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Organic Coating: as specified below. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer9 written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 3-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard 3coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss: PPG Duranar XL Coating #UC51 131 “XL Silver”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3Yl EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or accommodations acceptable to Architect have been made. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturers written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. D. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. E. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section “Glazing,” unless otherwise indicated. 1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturers written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 2. Install structural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions, 3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 08925-5 00014 F. Erection Tolerances: Install structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Level: 118 inch in 20 feet. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1116 inch. 3. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to l/8 inch in 12 feet; l/2 inch over total length. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08925 July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 08925-6 00014 SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART I- GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. C. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. C. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Metal lath and accessories. 2. Portland cement plaster. 3. Stucco finishes. 4. Existing portland cement plaster repair and texturing for paint. SUBMITTALS Product Data for each product specified. Samples for verification in units at least 12 inches square of each type of finish indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Material Certificates: Submit certificate signed by manufacturer for each kind of plaster aggregate certifying that materials comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles, labeled with manufacturer’s name, product brand name, and lot number. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Expanded-Metal Lath: a. California Expanded Metal Products Co. July 7, 2000 09220-I 00014 Georgina Cole Library 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. B. C. D. 2. 3. b. Dale//lnwr Industries, Inc. C. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. United States Gypsum Co. 7 Western Metal Lath Co. Or equal. Metal Accessories: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO). b. Dale//lnwr Industries, Inc. s: Fry Reglet Corporation. Gordon, Inc. e. United States Gypsum Co. f. Western Metal Lath Co. 9. Or equal. stucco: a. California Stucco Products Corp. b. IPA Systems, Inc. :: United States Gypsum Co. Or equal. LATH Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C 847 for material, type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below. 1. Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from sheet metal conforming to the following: a. Galvanized Steel: Structuralquality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60 minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Rib Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Flat, rib depth of not over 118 inch. 1) Weight: 3.4 Iblsq. yd.. Paper Backing: Where’ paper-backed lath is indicated, provide the following material factory bonded to back of lath. Comply with FS UU-B-790, Type I, grade and style as indicated below: I. Vapor-Permeable Paper: Grade D, Style 2. ACCESSORIES General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. I. Aluminum Components: Alloy, temper, and finish recommended by manufacturer with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. 2. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G40 minimum coating designation. Metal Comer Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated from zinc- alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch- diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. Cornerbeads: Small nose comerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. 1. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 09220-2 00014 E. F. G. 2.4 A. 8. - c. D. E. F. 2.5 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. 2. One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges. Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer’s standard ‘J” profile with weep holes designed for use at sill plate line to form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from zinccoated (galvanized) steel sheet. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. PLASTER MATERIALS Base-Coat Cements: Type as indicated below: 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Cement Color: Gray. Factory-Prepared Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer’s standard factory-packaged blend of portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II; hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C 206 or ASTM C 207; aggregate, ASTM C 897; and compatible with base coat and finish texture indicated; in wlor indicated below: 1. Color as indicated, manufacturer’s standard product consisting of white or gray cement combined with colorfast mineral pigments and aggregates selected for color. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 system and as indicated below: I. Manufactured or natural sand, white in color. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, l/2 inch long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932, liquid copolymer primer / admixture. Acid-Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed 1 part to not less than 6 nor more than 10 parts water. Dash-Coat Material: 2 parts portland cement to 3 parts fine sand, mixed with water to a mushy- paste consistency. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), nonperforated. Line Wire: 0.0475-inch- diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized), soft, annealed steel wire. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09220-3 00014 I. J. 2.6 A. B. C. -D. E. F. G. 2.7 A. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. Powder drive pins: % inch diameter by l-l/2 inch long powder driven pins for attachment of lath to concrete block walls. PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. Base-Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability. Fiber Content: Add frber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer’s written instructions but do not exceed 1 Ib/cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. Three-Coat Work over Metal Lath: Base-coat proportions as indicated below: I. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 314 parts lime, 2-l/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 2. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 314 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate. Job-Mixed Finish Coats for painted cement plaster and plaster repair: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials to comply with the following requirements: 1. Proportions using sand aggregates as indicated below: a. 1 part portland cement, 314 to I-112 parts lime, 3 parts sand. Factory-Prepared Finish Coats: Add water only; comply with finish coat manufacturer’s written instructions. Stucco Finish Coat: Add water only; comply with stucco manufacturer’s written instructions. MIXING Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXISTING PLASTER INSPECTION Contractor shall provide a field inspection for all of the existing wall and soffit plaster conditions. Delaminated from substrate plaster to be removed and replaced in total. Cracked but sound plaster to be repaired, fill cracks and retexture. Contractor to provide a written report of plaster conditions, with photographs of each elevation noted with extent of repair and replacement work. Contractor shall include in his bid a minimum of 10% replacement of existing surface area and 20% repair of existing surface area. Architect shall walk the site with Contractor and approve limits of this work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 092204 00014 A. B. C. D. 3,3 A. 3.4 A. B. C. D. E. Standards: Comply with MUSFA 920, “Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring,” and with requirements of ASTM C 1063. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition or wall abuts overhead structure, sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. Install slip or cushion-type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system. LATHING Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced MUSFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards. 1. Suspended and furred ceilings using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, rib lath. 2. Vertical metal framing and furring using 3.4-lblsq. yd. minimum weight, rib lath and stud framing as indicated. PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING Inspect all existing exterior cement plaster for soundness and bond to concrete or masonry substrate. Unsound plaster and deteriorated / loose bond to substrate shall be removed and replaced. Remove efflorescence from plaster finish with a light sand blast or high pressure water blast. Cracks visible in plaster at 5’-0” from the face of finish shall be cleaned and rodded 118 inch to 3/16 inch deep. Patch all cracks with a bonding agent and plaster coat, flush with existing surface, and texture to match existing texture. The extent of texture area shall be extended to the panel dimensions abutting a control joint or adjacent material, unless directed by the Architect. Contractor is responsible for duplication and blending texture repairs to be seamless and uniform. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. Etch existing concrete and existing concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application, existing surfaces to be repaired and refinished. Scrub with acid-etching solution on previously wetted surface and rinse thoroughly with clean water. Repeat application, if necessary, to obtain adequate suction and mechanical bond of plaster (where dash coat, bonding agent, or additive is not used). Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application, existing surfaces to be repaired and refinished; comply with manufacturers written instructions for application. Apply dash coat on concrete surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Moist-cure dash coat for at least 24 hours after application and before plastering. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09220-5 00014 F. 3.5 A. 3.6 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch-coat work. INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at comers; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations: 1. External Corners: Install comer reinforcement at external comers. 2. Terminations of Plaster Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect: a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction d.irectly behind plaster membrane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 14 feet in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-l/2 to 1. :: Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft.. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. e. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. PLASTER APPLICATION Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 118 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a IO-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish wat at junctures with metal. Number of Coats: Apply plaster of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: I. Three Coats: Over metal stud framing at walls and soffits, and concrete block walls at trash enclosure: a. Metal lath. 2. Two Coats, repair areas only: Over the following plaster bases: a. Concrete or concrete block existing walls I foundations, cast-in-place when surface condition complies with ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded to solid base. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements: July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 09220-6 00014 I. 3.7 A. 3.8 A. B. I. Float Finish at Trash and Mechanical enclosures: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of l/8 inch to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine-textured finish matching Architects sample, sand float finish without trowel marks. 2. Existing plaster repair and textured to match existing plaster texture without visible patch termination lines. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in “Annex A2 Design Considerations.” CUTTING AND PATCHING Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. CLEANING AND PROTECTING Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or othenrvise damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09220 . July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09220-7 00014 SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that .the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. I. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: Z: Prefinished Aluminum Glazing System Concrete Bollards :: Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. C. Pipe spaces. d. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: ;: Valve and damper operators. Linkages. :: Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section “Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving” for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel” for shop priming structural steel. 3. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for shop priming ferrous metal. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85degree meter. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 09912-I 00014 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. B. 1.5 A. 2. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60degree meter. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60degree meter. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. I. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer’s wtalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturers Information: Manufacturel’s technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, wlor, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit four (4) Samples on the following substrates for Architects review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: 4-inch- square Samples for each wlor and finish. b. Concrete Unit Masonry: 4-by-8-inch Samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. C. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch- square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch- long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. Qualification Data: For Applicator. QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturers original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09912-2 00014 B. 1.6 A. B. C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. I. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. PROJECT CONDITIONS Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable for use on this project: Dunn Edwards Corporation, Vista Paint Corporation, Sherwin Williams Company and Carboline Paints. Dunn Edwards product numbers listed. Dunn Edwards published cross over chart will be used to establish to establish product verifcation of the products specified in this paragraph. B. Equivalent products made by other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with standard substitution procedures as modified herein; product data and test data show to equivalence to Dunn-Edwards listed products will be the basis of review. If a substitution of an “or equal system” is to be considered for review submit detailed material comparison to the specified Dunn-Edwards product with material tests results is required. The Architect does not have material data on file for comparison. Contractor is required to research both the specified product and the proposed substitution product. 1. Comparisons required in a tabular format in direct comparison to the specified Dunn- Edwards specified product form Manufacturers published product information sheets ( with copies of the data for each paint): a. Finish Gloss b. Viscosity c. VOC Content d. Solids by volume e. Weight per gallon f. Composition by weight g. Recommended film thickness h. Dry time 2. Tests: method and type; may vary by product usage, but the identical test method must be used in comparison to the specified Dunn-Edwards product. If test information is not available from Dunn-Edwards, obtain the specified product and have it tested to produce the comparison data at an independent lab. Sub- mit the following results in tabular format in direct comparison to the specified Dunn-Edwards product: a. Salt spray resistance. b. Pencil Hardness c. Flexibility July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09912-3 00014 2.2 A. B. d. Taper Abrasion e. Impact Resistance f. Accelerated UV Exposure g. Accelerated Weatherability 3. Failure to provide direct tabular comparisons on the initial submittal substitution request will be automatically rejected, and will not be reconsidered. 4. Substitutions will only be considered within the substitution period. PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Material Quality: Provide manufacturers best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer’s product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer’s material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Match Architects samples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicators acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. PREPARATION General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 09912-4 00014 C. D. E. 3.3 A. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturets written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blastcleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturers written instructions. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC’s recommendations. a. Sand metal clean. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturefs wriien instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. APPLICATION General: Apply paint according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 099124 00014 7. 8. 9. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged wvers to match exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce-a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer’s written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints-and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep’s wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. . D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having “all-service jacket” or other paintable jacket material. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole. Library 09912-6 00014 I. J. K. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. B. 3.6 A. B. C. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely wver surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Completed Work: Match approved samples for wlor, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. PROTECTION Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. Providi “Wet Paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply.with procedures specified in PDCA Pl. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE Concrete and Stucco: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, and stucco substrates: Flat Acrylic Finish: First Coat EFF-STOP, Acrylic Masonry Primer/Sealer (W 709) Second Coat ACRI-FLAT, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish (W 704) Third Coat ACRI-FLAT, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish (W 704) Concrete Unit Masonry (Interior exposed block at Trash Enclosure): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete unit masonry: Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: First Coat BLOCFIL, Concrete Block Filler, Smooth (W 305) Second Coat ACRI-FLAT, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish (W 704) Third Coat ACRI-FLAT, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish (W 704) Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. Ferrous Metal - Gloss - Polyurethane: First Coat INTERSEAL, High Build Industrial Epoxy Primer (670HS) Second Coat INTERTHANE, ACRYLIC URETHANE, Pig. (990HS) Third Coat INTERTHANE, ACRYLIC URETHANE, Pig. (990 HS) July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09912-7 00014 D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces: Galvanized Metal - Gloss: Pretreatment GALVA-ETCH, Etching Liquid (GE 123) First Coat GALV-ALUM, Quick-Dry Galvanized/Aluminum Primer (QD 43-7) Second Coat COMPO, Exterior Alkyd Primer/Undercoater (42-l) Third Coat SYN-LUSTRO, High-Performance Alkyd Gloss Enamel (10 Series) Fourth Coat SYN-LUSTRO, High-Performance Alkyd Gloss Enamel (10 Series) END OF SECTION 09912 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 09912-8 00014 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. 13 A. 1.4 A. B. C. 1.5 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 2. Blank-off panels for louvers. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining construction. DEFINITIONS Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 25 Ibf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. 2. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects: a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product specified. Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations. 1. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples of same thickness and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes involve normal wlor and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. QUALITY ASSURANCE Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 10200-l 00014 B. C. 1.6 A. PART 2 23 A. 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. 2.3 A. - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Airolite Co. 2. Cesw Products. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. Industrial Louvers, Inc., or approved equal. MATERIALS Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use Phillips Rat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanited anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. FABRICATION, GENERAL Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints July 7, 2000 10200-2 00014 of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of louvers that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish. Welding Standards: As follows: 1. Comply with AWS Dl.2, “Structural Welding Code-Aluminum.” 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Georgina Cole Library B. C. D. E. F. -G. H. I. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Louver Schedule: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades as follows: 1. Louver Type A: located at existing building: 4 inches deep, match Construction Specialties, Inc. Model #A4105 with 0.081” thick blades and frame members. Color: match Duranar XL Speciality Coating XUBC (UC55028) Bright Silver. Provide insect screen at interior face. Provide black blank off panels to match existing louver system layout. 2. Louver Type B: located at new glazed fence /. wall l-3/8 inches deep, match Construction Specialties, Inc. Model #1302 with 0.084” thick blades and frame members. Color: match Duranar (UC43350) Bone White. 3. Louver Type C: located at trash and mechanical enclosures: l-3/8 inches deep, match Construction Specialties, Inc. Model #1302 with 0.084” thick blades and frame members. Color: match Duranar (UC43350) Bone White. Provide black blank off aluminum panels at interior. Exterior louver comers to be continuous without frame, miter cut, factory reinforced and blades locked together. 2.5 A. 8. in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates and without interrupting blade- spacing pattern. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials’ tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel type, unless otherwise indicated. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide horizontal mullions, unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view; unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. LOUVER SCREENS General: Provide louvers with screens at locations indicated, General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following requirements: July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 10200-3 00014 C. D. E. 2.6 A. B. 2.7 A. B. 2.8 A. B. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each wmer and at 12 inches O.C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered comers to louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at comers with clips. 2. Finish: Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for permanently securing screen mesh. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As follows: 1. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 18-by-18 mesh, O.OOg-inch wire. BLANK-OFF PANELS General: Fabricate blank-off panels from materials and to sizes indicated and comply with the following requirements: 1. Finish: Same as finish applied to louvers, but black color. 2. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless-steel sheet-metal screws. Uninsulated, Blank-off Panels: Metal sheet complying with the following requirements: 1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, as follows: a. Thickness: 0.050 inch, unless othewise indicated. FINISHES, GENERAL Comply with NAAMMs “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish louvers after assembly. ALUMINUM FINISHES Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-Cl2C42Rlx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers’ written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer Three-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard three-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear ftuoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss: as specified in this section, see louver schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 10200-4 00014 A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation Of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.2 A. B. INSTALLATION Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. D. E. F. G. 3.3 A. B. C. D. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants applied during louver installation. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10200 Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches wlor and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 10200-5 00014 SECTION 10425 - SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 8. C. D. 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 SUMMARY This Section includes tha foflowlng types of signs: 1. Dimensional letters and numbers. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for aach type of sign spa&ad, including d&ails of construdion relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large- scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide massage list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to parmanant wnstruction, provide setting drawings, templates, and dir&ions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. Provide detail of rausa of existing sign mounting posts for the stone panels. 3. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. Samples: Provide the following samples of aach sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for verification of wlor, pattern, and texture salacted and compliance with requirements indicated: a. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each dimensional letter type required, showing letter style, color, and material finish and method of attachment. QUALITY ASSURANCE Sign Fabricator Qualifiwtions: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indiwted for this Project, with a record of sucwssful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. SingleSource Responsibilii: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from ona source of a single manufacturer. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and proftles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. PROJECT CONDITIONS July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 10425-l ooo14 A. Field Measurements: Take fiefd measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule wtth construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. -B. C. 2.3 A. 2.4 A. B. C. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters: ii: ASI Sign Systems, Inc. Metallic Arts, Inc. C. Vomar Products, Inc. MATERIALS Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabric&ad from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped gahranized anchors and insarts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for comxion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by wsting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp comers, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Metal: Aluminum. 2. Letter Height: as indicated. 3. Letter Style: Helvetica. FINISHES Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign. material that requires selectii of materials with integral or applied wlors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide wlor matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standards. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and applications recommendations. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Finish: AA-M31C2lA31 (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Fine matte etched finish; Anodii Coating: Class II Architectural, dear film thicker than 0.4 mil). PART 3 - EXECUTION July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 104252 ooo14 3.1 A. B. C. 3.2 A. INSTALLATION General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defacts in appearance. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Use existing sign l&tar mounting posts for the sign lettars on stone wall panels. CLEANING AND PROTECTION After installation, claan soiled sign surfaces according to the manufactura~s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 10425 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 10425-3 ooo14 # CSI NAME OF SPECIFICATION 16011 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16110 16112 16120 16130 16140 16450 GROUNDING 16470 PANELBOARDS 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16520 EXTERIOR LIGHTING GEORGINA COLE LlBRA?Y (VBKE# 2000-032) DIVISION 16 INDEX ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS RACEWAYS AND FllTlNGS UTILITY BOXES WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLT AND BELOW) OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES WIRING DEVICES July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 2000-032 spec index-l 00014 0 / SECTION 16011 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICATION A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 are part of this work and apply to all work specified under Division 16 as fully as if repeated herein. 1.2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Prior to starting excavation or trenching, the Contractor shall perform an underground Site Survey utilizing an independent electronic locator service company to verify the exact location of all existing underground utility piping and conduits. The Contractor shall submit for approval a site survey report to the Architect within five (5) working days after the survey is performed. The Site Survey Report shall show the location for existing utilities and identify any possible conflicts between the new work and existing utilities. Submit the site survey report under Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. B All existing electrical systems shall remain fully operational until new systems are completely installed, tested and ready for final connection. Demolition work shall not start until new systems are completely installed, tested and approved and fully operational. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and work of the other sections shall permit. Size and location of equipment is drawn to scale wherever possible. B. Drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor. Exact locations, distances and levels will be governed by the building. The Contractor shall make use of data in all the contract documents to verify information at the building site. C. In any case where there appears to be a conflict or ambiguity between that which is shown on the electrical drawings or in the electrical specifications and any other part of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify and secure directions from the Architect. D. Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each other. Where a conflict or ambiguity exists between the requirements of the drawings and the specifications, request clarification. Do not proceed with work without direction. E. The Architect shall interpret the drawings and the specifications. The interpretation by the Architect as to the true intent and meaning thereof and the quality, quantity and sufficiency of the materials and workmanship furnished thereunder shall be accepted as final and conclusive. F. In the case of conflicts or ambiguities not clarified prior to the biding deadline, use the most costly alternative (better quality, greater quantity and larger size) in preparing the bid. A July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16011-l 00014 G. 1.4 A. B. C. D. E. I=. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. B. 1.7 A. clarification will be issued to the successful bidder as soon as feasible after the award and, if appropriate, a deductive change order will be issued. Where items are specified in the singular, this division shall provide the quantity as shown on drawings plus any spares or extras indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. DEFINITIONS Definitions of Electrical terms will be found in the National Electric Code (NEC) 1996. Whenever an Electrical term is used in this specification which is defined in the Code, the definition given will govern its meaning in this specification. Whenever an Electrical term is used which does not appear in the Code, the definition to govern its meaning in these specifications will be found in the American Standard Definitions of Electrical Terms, published by the American Institute of Electrical Engineers, 33 West 39th Street, New York City. “Provide” means furnish, install, connect and test unless othenvise noted. The words “conduit” and “duct” are used interchangeably and have the same meaning. “UFER” Ground: See Section 16450, “Grounding”. EXAMINATION OF SITE Examination of the building site shall be made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare it with the drawings and specification and satisfy himself as to the conditions under which work is to be performed. The Contractor shall, at such time, ascertain and check the locations of existing structures or equipment which may affect his work. PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS Permits, fees and inspections shall be arranged for and paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall present to the Architect properly signed certificates of final inspection before work will be accepted. RULES AND REGULATIONS Rules and regulations shall be complied with as set forth in all applicable National, State and local regulations, ordinances and statutes including, but not limited to, the latest editions of the following publications and all supplements thereto that may be in effect. 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997. 2. NFPA-70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 1996, hereinafter referred to as the “Code”. 3. List of electrical fittings, published by the Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 4. NFPA-101, Life Safety Code, 1997. 5. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 1601 l-2 00014 B. Whenever the drawings or specifications require material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of a higher standard or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the drawings and specifications shall take precedence. 1.8 STANDARDS OF COMPLIANCE A. When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of an organization such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence, unless otherwise specified in the individual sections of Division 16. B. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a certificate from a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), which is competent to perform an acceptable test and is approved by OSHPD. Architect. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization’s test methods and that the item conforms to the specified organization’s standard. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal requirements for Division 16 shall be in accordance with Division 1 except as modified herein. All time requirements shall be based on the notice to proceed date of the General Contract. All materials and equipment furnished under Division 16 shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. Such approval shall be in writing from the Architect including that which is exactly as specified. Any materials or equipment installed without written approval shall be subject to immediate removal. Approval of material or equipment shall in no way obviate compliance with the contract documents. B. Submittals shall be packaged separately for each system or major piece of equipment and reviewed by the Contractor for verification of compliance with the contract documents prior to submitting to the Architect. Separate, bound submittals shall be provided for each specification section to the Architect. Authorization to combine equipment or systems must be in writing from the Architect. All interface between specification sections shall be indicated in each submittal. C. All materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of the Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) where applicable. Materials and equipment shall be the latest standard product and shall be of the grade indicated by the trade names given. D. The work shown on the contract drawings is engineered and designed to accommodate the equipment described hereinafter in these specifications. E. Equipment submittal shall include manufacturer’s name, model, type, number, finish, size and capacity of the equipment at the given conditions. This information shall be provided in bound submittals, each containing an index and all submittals. The number of copies shall be as indicated in Division 1. The tile shall provide the project name, system identity, the specification number and the Contractor’s name and address. This submittal shall be July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 1601 l-3 00014 in addition to the shop drawings hereinafter specified. Partial submittals of material submitted from time to time are not acceptable and may be returned without review. F. Submittals shall be reviewed by the Architect for compliance with the contract documents. Submittals found to be incomplete or not in compliance with the contract documents shall be returned for resubmittal. The Architect shall review the original submittal and one (1) resubmittal per section (if required). The Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for all subsequent submittal review. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Equipment submitted for substitution must fit the space conditions shown on the drawings, leaving adequate room for maintenance around all equipment. A minimum working clearance of sixty (60) inches (or more if required by Code) must be maintained clear in front and rear of all electrical equipment rated above 600V. A minimum working clearance of thirty-six (36) inches (or more if required by Code) must be maintained clear in front of all electrical equipment rated below 600V. Submit drawings showing the layout, size and exact method of interconnection of conduit, wiring and controls which shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications. The scale of these drawings shall be the scale of the contract drawings. The Contractor shall bear the excess costs, by any and all crafts, for fitting the equipment into the space and the system designated. Where additional labor or material is required to permit equipment submitted for substitution to function in an approved manner, this shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. No substitutions will be allowed for materials or equipment if three (3) or more manufacturers are indicated. C. An item submitted for substitution does not constitute an “equal” unless approval by the Architect has been given in writing. D. Equipment submitted for substitution shall be approved in writing by the Architect and shall be accompanied by the following: 1. A sample of each item submitted for substitution shall accompany the submittal if requested by the Architect. 2. A unit price quotation shall be provided with each item intended for substitution. This quote shall include a unit price for the specified item and a unit price for the intended substitute item. The Contractor shall also provide a total (per item) of the differential payback to the Owner should the intended substitute item be approved as equivalent to that which is specified. 3. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the additional services required by the Architect to review and process substitutions. E. Substitutions shall be approved in writing by the Architect. The determination of the Architect shall be final. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Warranty requirements for Division 16 shall be in accordance with Division 1 except as modified herein. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 160114 00014 B. C. D. E. F. 132 A. B. C. D. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials required to correct problems which develop during the warranty period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship. The labor and materials to do this work shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Within one (1) month prior to the expiration of the warranty period, the Contractor shall correct any and all defects covered by the warranty. This shall include the tightening to original specifications of all bolted connections. All equipment shall be guaranteed to be supported in such a way as to be free from objectionable vibration and noise. Additional warranty requirements shall be as indicated in the following sections of Divjsion 16. Refer to Division 1 for warranty format. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall furnish operation and maintenance manuals for each electrical system and for each piece of equipment. The complete manual, bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent, shall be provided to the Architect. The number of copies shall be as indicated in Division I. One (1) manual shall be furnished prior to the time that system or equipment tests are performed and the remaining manuals shall be furnished before the contract is completed. The following identification shall be inscribed on the cover the words “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” the name and location of the building, the name of the Contractor and the contract number. The manual shall include the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each Subcontractor installing equipment and systems and of the local manufacturer’s representa- tives for each item of equipment and each system. The manual shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table of contents with tab sheets placed before instructions covering each subject. The instruction sheets shall be legible with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manual shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Devices and controls. 2. Wiring and control diagrams showing operation and control of each component. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Maintenance and overhaul instructions. 5. Parts list. The parts list for equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, recommended spare parts and the service organization which is reasonably convenient to the building site. The manual shall be complete in all respects for all equipment, controls and accessories provided. The manual shall include the following: 1. Final panelboard schedules (8-1/2”xll”). 2. Final test reports. 3. Catalog cuts of final approved light fixtures. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 1601 l-5 00014 1.13 A. B. C. 1.14 A. B. C. D. E. 1.15 A. B. TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE: The Contractor shall provide labor and materials required for the installation and maintenance of temporary lighting and required power sources for the Contractor’s equipment inside the building or construction site and for pedestrian walkways during the period of construction. The building or construction site shall be sufficiently illuminated so that construction work can be safely performed. Special attention shall be given to adequately lighting stairs, ladders, pedestrian walkways, floor openings, etc. Walkway lights shall be controlled by a switch within the building or construction site. Power shall be on and all lighting shall be in operation before painting work commences. RECORD DRAWINGS On one (1) set of contract drawings, kept at the site during construction, mark all work that is installed differently from that shown on plans, including revised circuitry, material or equipment. Sufficient dimensions shall be provided to locate all materials installed beneath and outside the building including, but not limited to, underground conduits, cabling, ground rods and stubouts. All changes or revisions to the contract drawings including, but not limited to, those indicated by amendment, change order, field order, written response to RFI/RFC or other contractual means shall be kept current as the work progresses and shall be incorporated onto the final record drawings. Accurately locate and dimension all underground and embedded conduit runs on the record drawings. The marked drawings shall be kept current as the work progresses and shall be available for inspection upon request. At the close of construction, update the electronic files (AutoCAD (14)) with all changes or revisions and turn them over to the Architect with one (1) complete set of reproducible drawings. The correct and completed record drawings and electronic files are a prerequisite to final contract payment. 1 .As part of the reproducible record drawings, the Contractor shall include: a. Final light fixture schedule as modified during construction. JOB VISITS BY THE ARCHITECT Periodic visits to the job by the Architect are for the express purpose of verifying compliance with the contract documents. Such visits shall m be construed as construction supervision. Neither shall such visits be construed as making the Architect responsible for providing a safe place for the performance of the work by the Contractor or the Contractors employees or the safety of the supplies of the Contractor or his Subcontractors. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16011-6 00014 1.16 A. 1.17 A. 1.18 A. 1.19 A. 1.20 PROGRESS OF UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION The work shall proceed in a systematic manner so that a minimum of inconvenience to facility operations and traffic flow will result during the course of construction. Work crews shall confine operations to as small a length of work area per crew as practical. Entire closing of streets and intersections shall not be permitted. All parking lots and fire lanes shall be accessible at all times. As part of the construction schedule to be submitted, the Contractor shall submit a schedule that includes when and where work will occur in each street and street segment. ELECTRICAL SERVICE OUTAGES There shall be no interruption of existing electrical service without prior approval by the Architect. Written notice of proposed utility outages shall be delivered to the Architect at least fourteen (14) days prior to the start of the proposed outage. The interruption of electrical service shall be scheduled outside the normal working hours (11 p.m.6a.m., Monday-Friday or Saturday, Sunday, and Holidays). The Contractor shall be responsible for all the related work that may be required to provide continued electrical service. The Contractor shall be responsible for the sequencing of all work including, but not limited to, installation of new electrical lines, abandonment of existing electrical lines and interfacing between new and existing lines to ensure uninterrupted service. Additional requirements are listed in Division 1 of this specification. TRAINING User staff and maintenance personnel shall be thoroughly trained (minimum four (4) hours) in the use of each system or major piece of equipment installed. This training shall be provided as part of the Contractors bid to supply the system or equipment. Additional training requirements shall be as specified in the subsequent sections of Division 16. DELIVERY AND STORAGE Equipment and materials shall be properly stored, adequately protected and carefully handled to prevent damage before and during installation. Equipment and materials shall be handled, stored and protected in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by the Architect. Electrical conduit shall be stored to provide protection from the weather and accidental damage. Plastic conduit shall be stored on even supports and in locations not subject to direct sunrays or excessive heat. Cables shall be sealed, stored and handled carefully to avoid damage to the outer covering or insulation and damage from moisture and weather. Damaged or defective items shall be replaced with new items at no cost to the Owner. The Architect shall determine if a damaged or defective item is to be replaced with a new item. The decisions by the Architect in these matters shall be final. FIELD TESTS July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16011-7 00014 A. As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the Architect shall be given five (5) working days notice prior to each test. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment, personnel and incidentals including, but not limited to, water, fuel and lubricants necessary to perform the required testing. The Owner shall provide electrical power required for all tests. The Contractor shall submit five (5) typewritten copies of all test results to the Architect within five (5) working days after each test. 1. The information submitted shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. Scope of the test. b. Name and type of instrument used. :: Calibration date of instrument and name of calibration firm. . Name and signature of testing personnel. e. Name and signature of Architect witnessing the test. f. Analysis of test results. 2. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Architect the operation of all equipment and systems. All tests shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect. Each test shall be performed the number of times indicated in the individual specification section. In the event the number of times the tests are to be completed is omitted, the Architect shall determine the number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 16011 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 1601 l-8 00014 SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. B. The provisions of this section apply to all work specified in all sections of Division 16. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specification includes, but is not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13 All labor, tools, appliances, materials and equipment required to furnish and install the complete installation shown on the drawings for all work specified under Division 16. All carpentry or metal work involved in making supports for conduit and other equipment. Cooperation with other crafts in putting the installation in place at a time when space required by this installation is accessible. Cutting and patching of holes required by this installation, including provision for all holes in existing concrete floor slab. Repair of all damage done to premises as a result of this installation and removal of all debris left by those engaged in this installation. Cleanliness of all exposed electrical equipment at the time the work is turned over to the Owner. Cutting of structural members, floor, concrete cutting and all patching and finishing shall be done by trades skilled in the work for this section and under the direction and supervision of the Contractor. All anchors, chases, sleeves and supports for electrical equipment. Excavation and backfill necessary for the execution and completion of the electrical work. All required backing, supports and blocking for all lighting fixtures. Tests of all electrical systems. All building electrical wiring, conduit, boxes, outlets, switches, plates and all miscellaneous items of electrical apparatus and material specified and/or shown on the drawings. Unit price quotations. Within thirty (30) days the Contractor shall submit a unit price quotation for the items listed below. Each unit price shall include a material, labor and total cost (including overhead and profit). This unit price shall be available to the Owner for additional construction requirements for 180 days. Unit prices shall be provided for the following items: ;: Lighting fixtures (each) including lamps and ballasts l/2-inch and 3/4-inch EMT including mounting (clamps, brackets, etc.), couplings and connectors July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16050-l 00014 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Provide shop drawings for each nameplate, tag and label indicating fabrication details and text. b. Provide shop drawing details, furnished by the manufacturer of the fire stop material, which show complete conformance to the UL system listing. These drawings shall be available to the Fire Marshal on site. The shop drawing shall be specific for each penetration with all variables defined. 2. Reports/Surveys: a. Provide a site survey report per section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, paragraph 1.2-A. b. Provide equipment layout drawings in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, paragraph 1.9. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products and material shall be as specified in the pertinent sections of Division 16. B. All products and material shall be new and bear UL label whenever subject to such approval. Comply with ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards where applicable. C. Wherever possible, all materials and equipment used in this installation shall be of the same manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment. 2.2 NAMEPLATES, TAGS AND LABELS A. Furnish and install one (1)-inch (high) minimum by three (3)-inch (wide) minimum by 3/32- inch (thick), matte black (for normal power) and red (for emergency power), laminated phenolic nameplates with l/4-inch white characters engraved in the plastic for all items of electrical equipment including, but not limited to, switchboards, panelboards, automatic transfer switches, motor control centers, feeder circuit breakers, relays, time switches, disconnect switches, exposed pull or junction boxes and all control equipment. Nameplates shall be attached with two (2) cadmium-plated screws. Adhesive attachment will not be acceptable. Punch strip tape type nameplates or card holders in any form are prohibited. B. Branch circuits shall be tagged in the outlet boxes, panelboards and all junction boxes where circuits terminate. Feeders shall be tagged at each end. Tags shall be applied immediately after wire is installed. 2.3 FIRE RESISTIVE PENETRATIONS A. All penetrations of fire resistive floors, walls or ceilings shall be protected by UL (Underwriters’ Laboratory) approved and listed systems using materials and installation July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16050-2 00014 details that conform to UL through penetration fire stop systems. This includes, but is not limited to, all raceway and cable tray penetrations and electrical boxes recessed in opposite sides of rated walls with less than a twenty-four (24)-inch horizontal offset. The material used shall be 3M brand #CP-25 N/S caulk, #303 putty or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Equipment furnished by others shall be completely connected to the electrical system as required for correct operation. All conduit, wire, junction boxes, etc., shall be provided for proper connection and all required grounding shall be installed. Verify actual requirements with equipment supplier or Architect prior to rough-in. B. All outlets, devices and equipment furnished under Division 16 shall be fully installed and connected. C. Provide all required flexible conduit, boxes, fittings, receptacles, caps, cords and other material that may be required for the proper installation of all equipment. Refer to manufacturers directions where applicable. D. Coordinate the work carefully to ensure that all electrical requirements of equipment are met and all systems are made complete and operational. E. All equipment shall be installed recessed (flush) unless otherwise noted or shown on plans. F. Make all penetrations through roofs prior to installation of roofing. For penetrations required after installation of roofing: 1. In built-up roofing (BUR), provide all curbs, cants and base flashings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. In elastic sheet roofing (ESR), arrange and pay for flashing work by a skilled roofer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. G. Install rain hoods and metal counter flashings as indicated and make all penetrations of electrical work through walls and roofs water and weathertight. 1. Furnish all clamps, waterproofing material and labor necessary. 2. Where metal flashings are applied over concrete, paint concrete with l/8-inch (3mm) of mastic cement first. 3. Set flashing in mastic cement, watertight. H. Have repair and replacement of roof construction, damaged by this project, done in a manner which will not nullify roof warranty. 3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. All electrical equipment shall be braced or anchored in accordance with the requirements of Seismic Zone IV. 1. Horizontal seismic forces shall be determined from the applicable equations of the governing code. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16050-3 00014 3.3 A. B. %. D. 3.4 A. B. C. D. 3.5 A. 2. Provide all required seismic bracing, supports, bolts, washers, nuts, etc., for conduits and conduit supports. 3. Provide an independent system to secure all recessed lighting fixtures. Fixtures shall be supported directly and laterally from the building structure above, using No. 12gauge wire minimum. The ceiling suspension system shall m be used for direct support. MISCELLANEOUS WORK Do all miscellaneous metal and concrete work required; all cutting and patching; and provide all hangers, anchors, chases, supports, etc., required for the installation of the electrical systems. Touch-up or refinish damaged surfaces including, but not limited to, panelboards, transformers, etc., to the satisfaction of the Architect. Provide “As-Built” panel schedules and labels on all existing equipment affected by this project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Main Switchboards 2. Disconnect Switches 3. Panelboards 4. Distribution Panelboards 5. Distribution Switchboards All work shall be in accordance with applicable sections of the specifications. CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF PRODUCTS AND PREMISES At frequent intervals during the time on the site, the Contractor shall clean up after his work and remove his debris from the premises. The building and grounds shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect. All equipment and material resulting from demolition for this project shall be removed. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect all materials, equipment and property, whether electrical or not, from damage as a result of his work. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection for all material and equipment provided under Division 16. Material and equipment shall be stored in a clean dry place and shall be covered or protected from damage or contamination during storage and after installation. Before final inspection, all material and equipment furnished under Division 16 shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, paint spatters and other foreign materials. All surfaces shall be carefully wiped clean. Boxes, cabinets and enclosures shall be cleaned, inside and out. CHECKING AND TESTING OF EQUIPMENT Switchboards, panelboards, disconnects and all other operable equipment worked on under this contract shall be inspected for defects and tested for proper operation. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16050-4 00014 B. C. D. E. -F. G. Systems shall be tested for short circuits, open circuits, wrong connections and grounds. All systems shall be free from mechanical and electrical defects. Circuits shall be tested for proper neutral and ground connections. Where required or directed, systems shall be tested in the presence of the Architect to demonstrate that equipment furnished, installed or connected functions in the manner intended. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments and equipment required for testing and shall immediately correct any defective work at no additional charge. Should the Contractor refuse or neglect to make tests necessary to satisfy the Architect that he has carried out the true intent and meaning of the specifications, the Architect may have such tests made and charge the expense thereof to the Contractor to be retained out of full final payment. Bolted connections shall be torque-tightened to manufacturer’s specifications. The Contractor shall torque all connections with a wrench that has been calibrated within the last three (3) months. Submit proof of calibration to the Architect. For additional checking and testing of special systems, see the section where those systems are specified. END OF SECTION 16050 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16050-5 00014 SECTlONl6l10 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART I- GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) Publications. 5. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”: 1. Rigid steel conduit 2. PVC coated rigid steel conduit 3. Rigid Plastic 4. Electrical metallic tubing 5. Flexible metallic conduit 6. Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit 7. Conduit fittings and devices (each type) 8. Pullrope 9. Warning Tape B. Conduit shall be delivered to the site in standard lengths with each length bearing the manufacturers trademark or stamp and UL labeled. C. Samples 1. Pullrope: The Contractor shall submit a twenty-five (25)-foot sample of the pullrope The sample will be retained for comparison with the installed pullrope. 2. Warning Tape: The Contractor shall submit a ten (lo)-foot sample of the warning tape. The sample will be retained for comparison with the installed tape. D. Field Test Reports 1. Provide field test report for the following item: a. Compaction tests. 1.4 WARRANTY July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-l 00014 A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. -C. D. 2.2 A. 2.3 A. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Standard weight rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized. All fittings shall be of the screw thread type. Couplings, locknuts, bushings, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized. Where indicated, rigid steel conduit shall be PVC coated (minimum 40 mils). No running threads. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized or sherardized. Couplings and connectors shall be galvanized or sheradized. Fittings shall be steel compression type with gland sealing rings. Flexible conduit shall be aluminum or galvanized steel. Where used in damp or wet locations or where indicated herein, it shall be of the liquid-tight type with outer neoprene jacket and suitable liquid-tight ftiings. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be (PVC) Schedule 40, UL approved. All couplings, fittings, solvent cement, etc., shall be manufactured specifically for the type of material with which they are used. Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from direct sunlight. WARNING TAPE Warning tape shall be 5.5 mil composition film, six (6) inches wide containing one layer of metalized foil laminated between two (2) layers of inert plastic film specifically formulated for prolonged use underground. Tape shall be highly resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive agents found in the soil. Warning tape shall bear a continuous printed message warning of the exact location of underground installations. This message shall be in permanent ink specifically formulated for prolonged use underground. Tape shall have black letters (minimum l/2-inch high) on red background with the message “ELECTRICAL” printed on twelve (12)-inch centers for the entire length of the tape. PULLROPE The pullrope shall be polyethylene, 3/8” diameter minimum with a minimum tensile strength of 250 pounds for conduits larger than 2” diameter; l/8” diameter minimum with a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds for conduits smaller than 2’ diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): I. Where exposed to weather (including rooftop and under canopy locations). 2. For roof penetrations. 3. Underground in contact with earth. July 7, 2000 16110-2 00014 Georgina Cole Library 4. 5. 6. 7. Underground below concrete slab. In concrete or masonry construction. For all or any portion of exposed conduits less than five (5) feet above finished floor. To concealed locations from below grade PVC coated RGS risers up to the first device or to five (5) feet above finished floor. 8. At seismic separations or building expansion joints. 9. Where shown on drawings or indicated herein. B. RGS With PVC Coating 1. Conduit stub-ups from underground including the final 90” sweep and the riser. 2. Underground bends or sweeps in PVC conduit. 3. Service entrance conduits within five (5) feet outside the building perimeter to the service point within the building. 4. Where shown on drawings. _ C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 1. Interior dry locations. 2. At interior dry seismic separations or building expansion joints. 3. Above five (5) feet in interior exposed locations. 4. Above five (5) feet or above the first device in interior concealed locations for conduit risers from below the bottom floor slab. 5. EMT shall not be installed on rooftop or under canopy locations or in poured concrete or masonry construction. EMT shall not be used for roof penetrations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Final device connections to direct wired equipment not to exceed four (4) feet long in interior dry locations. 2. Light fixture connections in accessible locations (not to exceed six (6) feet in interior dry locations), U.O.N. 3. Where shown on drawings or indicated herein. 4. Flexible metal conduit shall ~gt be used to penetrate fire resistive walls, floors or ceilings. 5. Flexible metal conduit shall not be installed in place of EMT for interior wiring. E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Final connections of conduit systems to all motors, generators and direct wired vibrating equipment (including transformers) for interior and exterior locations not to exceed four (4) feet long. 2. At seismic separations or building expansion joints. 3. Where shown on drawings or indicated herein. F. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) 1. Rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC) may be installed in place of RGS underground where encased in a minimum of three (3) inches of concrete on all sides, U.O.N. 2. Concrete walls or slabs except bottom floor. 3. Where shown on drawings. 3.2 CONDUIT SIZES July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-3 00014 A. B. C. 3.3 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-inch for lighting and power branch circuit wiring except that X&inch conduit may be used for switch legs. The minimum “Homerun” conduit size to any panelboard, load center, switchboard or motor control center shall be 3/4-inch. For concrete encased duct structures the minimum size shall be four (4) inches unless otherwise noted. The maximum EMT size shall be four (4) inches. Condulets for conduits larger than l-1/2 inches I.D. shall be of the mogul design secured to the building structure within six (6) inches of each conduit connection. INSTALLATION All conduits shall contain a green insulated ground wire whether indicated or not. The ground wire shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the Code, unless otherwise noted. All conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous. Conduits shall not be encased in concrete floor slabs on grade (bottom floor slab). No conduit for any purpose shall be installed in or under any portion of the concrete floor slab of vault spaces. Conduit shall not run through footings or grade beams or other structural members except where specifically directed by the Architect. All conduit to be installed in concrete or masonry work shall be carefully laid and rigidly supported in the forms in such a manner as to provide proper clearance and so that all boxes and rings will be flush after concrete has set and forms have been removed. Conduit installation shall not, in any case, weaken the structural integrity of the concrete wall or slab. Additional rebar required to maintain the structural strength of the concrete shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor. Paint underground rigid steel conduit with “Phelans” asphaltum or approved equal. Seal service entrance conduits and all underground conduit runs with “Duct Seal” or equal. Make gas-tight. This includes PVC conduit runs which terminate in steel risers. Seal in junction boxes, panelboards and/or switchboards. Conduits shall be run concealed, except in certain approved and indicated locations. Conduits shall be grouped in neat parallel lines following the lines of the building structure. Rooftop conduits (rigid steel) shall be neatly grouped and installed parallel to the building lines. Support conduits on minimum 2-inch x 4-inch fireproof, redwood sleepers at minimum five @)-foot spacing. Conduit only (C.O.) routed for device connections into accessible corridor ceiling locations shall be securely fastened to the structure to prevent movement during wire or cable pulling. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-4 00014 L. M. ‘N. 0. P. Q. R. S. T. U. A polyethylene pullrope shall be installed in every run of “conduit only” (C.O.). A minimum of thirty-six (36) inches of slack shall be left at both ends of each pullrope. Both ends of all pullropes shall be identified by means of labels or tags which shall identify the location or room designation of the other end. The ends of all conduits shall be square, carefully reamed out to full size, shouldered in the fittings and bushed or capped wherever stubbed clear of the building. Upon completion of any run of conduit, test the run and see that it is free of obstruction. Plug each end with conduit pennies and bushings and leave plugged until ready to pull wire or cable. Not more than four (4) go-degree ells or bends or the equivalent shall be used in any single run of conduit. Conduits for telephone, television or data cable shall not have more than two (2) go-degree bends or the equivalent. Where more bends are necessary, provide suitable code size pullboxes or fittings. All conduits for telephone, television or data systems cable shall have large radius bends. Pullboxes shall be installed in accessible locations. Conduit installed on equipment shall not obstruct any removable panel, access door or control. Control apparatus, outlet, junction and pullboxes shall be installed so as not to interfere with any piping, fixtures or equipment. Provide one (1) 3/4-inch conduit (minimum of six (6) total) for each three (3) spares or spaces in all flush mounted power or lighting panelboards. Route conduits to accessible space above ceiling; cap and tag conduit. Conduits installed across seismic or building separations (expansion joints) shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. The conduit (rigid steel or EMT) shall be securely anchored on each side of the seismic or building separation with a pipe hanger per SMACNA details. 2. 3. 4. The spacing between conduit ends shall be thirty-six (36) inches minimum. A liquid-tight flexible metal conduit of the same size shall be installed between the conduit ends spanning the seismic or building separation. The liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be of sufficient length to provide for a longitudinal and axial deflection of two (2) inches minimum in all directions. Fire alarm conduit shall be painted red six (6) inches wide for each eight (8) feet of length or part thereof. Separate conduits shall be provided for the installation of normal and emergency power system wiring and for separating the branches of the emergency power system wiring. Underground Duct with Concrete Encasement: Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in concrete. The conduit shall be of PVC Schedule 40 unless otherwise noted. Do not mix the kind of conduits used in any one (1) duct bank. The concrete encasement surrounding the ducts shall be rectangular in cross-section and shall provide at least three (3) inches of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-5 00014 minimum seven and one-half (7-I/2) inches on center. Non-metallic spacers shall be provided to maintain separation. I. The top of the concrete envelope shall not be less than thirty-six (36) inches below grade unless otherwise shown on plans. 2. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward away from buildings with a pitch of not less than three (3) inches in 100 feet. Except at conduit risers, changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of ten (10) degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of twenty-five (25) feet. Sweep bends may be made up of one (I) or more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of eighteen (18) inches for use with conduits of less than three (3) inches in diameter and a minimum radius of thirty-six (36) inches for ducts of three (3) inches in diameter and larger. PVC conduits shall convert to rigid galvanized steel conduit with PVC jacket at the last go-degree elbow for conduit stub-up. 3. Conduits shall terminate in end-bells where duct lines enter manholes, vaults, trenches or utility tunnels. Separators shall be of precast concrete, high impact polystyrene, steel or any combination of these. The joints of the conduits shall be staggered by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having the maximum strength. During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed from structure to structure, a test- ing mandrel not less than twelve (12) inches long with a diameter I/4-inch less than the size of the conduit, shall be drawn through each conduit. After which, a brush having the diameter of the duct and having stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed. Manholes, vaults, trenches and utility tunnels shall be repaired with waterproofing materials after conduit termination. 4. Conduit connections to existing manholes., vaults, trenches and utility tunnels shall be core drilled. V. Identification Slabs (conduit stubout marker): Provide a slab over the ends of underground conduit stubouts. Identification slab shall be of concrete approximately twelve (12) inches square by six (6) inches thick and shall be set flat in the ground so that top surface projects not less than 3/4-inch, nor more than l-114 inches aboveground. The concrete shall have a compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi and have a smooth troweled finish on exposed surface. Inscribe an identifying legend such as “ELECTRIC CONDUITS”, “TELEPHONE CONDUITS”, or the applicable designation on top surface. Letters or figures shall be approximately two (2) inches high and grooves shall be approximately I/4-inch in width and depth: Install slabs so that the side nearest the inscription on top shall include an arrow indicating the side nearest the conduit. 3.4 EARTHWORK A. Excavate trenches to depths indicated except that if hard material is encountered, the provisions of the contract respecting an adjustment for changed conditions shall apply, subject to the requirements of notification thereunder being given. Hard material shall be defined as solid rock, firmly cemented unstratified masses or conglomerate deposits possessing the characteristics of solid rock not ordinarily removed without systematic drilling and blasting and any boulder, masonry or concrete (except pavement), exceeding l/2-cubic yard in volume. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-6 00014 B. C. 3.5 A. 3.6 A. 3.7 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed from the project site. Provide sheeting and shoring as necessary for protection of work and safety of personnel. Remove water from excavation by-pumping or other approved method. Backfilling: Provide a plastic warning tape approximately twelve (12) inches below the top of the trench in the backfill. Backfill shall be placed in layers not more than six (6) inches thick and each layer shall be compacted. Backfilling shall be free from roots, wood scrap material and other vegetable matter and refuse. Compaction of backfill shall be to 95 percent of maximum density. I. Backfilling around structures shall consist of earth, loam, sand-clay or sand and gravel, free from large clods of earth or stones over one (I) inch in size. Backfill materials shall be placed horizontally and symmetrically on all sides and slopes in loose layers not more than nine (9) inches thick. Each layer shall be moistened, if necessary, and compacted with mechanical or hand tampers to 95 percent compaction. CONCRETE Concrete for underground conduit or duct encasement shall be two (2)-sack slurry mix with minimum I/2” aggregate. GROUNDING Grounding shall be in accordance with Section 16450, “Grounding”. CONDUIT SUPPORTS Conduit, which is not buried or embedded in concrete, shall be supported by straps, clamps or hangers to provide a rigid installation. Conduit shall not be installed on hangers and/or supports installed by other trades for their use. Conduit shall ~gt be supported from or attached to ceiling wire and/or ceiling suspension systems or other systems installed for purposes of accommodating other systems within the building. Conduit shall not be supported from other conduit. Conduits shall be supported within three (3) feet of any kind of fitting and at every outlet or junction box, panel, etc. This shall apply to both horizontal and vertical runs. Powder-driven pins or studs shall not be used. Where conduits are run individually, they shall be supported by approved straps, clamps and hangers. I. No perforated straps or wire hangers of any kind shall be used. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-7 00014 H. Conduits installed exposed in damp locations shall be provided with clamp backs under each conduit clamp to prevent accumulation of moisture around the conduits. I. Open bottom, spring tension, snap-in clamps shall not be used. - I. Where a number of conduits are to be run parallel, they shall be grouped and supported by trapeze hangers. Each conduit shall be clamped to the trapeze hanger with conduit clamps. 1. Multiple conduits shall be coordinated as to the location on the rack so that they enter and exit the rack in an orderly fashion with as little crossing of conduits as possible. 2. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed to allow for future growth. Provide a minimum 20% empty space on each rack for future conduit runs. J. All concrete inserts and pipe straps shall be galvanized. K. All steel bolts, nuts, washers, rods, trapeze hangers and screws shall be galvanized or cadmium-plated. L. Support horizontal runs of RGS or EMT at a maximum of eight (8) feet between supports. M. Support vertical runs of RGS or EMT at a maximum of ten (IO) feet between supports. N. Flexible conduit shall be supported at a maximum of four and one half (4-I/2) feet between supports. 0. Support RGS or EMT within three (3) feet of outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets or fittings. Support flexible conduit within one (1) foot of boxes. END OF SECTION 16110 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16110-8 ooo14 SECTION 16112 UTILITY BOXES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 A. I.2 A. 1.3 A. I.4 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. I. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) Publications. SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. I. Utility Box (each type) WARRANTY Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UTILITY BOX A. Utility boxes shall be of reinforced concrete construction with an open bottom. The box size shall be IO”(W) x 16”(L). The box cover shall be a one-piece concrete cover with finger hole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF UTILITY BOXES A. Utility Box Installation 1. Precast utility boxes shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions. Accessories shall be provided as indicated. 2. Provide a twelve (12)-inch deep compacted gravel (3/4”-I”) base under manholes, utility boxes and vaults for drainage. B. Earthwork July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16112-l 00014 1. 2. 3. Excavate to depths indicated except that if hard material is encountered, the provisions of the contract respecting an adjustment for changed conditions shall apply, subject to the requirements of notification thereunder being given. Hard material shall be defined as solid rock, firmly cemented unstratified masses or conglomerate deposits possessing the characteristics of solid rock not ordinarily removed without systematic drilling and blasting and any boulder, masonry or concrete (except pavement) exceeding l/2-cubic yard in volume. Excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed from the project site. Provide sheeting and shoring as necessary for protection of work and safety of personnel. Remove water from excavation by pumping or other approved method. Backfilling: Backfill shall be placed in layers not more than six (6) inches thick and each layer shall be compacted. Backfilling shall be free from roots, wood scrap material and other vegetable matter and refuse. Compaction of backfill shall be to 95 percent of maximum density. a. Backfilling around structures shall consist of earth, loam, sand-clay or sand and gravel, free from large clods of earth or stones over one inch in size. Backfill materials shall be placed symmetrically on all sides in loose layers not more than nine (9)~inches deep. Each layer shall be moistened, if necessary, and compacted with mechanical or hand tampers to 95 percent compaction. Surfaces disturbed during the installation of utility boxes shall be replaced to model adjacent surfaces. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Grounding shall be accordance with Section 16450, “Grounding”. END OF SECTION 161 I2 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16112-2 00014 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLT AND BELOW) PART I - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) Publications. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications. 4. Undennrriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) Publications. I.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”. I. Wire and Cable (each type) 2. Wire Splices 3. Cable Lubricants 4. Insulating Tape B. Shop Drawings I. Cable Tag Schedule C. Manufacturers Instructions: 1. Provide manufacturers instructions for the following items: a. Manufacturer’s directions for.use of ground megger with proposed method indicated. I.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLES A. Wire and cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge (AWG) or Thousand Circular Mils (KCMIL). Deliver all wire and cable to the site in original unbroken packages, plainly marked or tagged with Underwriters’ Label, size and type of conductor, type of insulation, rated voltage, name of manufacturing company, trade name of wire and July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16120-l 00014 month and year of manufacture. The date of manufacture shall not exceed six (6) months prior to delivery to the site. Wire installed without all of the above identification shall be removed and approved wire installed. B. 600 volt wire and cable: All low voltage conductors shall be copper, not less than 98% conductivity and 600 volt class. Wire smaller than No. 8 AWG shall be solid conductor; No. 8 AWG and larger wire shall be stranded conductor. Minimum wire size shall be No. I2 AWG unless othenrvise indicated. Wire for branch circuitry shall be type THWN (75°C) except that type THHN (9OOC) wire shall be used for connection of light fixtures. Wire used as feeders to switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers or other major electrical components shall be Type XHHW (75OC). 1. All wiring shall be color coded as follows: 2. 208/I 20 volt A Phase Black B Phase Red C Phase Blue NeutralWhite Gray Ground Green Switch legs for local wall switches shall be the same color as the phase wires. 2.2 WIRE SPLICES A. 600V and Below I. #8 and smaller wire shall be Scotchlock [or equal (no known equal)] pressure type solderless connectors with insulator. 2. #6 and larger wire shall be Burndy, Type OPX, solderless lugs and clamp-type connector. a. Uninsulated solderless connectors shall be insulated as follows: Wrap with two (2) complete thicknesses of varnished cambric followed by 6 complete wraps of Scotch 33 or equal (no known equal), followed by one (I) complete wrap of Scotch 2200, followed by one (I) heat-shrinkable, thick-wall cable sleeve, Scotch type ITCSN with factory applied adhesive/sealant, extending a minimum of four (4) inches at each end beyond the cable splice point. 3. #I/O wire and larger, for ground conductors, shall be cast by Cadweld fusible metal process. 4. Epoxy splice kits shall be used for all splices made below grade, in wet locations or in concrete pull boxes and hand holes. These kits shall consist of epoxy resin, hardener and mold. The kits shall be manufactured by 3M. 2.3 CABLE LUBRICANTS A. Lubricants for assisting in the pulling of the specified rubber or plastic jacketed cables shall be those specifically recommended by cable manufacturer 2.4 INSULATING TAPE: UL 510 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION July 7, 2000 16120-2 Georgina Cole Library 00014 A. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All wiring shall be installed in conduit except where other raceway systems or methods are specifically shown on the drawings or required by the specifications. 600 VOLT WlRE AND CABLE Thoroughly clean out all conduit and wireways and see that all parts are perfectly dry before pulling any wires. A mechanical wire puller may be used where directed, in which case a lubricant shall be used. Any wire damaged as a result of installation under this section shall be pulled out and replaced with new at no additional cost to the Owner. Make all connections and splices necessary to properly complete the electrical wiring. Connections and splices shall be made only in pull, junction or outlet boxes or in switch- boards, wireways or panels having sufficient code-sized gutter space. Connections to equipment or bus bars shall be made with approved solderless compression type copper lugs for all wires No. 8 AWG and larger. Special lugs or connections shall be as shown on the plans. Binding screws may be used for size No. 10 and smaller. Where stranded wire is connected to binding screws, nylon, self-insulated, ring tongue, pressure type terminals (type T&B Sta-Kon) shall be used on the wire. Soldering will not be an acceptable method of connecting any power conductors. Clipping of wires from standard cable to fit connectors and terminal lugs shall not be permitted. All conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes. Junction boxes may be utilized where required. At least eight (8) inches of wire shall be left at outlet boxes for connecting fixtures and devices. No wire smaller than No. 12-gauge shall be used, except for signal or control systems or where otherwise indicated. No. IO-gauge wire shall be used for I5 or 20 ampere 120 volt branch circuits in excess of 100 feet in length. This is intended to reduce branch circuit voltage drop and takes precedence over #12 branch circuitry indicated in drawings. Record drawings shall indicate installed wire size. Parallel Feeders I. Each phase wire and neutral wire of each parallel run shall be the same length. Wires entering switchboards, panelboards, transformers and disconnects shall be of sufficient length for proper termination without splicing within the equipment enclosure. Any wires installed that require splicing for terminating shall be removed and replaced with ones of the proper length. Wires shall be trained and supported in neat bundles. Wiring Bundles or Harnesses: I. Multiple wires in bundles or harnesses terminating in control panels, switchboards, panelboards, etc., shall be bundled, trained and laced to achieve a neat and . workmanlike appearance. 2. Surplus wire protruding from the harness for termination shall be trimmed to the proper length. Do not fold and stuff surplus wires into wiring gutters. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16120-3 00014 3. Wires exiting the bundle or harness shall be carefully trained at a 90” angle to the termination point. I. Permanent tags shall be connected to all feeders in intermediate pullboxes (where used) to provide identification for future use. J. The maximum number of “hot” (phase conductors) wires for feeder or branch circuit wiring in one (I) conduit shall not exceed three (3) unless othewise noted. K. Cable Terminating: Terminations of insulated power and lighting cables shall be protected from accidental contact, deterioration of coverings and moisture by the use of terminating devices and materials. Terminations shall be made using materials and methods as indicated or specified herein or as designated by the written instruction of the cable manufacturer and termination kit manufacturer. 3.3 UNDERGROUND WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Cable Pulling: Cables shall be pulled down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Flexible cable feeds shall be used to convey cables through the manhole opening and into the duct runs. Remove unused existing cables which constitute interference with the work. Abandon in place those disused ducts and cables which do not interfere with the work. 1. Maximum tension when pulling cables using a pulling eye, shall be O.OO&pounds per circular mil of conductor cross-section. The maximum pull on a single conductor shall be 5,000 pounds and on three (3) conductors pulled as a group shall be 6,000 pounds. Under no circumstances shall the pulling tension exceed the manufacturers limits. A tension synometer shall be used for pulling in all runs above 600 volts of I/O and larger cable and runs longer than 200 feet. Basket weave type pulling devices shall not be used on medium voltage cables having tape shields. Use cable eyes provided with precut lengths of cable. B. Installation of Cables in Manholes, Vaults, Utility Boxes and Trenches: Cables shall not be installed utilizing the shortest route, but shall be routed along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. All cables shall be formed to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances and shall be supported on brackets and cable insulators at a maximum of four (4) feet. In existing manholes, vaults, pullboxes and trenches where new ducts are to be terminated or where new cables are to be installed, the existing installation of cables, cable supports and grounding shall be modified as required for a neat and workmanlike installation with all cables properly arranged and supported. 1. All cables which are cut shall be clear capped. Cables shall have the ends sealed with a heat shrinkable watertight cap prior to pulling to avoid penetration by water. Cable ends shall be left sealed until the splices are to be made. 2. Shields shall be provided where cables enter and leave manholes, vaults, pullboxes, trenches and other duct entrances and shall be of a suitable type manufactured for the purpose. 3.4 FIELD TESTS A. As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the Architect shall be given five (5) working days notice prior to each test. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16120-4 00014 B. Testing Equipment: The testing equipment and devices used in performing the required tests shall have a calibration sticker affixed to the device stating the date when calibrated, date due for recalibration and the signature of the individual who did the calibration. In addition to the sticker, a certificate shall also contain the brand name and the serial number of the device. C. Insulation Resistance Test for Systems 600 Volts and Less: After all wiring is completed and connected ready for operation, but prior to placing systems in service and before any branch circuit breakers are closed, insulation resistance tests shall be made in all feeder and subfeeder circuits. The insulation resistance between conductors and between each conductor and ground shall be measured. Measurements shall be made with an instrument capable of marking measurements at an applied potential of 500 volts. Readings shall be taken after the voltage has been applied for a minimum of one (I) minute. The minimum insulation resistance for circuits of No. 12 AWG conductors shall be I ,OOO,OOO ohms. For circuits of No. IO AWG or larger conductors, a resistance based on the allowable ampacity of the conductor as fixed by NFPA 70 shall be as follows: 25 through 40 amperes 250,000 ohms 51 through 100 amperes 100,000 ohms 101 through 200 amperes 50,000 ohms 201 through 400 amperes 25,000 ohms 401 through 800 amperes 12,000 ohms Over 800 amperes 5,000 ohms D. Test Report (Submit four (4) copies in wriiing): I. 600 volt cables (identify each cable & test results) END OF SECTION 16120 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16120-5 00014 SECTION 16130 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART I - GENERAL I.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. 1. Catalog Cuts: a. Outlet Boxes b. Pull Boxes C. Junction Boxes WARRANTY Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES The size of each outlet or junction box shall be determined by the number and sizes of wires and conduits entering the box, but shall be not less than four (4) inches square and 2-I/8-inches deep unless otherwise indicated. Outlet and junction boxes for interior use shall be galvanized or sherardized, one-piece pressed or welded steel, knockout type, except where other types of boxes are indicated or specified. Outlet and junction boxes for exterior use shall be lug type “Bell,” boxes “25OL” through “254L”, “Crouse-Hinds FS” type, as applicable. Outlet boxes shall be equipped with plaster rings, inserts and fixture studs as may be required. Knockout seals shall be provided where knockouts are not intact. Plastic, fiber or composition boxes shall not be permitted. All exterior pullboxes, plates, ftiings, etc., mounted below IO’-0” in height shall be fitted with rustproof, tamperproof screws. Provide Owner with two (2) screwdrivers (or wrenches) to fit special screws. Screws shall be Spanner, Key Slot, or Rosette. July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16130-l 00014 G. Boxes in concrete shall be of the type to allow placing of conduit without displacing reinforcing bars and shall be type approved for concrete use. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be packed with approved material to prevent concrete entering box. Do 6gt use paper for packing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Outlet boxes shall be securely and independently fastened to the structure and in concealed work shall be supported flush with finished surface of walls or ceilings. B. Bar hangers fitted with fixture studs shall be used to support outlet boxes in stud partitions and in furred or plastered ceilings. C. Fasteners shall be machine screws, nut and lock washers in metal, wood screws in wood or expansion shields or inserts in masonry or concrete. Wooden inserts will not be acceptable. D. Label inside and outside of box to identify panel and circuit numbers. Use indelible markers, nonerasing type, for boxes above ceilings or in concealed locations. END OF SECTION 16130 July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16130-2 00014 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”. I. Trim and Covet-plates (each type and style) B. Shop Drawings 1. Provide shop drawings of all special device configurations. C. Samples I. Provide one (1) sample of each device specified if requested by the Architect. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TRIM AND COVERPLATES A. Provide a trim or coverplate for each outlet, switch device and box. Ganged devices shall have gang plates exactly matching the arrangement and quantity of devices. Plates on unfinished walls shall be zinc-coated sheet steel having round or beveled edges. Screws shall be machine type with countersunk heads in a color to match the finish of the plate. B. Plates for special application shall be as indicated on plans or otherwise specified. C. All plates shall fit the box perfectly with no field modification necessary. Surface plates shall not overhang the box PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide labels in accordance with Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16140-l 00014 B. Mark the inside of each trim or cover-plate with the branch circuit number. Use indelible markers, non-erasing type. 3.2 TESTING A. Test all devices in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. END OF SECTION 16140 July 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16140-2 00014 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. 1. Catalog Cuts: :: Ground Rod Ground Connectors 2. Thermal (or Exothermic) Weld Process WARRANTY Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. 2.3 A. GROUND RODS Provide copper clad steel with adequate diameter to permit driving it full length of the rod in the earth, but not less than 3/4-inch. Length shall be ten (10) feet unless otherwise indicated. COLD WATER PIPE OR BUILDING STEEL CONNECTOR Connector shall be silicon bronze as manufactured by Bumdy or equal. EXOTHERMIC WELDS Provide exothermic welds which require no outside source of heat or power. Weld shall be accomplished by reduction of copper oxide and aluminum powdered metals in a mold. Weld shall provide connection of conductor to device, device to device or conductor to conductor, as required. Weld shall be of proper size to provide continuous rating of devices or conductors which are connected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION JuIy 7,200O Georgina Cole Library 16450-l 00014 A. B. C. D. E. 3.2 A. B. C. Make mechanical and electrical contact at all panelboards, outlet boxes, junction boxes and wherever the conduit run is connected. Permanently and effectively ground all conduit and other equipment as required by all applicable codes, regulations and standards. Provide a code sized green insulated ground wire in all conduits unless a larger size is indicated on plans. System neutrals shall only be grounded at the main .service and separately derived systems. The service neutral shall be connected to the nearest effectively grounded building structural steel and metal water pipe (close to where it enters the building). Neutral conductors of separately derived systems shall be connected to effectively grounded building structural steel or a metal water pipe. Ground rods may be used to ground the system neutral conductor only if building steel and metal water pipes are not available. Drive ground rods full length in a depression at least six (6) inches below finished grade. When more than one (1) rod is driven, space them at least the full length of the rod. 1. Make all grounding connections which are to be buried or otherwise normally inaccessible using thermal welds or by using a mechanical connector and brazing over completely. Thermal wetds which have puffed up or shown convex surfaces (indicating improper cleaning at the surfaces) are not acceptable. No mechanical connector is required at the thermal weldments. The green insulated ground wire shall connect directly to the receptacle ground screw. TESTS As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the Architect shall be given five (5) working days notice prior to each test. The testing equipment and devices used in performing the required tests shall have a calibration sticker affixed to the device stating the date calibrated, date due for re-calibration and the signature of the individual who did the calibration. In addition to the sticker, a certificate shall also contain the brand name and the serial number of the device. Ground Rod Test: Test ground rods for ground resistance value before any wire is connected. A portable ground testing megger shall be used to test each ground or group of grounds. The auxiliary or reference ground rods shall be 3/4-inch copper clad steel, not less than four (4) feet in length and driven three and one-half (3-l/2) feet deep and shall be installed in a straight line from the ground being tested. Number 14 AWG stranded wire leads with at least 600 volt rubber insulation shall be connected to binding post on the instrument. 1. Where there is more than one (1) ground within a circle of ten (10) feet at a particular location, the reference rods as driven for the “first” test shall be used for tests on the other rods without changing the location. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground electrode under test. Provide one (1) copy of the megger manufacturer’s directions for use of the ground megger indicating the method to be used. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16450-2 00014 D. Test Report (Submit four (4) copies in writing) 1. Grounding electrodes and systems (identify electrodes and systems, each test) END OF SECTION 16450 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16450-3 00014 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. -B. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. SUBMITTALS Shop drawings for all equipment specified in this section shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. WARRANTY Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS Panelboards shall be factory assembled circuit breaker type wired and tested and shall be the latest standard product of General Electric, Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse, Siemens or Square D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. The number of poles, type, voltage and ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the plans. Bus bars shall be copper and shall be 100% silver or tin plated. Provide full size ground bus. Provide a full-size isolated ground bus where indicated. Provide full size neutral bus except where a non-linear panelboard is required. Non-linear panelboards, where indicated on plans, shall be provided with a 200% neutral bus. B. Neutral wires shall be connected to a common neutral bus with binding screws or lugs. Neutral wire connections shall be evenly distributed over the entire neutral bus. The neutral bus shall be insulated from the cabinet. C. All bolted connections shall be torque-tightened in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. D. Cabinets for panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard. Cabinets shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on the plans. Cabinets shall be constructed of July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16470-l 00014 not less than 14 gauge steel and shall be shop painted with two (2) coats of primer and a finish coat of gray enamel. Cabinet shall be twenty (20) inches minimum width, 5-3/4” deep. E. Cabinet covers shall be not less than 14 gauge steel, hinged so that they swing away to provide full access to the interior of the panel without removing the entire cover from the wall. Covers designed for more than one (1) panel shall not be provided. Locks shall be provided for all hinged cabinet covers. These locks shall be keyed alike the same as the door locks. F. Cabinet doors shall be not less than 14 gauge steel, hinged and lockable. Construction shall be door in a door with flush-type cylinder locks and latches. All locks shall be keyed alike and alike with the cabinet cover lock. Cabinet doors shall be provided with circuit schedule holders with clear plastic windows. G. Special panelboard construction or features shall be as shown on plans. For circuit breakers, time clocks and other equipment to be included as an assembled part of the panelboard, refer to the subsection or paragraph where those items are specified. H. Where indicated, circuit breakers in panelboards shall be provided with a handle padlock attachment. This attachment shall allow the circuit breaker handle to be padlocked in either the “ON” or “OFF” position. I. Submit detailed shop drawings of panelboards, including breakers and all components as required under “Shop Drawings”. J. Provide a panel identification nameplate as specified in Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. Nameplates shall indicate panel designation, bus rating, voltage, number of phases, AIC, manufacturer number, feeder number and distribution board fed from. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Provide circuit schedules for all circuits identifying the type, size and location of the load. Final room numbers and designations shall be in accordance with Owner requirements. Coordinate numbers and designations prior to finalizing schedules. Schedule shall be typewritten. Mark spares with pencil only. B. Panelboards installed recessed in fire rated walls shall be adequately boxed or backed with fire rated material. The final construction shall equal or exceed the fire rating of the wall. C. Provide one (1) 3/4-inch conduit (minimum of six (6) total) for each three (3) spares or spaces in all flush mounted power or lighting panelboards. Route conduit to accessible space above ceiling; cap and tag conduits. 3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Refer to Section 16050, “Basic Materials and Methods”. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16470-2 00014 3.3 TESTING A. Test each circuit breaker in accordance with Section 16475, “Overcurrent Protective Devices”. B. Upon completion of installation and check-out, an infrared scan shall be provided for all bolted connections. The Contractor shall provide a technician who is proficient in the use of infrared scan equipment. Any deficiencies (hot spots) noted shall be corrected and the scan repeated. Provide a report upon completion of tests. END OF SECTION 16470 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16470-3 00014 SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. 1. Catalog Cuts: a. Circuit breakers (each type and style) b. Circuit breaker enclosures C. Circuit breaker handle padlock assembly 2. Coordination Curves: a. Provide 1 l”x17” semi-log coordination curves for each circuit breaker provided. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers for panelboards, distribution panelboards, distribution switchboards and main service equipment shall be the manufactured product of the same manufacturer as the equipment in which the circuit breaker is installed. B. Circuit breakers for panelboards and distribution panelboards shall be bolt-on type, bolted to the main bus. Handle ties and dual, quad or tandem breakers are not acceptable. Mounting hardware, accessories, faceplates, enclosures, etc., shall be provided as required. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be provided with a handle padlock attach- ment. This attachment shall allow the circuit breaker to be padlocked in either the “ON” or “OFF” position. C. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break on manual and automatic operation and the handle mechanism shall be trip-free to prevent holding contacts closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. Contacts shall be of high pressure butt-type and shall be made of a silver alloy material. Arc chutes shall be provided. Automatic thermal and magnetic tripping devices shall be located in each pole for the breaker. The thermal device July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16475-1 00014 D. E. F. G. shall provide time delay tripping on overloads and the magnetic device shall provide instantaneous tripping on short circuits. Circuit breakers with frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have an instantaneous-magnetic trip adjustment of ten (10) times the circuit breaker continuous amp rating (unless otherwise indicated). These adjustments shall be accessible from the front of the breaker. Circuit breakers used for switching lighting loads directly shall be approved Type “SW’. Circuit breakers used to control motor loads directly shall be approved Type “HAM”. Short circuit interrupting capacity shall be as indicated on the plans and shall in no case be less than 14,000 amps symmetrical at 480/277 volt and 10,000 amps symmetrical at 208/120 volt. Series rating is not acceptable. Circuit breakers provided for installation in existing panelboards, distribution panelboards, distribution switchboards and main service equipment shall be of the same manufacturer as the existing equipment. The minimum AIC shall not be less than the rating of the existing switchboard or panelboard. All required modifications to the existing equipment shall be provided including, but not limited to, bus kits and panel modifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Bolted connections shall be torque-tightened to manufacturer’s specifications. B. Clipping of wires from standard cable to fit connectors shall not be permitted. Appropriate connecting device shall be provided for multiple cable connections. 3.2 TESTS A. Each and every circuit breaker shall be tested under load a minimum of three (3) times. END OF SECTION 18475 July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16475-2 00014 SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”, apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. 1. Catalog Information: ;: Luminaire (each type) with photometric pattern Photocontroller i: Ballast (each type) Poles e. Lighting contactors f. Lamps (each type) 2. Shop Drawings: ;: Luminaire (each) Poles and Pole Bases 3. Manufacturers Recommendations: Provide two (2) copies before material is used. a. PVC conduit joints and junctions b. Solvent welding directions 4. Photometric Data: a. Provide a computer generated photometric print-out of each site area to scale (same scale as contract drawings) indicating all applicable photometric data. Lumen output shall use lamp data after bum-in (100 hours). b. Provide actual photometric (horizontal footcandle readings) after installation (and lamp bum-in) for each site area. Readings shall be in accordance with IES and shall be taken at ten (10) foot intervals (north-south and east-west). C. Test Report: 1) Provide a salt spray report for poles and luminaires (identify). 1.3 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide new materials and equipment. Materials shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and bear evidence of such approval where applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16520-l 00014 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. C. 2.3 A. B. C. D. LUMINAIRES Luminaire shall be in accordance with the light fixture schedule. PHOTOELECTRICAL CONTROLS Photoelectric switches shall be Tork, Paragon, Precision Multiple or equal. Type of mounting, poles, voltage, wattage rating and arrangement shall be as shown on the plans. Photoelectric switches shall have fail-safe, load to remain on, in case of cell failure, and shall have minimum time delay of fifteen (15) seconds. It shall have a light sensitivity of three (3) footcandles to turn on and ten (10) footcandles to turn off with movable shield for adjustability. Controls shall be weatherproof with sealed light sensitive element and 360” directional adjustment. POLES AND POLE BASES Poles, brackets and attachments shall be designed for service with wind velocities of 85 mph and a 1.3 wind gust factor considering the force exerted by the wind on the maximum exposure of the fixture selected. Height, shape and finish shall be as indicated on drawings. Each pole shall be straight square (five (5)-inch minimum) steel with height as indicated on the plans. The pole shaft shall be one piece construction fabricated from a weldable grade carbon steel structural tubing. The pole shaft shall conform to ASTM A-500 Grade B with minimum yield strength of 46,000 psi. The pole shaft shall have a full length longitudinal resistance weld and is uniformly square in cross-section with flat sides, small corner radii. There shall be a reinforced handhole of 3x5” inside opening located 1’6” above the base and grounding lug on the opposite side of the handhole. The handhole cover shall have rubberized silicone gasketing and tamperproof screws. The anchor base shall be fabricated from a structural quality hot rolled carbon steel plate that meets a minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi. The anchor basic shall telescope the pole shaft and be circumferentially welded top and bottom. A set of four (4) properly sized anchor bolts, each furnished with two (2) washers and two (2) hex nuts, shall be furnished by the pole manufacturer with each pole. Anchor bolts shall be fabricated from a commercial quality hot rolled carbon steel bar that meets a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-l 53. Pole finish shall be 5-mil black or bronze (as indicated in the Fixture Schedule) powder coat matching fixture. Prior to printing the exterior surface shall be cleaned to meet the “near white” specification as published by the Steel Structure Painting Council Standards “SSPC- SPlO”. The exterior finish shall be a combination of the thennosetting polyester resins, pigments and modifiers electro-statically applied and bonded by heat fusion. The bottom twelve (12) inches of internal pole surface shall be blast cleaned and powder coated in accordance with external coating requirements. The interior surface shall be coated with the thermoplastic hydrocarbon resin. The internal coating shall contain chromate corrosion inhibitors. The internal coating shall overlap the powder coated internal portion of the pole July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16520-2 00014 E. F. Ground Rod: Shall be as specified under Section 16450, “Grounding”. Conduit: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubing, condujt and fittings shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and TC-3 respectively G. -H. Conductors: Shall be as specified under Section 16120, ‘Y/Wing and Cable”. Splices for 600 Volt Conductors: Splices in electrical cables of 600 volt insulation class in underground system shall be made only in accessible locations such as handholes. Splices shall conform to Section 16120, ‘Wiring and Cable.” 2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. B. C. Lighting contactors shall comply with NEMA ICS 2 and shall be electrical operated, electrically held. Unit shall have silver alloy contacts and shall require no arcing contacts. Contactors shall be UL listed and be rated as indicated. Lighting contactors shall be enclosed type with rating shown on the plans and as required. Manufacturers: Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse+ Square D or equal. Provide nameplates for each lighting contactor identifying the item controlled as specified in Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. by a minimum of 6 inches. The pole shall be capable of passing minimum 1000 hours of salt spray exposure (ASTM B-l 17). Contractor shall submit a test report from an independent testing lab showing that the test sample has passed the above test with ratings of “IO” in inscribed area per ASTM Method D-1654. 1. Concrete pole bases shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete as indicated with anchor bolts and conduit entries as indicated. Concrete shall be rated 3,000 psi at twenty-eight (28)-day test and shall conform with the requirements of Division 3 of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Underground cable installation shall conform to National Electrical Code. B. Underground Conduit/Duct without Concrete Encasement: Work shall comply with Section 16110, “Raceways and Fittings”. C. Grounding: Provide a copper equipment grounding conductor in each conduit run and a ground wire coil at each pole as indicated. The equipment grounding conductor shall be as indicated and shall be connected to the pole grgunding connector. Ground wire between poles shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC. 1. Provide 15-O” of #4 (AWG) bare copper ground wire wiled in bottom of pole anchor base excavation [as indicated.] Provide ground connector and clamp ground wire to pole anchor bolts. The ground connection shall be thermit welded type. July 7, 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16520-3 00014 D. Backfill: Shall comply with Section 16110, “Raceways and Fittings”. E. Reconditioning of Surfaces: Paving repairs shall conform to the requirements of Division 2 of the project specification. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. TESTS The Architect shall be notified at least five (5) working days in advance of the Contractors proposed date of the tests to permit witnessing of the tests. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with seven (7) copies of the results of the tests. Circuits: The Contractor shall test each circuit, all controllers and components of the system including individual photoelectric controls for proper operation. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with seven (7) copies of the test results. Grounds: Ground rods shall be tested for ground resistance value before any wire is connected. A portable ground testing megger developing an AC voltage shall be used to test each ground. The auxiliary or reference ground rods shall be 3/4-inch copper clad steel, not less than four (4) feet in length and driven three and one-half (3-112) feet deep and shall be installed in a straight line from the ground being tested. Number 14 AWG standard wire leads with at least 6000 volt rubber insulation shall be connected to the ground being tested, to the two (2) reference grounds and to the proper binding post on the instrument. Where there is more than one (1) ground within a circle of ten (10) feet at a particular location, the reference rods as driven for the “first” test shall be used for tests on the other rods without changing the location. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms, the resistance of the ground under test. Compaction Test: Backfill shall be tested for compaction in accordance with ASTM D1556. Operating Test: The Contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the Architect. END OF SECTION 16520 Julv 7. 2000 Georgina Cole Library 16520-4 00014